Agilent Technologies 8753ET Specifications

Reference Guide
Agilent Technologies
8753ES and 8753ET
Network Analyzers
Part Number 08753-90473
Printed in USA
June 2002
Supersedes February 2001
© Copyright 1999–2002
Agilent Technologies, Inc.
Notice
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
Agilent Technologies makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material,
including but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose. Agilent Technologies shall not be liable for errors contained herein or
for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or
use of this material.
Certification
Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time
of shipment from the factory. Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration
measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and
Technology, to the extent allowed by the Institute's calibration facility, and to the
calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members.
Regulatory and Warranty Information
The regulatory and warranty information is located in the user’s guide.
Assistance
Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available
for Agilent Technologies products. For any assistance, contact your nearest Agilent
Technologies sales or service office. See the user’s guide for the nearest office.
Safety Notes
The following safety notes are used throughout this manual. Familiarize yourself with
each of the notes and its meaning before operating this instrument. All pertinent safety
notes for using this product are located in the user’s guide.
WARNING
Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure which, if
not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in injury or loss
of life. Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated
conditions are fully understood and met.
CAUTION
Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if not
correctly performed or adhered to, would result in damage to or destruction of
the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a caution sign until the indicated
conditions are fully understood and met.
ii
How to Use This Guide
This guide uses the following conventions:
Front-Panel Key
This represents a key physically located on the
instrument.
SOFTKEY
This represents a “softkey,” a key whose label is
determined by the instrument’s firmware.
Screen Text
This represents text displayed on the instrument’s screen.
iii
Documentation Map
The Installation and Quick Start Guide provides procedures for
installing, configuring, and verifying the operation of the analyzer. It
also will help you familiarize yourself with the basic operation of the
analyzer.
The User’s Guide shows how to make measurements, explains
commonly-used features, and tells you how to get the most
performance from your analyzer.
The Reference Guide provides reference information, such as
specifications, menu maps, and key definitions.
The Programmer’s Guide provides general GPIB programming
information, a command reference, and example programs. The
Programmer’s Guide contains a CD-ROM with example programs.
The CD-ROM provides the Installation and Quick Start Guide, the
User’s Guide, the Reference Guide, and the Programmer’s Guide in
PDF format for viewing or printing from a PC.
The Service Guide provides information on calibrating,
troubleshooting, and servicing your analyzer. The Service Guide is not
part of a standard shipment and is available only as Option 0BW, or
by ordering part number 08753-90484. A CD-ROM with the Service
Guide in PDF format is included for viewing or printing from a PC.
iv
Contents
1. 8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Corrected System Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Instrument Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Uncorrected Port Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Test Port Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Test Port Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Speed Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Power Meter Calibration Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
2. 8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Corrected System Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Instrument Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Uncorrected Port Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Test Port Output. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Test Port Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Speed Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
3. Front/Rear Panel
Front Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Analyzer Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Rear Panel Features and Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
4. Menu Maps
Menu Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
5. Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Key Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Where to Look for More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Guide Terms and Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Analyzer Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
6. Error Messages
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Error Messages in Numerical Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
7. Options and Accessories
Using This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Analyzer Options Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Option 1D5, High Stability Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Option 002, Harmonic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Option 004, Source Attenuator (ET Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Option 006, 6 GHz Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Option 010, Time Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Option 011, Delete Built-In Test Set (ES Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Option 014, Configurable Test Set (ES Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Option 075, 75 Ω Impedance (ES Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Option 1CM, Rack Mount Flange Kit Without Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
v
Contents
Option 1CP, Rack Mount Flange Kit With Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Service and Support Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Accessories Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Measurement Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Test-Port Cables: 7-mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Test-Port Cables: Type-N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Calibration Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
RF electronic calibration (ECal) modules and PC software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Verification Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Minimum Loss Pads and Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Test Configuration Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
RF Limiter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Power Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Power Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Keyboard Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
8. Preset State and Memory Allocation
Preset State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Memory Allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Types of Memory and Data Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Volatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Non-Volatile Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
Determining Memory Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Storing Data to Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Conserving Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Using Saved Calibration Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Clearing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
9. Understanding the CITIfile Data Format
Using This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
The CITIfile Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Description and Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Data Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
File and Operating System Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Definition of CITIfile Terms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
A CITIfile Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
The CITIfile Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
An Array of Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
CITIfile Keyword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
CITIfile Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Example 2, An 8510 Display Memory File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Example 3, 8510 Data file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Example 4, 8510 3-Term Frequency List Cal Set File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
CITIfile Keywords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Useful Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Computing Frequency Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Expressing CITIfile Data in Other Data Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Example Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
vi
Contents
10. Determining System Measurement Uncertainties
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Sources of Measurement Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Sources of Systematic Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Sources of Random Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
Determining Expected System Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
Determining Cable Stability Terms (CR1, CR2, CTM1, CTM2, CTP1, CTP2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6
Measurement Uncertainty Equations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Forward Reflection Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8
Forward Transmission Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Reverse Reflection Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Reverse Transmission Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11
vii
Contents
viii
1 8753ES
Specifications and Characteristics
1-1
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Definitions
Definitions
All specifications and characteristics apply over a 25 °C ±5 °C range (unless otherwise
stated) and 1/2 hour after the instrument has been turned on.
Specification (spec.): Warranted performance. Specifications include guardbands to
account for the expected statistical performance distribution, measurement uncertainties,
and changes in performance due to environmental conditions.
Characteristic (char.): A performance parameter that the product is expected to meet
before it leaves the factory, but that is not verified in the field and is not covered by the
product warranty. A characteristic includes the same guardbands as a specification.
Typical (typ.): Expected performance of an average unit which does not include
guardbands. It is not covered by the product warranty.
Nominal (nom.): A general, descriptive term that does not imply a level of performance. It
is not covered by the product warranty.
Calibration: The process of measuring known standards from a calibration kit to
characterize a network analyzer’s systematic (repeatable) errors.
Corrected (residual) Performance: Indicates performance after error correction
(calibration). It is determined by the quality of calibration standards and how well
“known” they are, plus system repeatability, stability, and noise.
Uncorrected (raw) Performance: Indicates instrument performance without error
correction. The uncorrected performance affects the stability of a calibration.
Standard: When referring to the analyzer, this includes all options unless noted otherwise.
1-2
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Corrected System Performance
Corrected System Performance
The specifications in this section apply for measurements made using 10 Hz IF bandwidth,
no averaging, and at an environmental temperature of 25 ±5 °C, with less than 1 °C
deviation from the calibration temperature. Assumes that an isolation calibration was
performed with an averaging factor of 16.
Table 1-1 System Dynamic Range, All Device Connector Types
8753ES, All Options, All Cal Kits, All Cables, 10 Hz IF BW
Description
Specification Supplemental
Information
System Transmission Dynamic Rangea
Standard (50 Ω)
30 kHz to 50 kHz
70 dB
50 kHz to 300 kHz
90 dB
300 kHz to 16 MHz
100 dB
16 MHz to 1.3 GHz
110 dB
1.3 GHz to 3 GHz
110 dB
3 GHz to 6 GHz
105 dB
Option 075 (75 Ω)
30 kHz to 50 kHz
68 dB
50 kHz to 300 kHz
90 dB
300 kHz to 16 MHz
96 dB
16 MHz to 1.3 GHz
106 dB
1.3 GHz to 3 GHz
106 dB
Option 014
30 kHz to 50 kHz
68 dB
50 kHz to 300 kHz
90 dB
300 kHz to 16 MHz
98 dB
16 MHz to 1.3 GHz
108 dB
1.3 GHz to 3 GHz
108 dB
3 GHz to 6 GHz
103 dB
a. The System Transmission Dynamic Range is calculated as the difference
between the receiver noise floor and the lesser of either: the source maximum
output or the receiver maximum input.
1-3
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Corrected System Performance
Table 1-2 7-mm Device Connector Type
Network Analyzer: 8753ES, Standard and Option 006
Calibration Kit: 85031B (7-mm, 50 Ω)
Cables: 11857D
Calibration: Full 2-Port
IF BW = 10 Hz, Avg off, Temp = 25 ± 5 °C with < 1 °C deviation from cal temp, Isol cal with avg = 8
Typical
Description
Specification
30 to 300 kHz
300 kHz to
1.3 GHz
1.3 to 3 GHz
3 to 6 GHz
(Opt 006 only)
Directivity
55 dB
55 dB
51 dB
46 dB
Source Match
55 dB
51 dB
49 dB
43 dB
Load Match
55 dB
55 dB
51 dB
46 dB
Magnitude (db)
±(0.001 + .02/°C)
±(0.001 + .01/°C)
±(0.005 + .02/°C)
±(0.020 + .03/°C)
Phase (deg)
±(0.007 + .05/°C)
±(0.007 + .05/°C)
±(0.033 + .05/°C)
±(0.132 + 0.2/°C)
Magnitude (db)
±(0.009 + .02/°C)
±(0.006 + .01/°C)
±(0.009 + .02/°C)
±(0.021 + .03/°C)
Phase (deg)
±(0.060 + .05/°C)
±(0.040 + .05/°C)
±(0.059 + .05/°C)
±(0.139 + 0.2/°C)
Refl. Tracking
Trans. Tracking
Transmission Uncertainty (Specification)
Reflection Uncertainty (Specification)
1-4
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Corrected System Performance
Table 1-3 Type-N (50 Ω) Device Connector Type
Network Analyzer: 8753ES, Standard and Option 006
Calibration Kit: 85032B/E (Type-N, 50 Ω)
Cables: 11857D
Calibration: Full 2-Port
IF BW = 10 Hz, Avg off, Temp = 25 ± 5 °C with < 1 °C deviation from cal temp, Isol cal with avg = 8
Typical
Description
Specification
30 to 300 kHz
300 kHz to
1.3 GHz
1.3 to 3 GHz
3 to 6 GHz
(Opt 006 only)
Directivity
50 dB
50 dB
47 dB
40 dB
Source Match
49 dB
42 dB
36 dB
31 dB
Load Match
50 dB
50 dB
47 dB
40 dB
Magnitude (db)
±(0.005 + .02/°C)
±(0.009 + .01/°C)
±(0.019 + .02/°C)
±(0.070 + .03/°C)
Phase (deg)
±(0.033 + .05/°C)
±(0.059 + .05/°C)
±(0.125 + .05/°C)
±(0.462 + 0.2/°C)
Magnitude (db)
±(0.017 + .02/°C)
±(0.013 + .01/°C)
±(0.026 + .02/°C)
±(0.065 + .04/°C)
Phase (deg)
±(0.113 + .05/°C)
±(0.277 + .05/°C)
±(0.172 + .05/°C)
±(0.429 + 0.2/°C)
Refl. Tracking
Trans. Tracking
Transmission Uncertainty (Specification)
Reflection Uncertainty (Specification)
1-5
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Corrected System Performance
Table 1-4 3.5-mm Device Connector Type
Network Analyzer: 8753ES, Standard and Option 006
Calibration Kit: 85033D (3.5-mm, 50 Ω)
Cables: 11857D
Calibration: Full 2-Port
IF BW = 10 Hz, Avg off, Temp = 25 ± 5°C with < 1°C deviation from cal temp, Isol cal with avg = 8
Typical
Description
Specification
30 to 300 kHz
300 kHz to
1.3 GHz
1.3 to 3 GHz
3 to 6 GHz
(Opt 006 only)
Directivity
49 dB
46 dB
44 dB
38 dB
Source Match
49 dB
44 dB
41 dB
37 dB
Load Match
49 dB
46 dB
44 dB
38 dB
Magnitude (db)
±(0.001 + .02/°C)
±(0.005 + .01/°C)
±(0.007 + .02/°C)
±(0.009 + .03/°C)
Phase (deg)
±(0.007 + .05/°C)
±(0.033 + .05/°C)
±(0.046 + .05/°C)
±(0.059 + 0.2/°C)
Magnitude (db)
±(0.019 + .02/°C)
±(0.014 + .01/°C)
±(0.022 + .02/°C)
±(0.048 + .03/°C)
Phase (deg)
±(0.124 + .05/°C)
±(0.092 + .05/°C)
±(0.145 + .05/°C)
±(0.317 + 0.2/°C)
Refl. Tracking
Trans. Tracking
Transmission Uncertainty (Specification)
Reflection Uncertainty (Specification)
1-6
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Corrected System Performance
Table 1-5 7/16-mm Device Connector Type
Network Analyzer: 8753ES, Standard and Option 006
Calibration Kit: 85038A (7/16-mm, 50 Ω)
Cables: 11857D
Calibration: Full 2-Port
IF BW = 10 Hz, Avg off, Temp = 25 ± 5°C with < 1°C deviation from cal temp, Isol cal with avg = 8
Typical
Description
Specification
30 to 300 kHz
300 kHz to
1.3 GHz
1.3 to 3 GHz
3 to 6 GHz
(Opt 006 only)
Directivity
40 dB
40 dB
40 dB
36 dB
Source Match
37 dB
37 dB
37 dB
34 dB
Load Match
40 dB
40 dB
40 dB
36 dB
Magnitude (db)
±(0.089 + .02/°C)
±(0.089 + .01/°C)
±(0.089 + .02/°C)
±(0.115 + .03/°C)
Phase (deg)
±(0.587 + .05/°C)
±(0.587 + .05/°C)
±(0.587 + .05/°C)
±(0.759 + 0.2/°C)
Magnitude (db)
±(0.066 + .02/°C)
±(0.029 + .01/°C)
±(0.033 + .02/°C)
±(0.062 + .03/°C)
Phase (deg)
±(0.436 + .05/°C)
±(0.192 + .05/°C)
±(0.219 + .05/°C)
±(0.436 + 0.2/°C)
Refl. Tracking
Trans. Tracking
Transmission Uncertainty (Specification)
Reflection Uncertainty (Specification)
1-7
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Corrected System Performance
Table 1-6 Type-N (75Ω) Device Connector Type
Network Analyzer: 8753ES, Option 075
Calibration Kit: 85036B/E (Type-N, 75Ω)
Cables: 11857B
Calibration: Full 2-Port
IF BW = 10 Hz, Avg off, Temp = 25 ± 5°C with < 1°C deviation from cal temp, Isol cal with avg = 8
Typical
Description
Specification
30 to 300 kHz
300 kHz to
1.3 GHz
1.3 to 3 GHz
3 to 6 GHz
(Opt 006 only)
Directivity
48 dB
48 dB
43 dB
N/A
Source Match
47 dB
41 dB
35 dB
N/A
Load Match
48 dB
48 dB
43 dB
N/A
Magnitude (db)
±(0.004 + .02/°C)
±(0.010 + .01/°C)
±(0.019 + .02/°C)
N/A
Phase (deg)
±(0.026 + .05/°C)
±(0.066 + .05/°C)
±(0.125 + .05/°C)
N/A
Magnitude (db)
±(0.022 + .02/°C)
±(0.016 + .01/°C)
±(0.033 + .02/°C)
N/A
Phase (deg)
±(0.143 + .05/°C)
±(0.106 + .05/°C)
±(0.218 + .05/°C)
N/A
Refl. Tracking
Trans. Tracking
Transmission Uncertainty (Specification)
Reflection Uncertainty (Specification)
1-8
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Corrected System Performance
Table 1-7 Type-F (75 Ω) Device Connector Type
Network Analyzer: 8753ES, Option 075
Calibration Kit: 85039B (Type-F, 75 Ω)
Cables: 11857B
Calibration: Full 2-Port
IF BW = 10 Hz, Avg off, Temp = 25 ± 5 °C with < 1 °C deviation from cal temp, Isol cal with avg = 8
Typical
Description
Specification
30 to 300 kHz
300 kHz to
1.3 GHz
1.3 to 3 GHz
3 to 6 GHz
(Opt 006 only)
Directivity
45 dB
45 dB
40 dB
N/A
Source Match
40 dB
40 dB
30 dB
N/A
Load Match
45 dB
45 dB
40 dB
N/A
Magnitude (db)
±(0.043 + .02/°C)
±(0.060 + .01/°C)
±(0.0240 +.02/°C)
N/A
Phase (deg)
±(0.396 + .05/°C)
±(0.396 + .05/°C)
±(0.158 + .05/°C)
N/A
Magnitude (db)
±(0.033 + .02/°C)
±(0.019 + .01/°C)
±(0.057 +.02/°C)
N/A
Phase (deg)
±(0.283 + .05/°C)
±(0.125 + .05/°C)
±(0.376 + .05/°C)
N/A
Refl. Tracking
Trans. Tracking
Transmission Uncertainty (Specification)
Reflection Uncertainty (Specification)
1-9
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Instrument Specifications
Uncorrected Port Performance
Table 1-8 7-mm Device Connector Type
8753ES (7-mm, 50 Ω), Standard and Option 006
Specification
30 kHz to
50 kHz
50 kHz to
300 kHz
300 kHz to
1.3 GHz
1.3 GHz to
3 GHz
3 to 6 GHz
(Opt 006
only)
Directivitya (dB)
15, typ.
20, typ.
35
30
25
Source Matcha (dB)
10, typ.
18, typ.
16
16
14
Load Matcha (dB)
10, typ.
18, typ.
18
16
14
Reflection
Trackinga (dB)
±2.5, typ.
±2.5, typ.
±1.0
±1.0
±1.5
Transmission
Trackinga (dB)
±2.5, typ.
±2.5, typ.
±1.0
±1.0
±1.5
Magnitude (dB)
.002/°C, typ.
.002/°C, typ.
.002/°C, typ.
.002/°C, typ. 0.04/°C, typ.
Phase (deg)
.004/°C, typ.
.004/°C, typ.
.004/°C, typ.
.004/°C, typ.
60, typ.
90, typ.
100
100
Description
Tracking Stability
(Ratio Measurement)
Crosstalkb
(dB)
0.20/°C, typ.
90
a. Does not include the effect of the cable set on the test ports.
b. Measurement conditions: Normalized to a thru, measured with two shorts, 10 Hz IF
bandwidth, averaging factor of 8, alternate mode, source power set to the lesser of the
maximum power out or the maximum receiver power.
1-10
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 1-9 Type-N (75 Ω) Device Connector Type
8753ES (Type-N, 75Ω), Option 075
Description
Specification
30 kHz to
50 kHz
50 kHz to
300 kHz
300 kHz to
1.3 GHz
1.3 GHz to
3 GHz
3 to 6 GHz
(Opt 006 only)
Directivitya (dB)
15, typ.
20, typ.
35
30
N/A
Source Matcha (dB)
10, typ.
18, typ.
16
16
N/A
Load Matcha (dB)
10, typ.
18, typ.
18
16
N/A
Reflection
Trackinga (dB)
±2.5, typ.
±2.5, typ.
±1.0
±1.0
Transmission
Trackinga (dB)
±2.5, typ.
±2.5, typ.
±1.0
±1.0
N/A
N/A
Tracking Stability
(Ratio Measurement)
Magnitude (dB)
.002/°C, typ.
.002/°C, typ. .002/°C, typ. .002/°C, typ. 0.04/°C, typ.
Phase (deg)
.004/°C, typ.
.004/°C, typ. .004/°C, typ. .004/°C, typ. 0.20 °/°C, typ.
Crosstalkb
(dB)
60, typ.
90, typ.
100
100
N/A
a. Does not include the effect of the cable set on the test ports.
b. Measurement conditions: Normalized to a thru, measured with two shorts, 10 Hz IF
bandwidth, averaging factor of 8, alternate mode, source power set to the lesser of the
maximum power out or the maximum receiver power.
1-11
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Test Port Output
Table 1-10 Test Port Output
8753ES Test Port Output
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
Standard
30 kHz to 3.0 GHz
10 kHz to 3 GHz, typ.
Option 006
30 kHz to 6.0 GHz
10 kHz to 6 GHz, typ.
Frequency
Range
Resolution
1 Hz
Stability
Standard
±7.5 ppm, 0˚ to 55˚C, typ.
±3 ppm/year, typ.
Option 1D5
0.05 ppm, 0˚ to 55˚C, typ.
±0.5 ppm/year, typ.
±10 ppm
CW Accuracy
at 25˚C ±5 ˚C
Output Powera (above 300 kHz)
Level Accuracyb
Standard
Option 075
Maximum Leveled
±1.0 dB
at 0 dBm output level
±1.0 dB
at 0 dBm output level
Powerc
Standard
+10 dBm, char.
Option 075
+8 dBm, char.
Option 014
+8 dBm, char.
Power Ranged
Standard
−85 to +10 dBm
Option 075
−85 to +8 dBm
Option 014
−85 to +8 dBm
Power Sweep Range
Standard
25 dB
33 dB, typ.
Option 075
23 dB
31 dB, typ.
Option 014
23 dB
31 dB, typ.
a. Source output performance on port 1 only. Port 2 output performance is a characteristic.
b. Absolute power accuracy at a given power level. Includes absolute accuracy and relative
flatness across frequency.
c. At any given frequency, the achievable power while remaining leveled. Applies to CW
mode only.
d. Power to which the source can be set and phase lock is assured.
1-12
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 1-11 Test Port Output
8753ES Test Port Output
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
Output Powera (above 300 kHz)
Power Resolution
0.01 dB
Attenuator Switch Points:
a. Source output performance on port 1 only. Port 2 output performance is a characteristic.
1-13
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 1-12 Test Port Output
8753ES Test Port Output
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
Output Powera (above 300 kHz)
Linearityb
Standard
−15 to +5 dBm
±0.2 dB
relative to 0 dBm output level
+5 to +10 dBm
±0.5 dB
relative to 0 dBm output level
−15 to +5 dBm
±0.2 dB
relative to 0 dBm output level
+5 to +8 dBm
±0.5 dB
relative to 0 dBm output level
Option 014/Option 075
Impedance
Standard
50 Ω, nom.
Option 075
75 Ω, nom.
Return Loss
Standard
300 kHz to 3 GHz
> 16 dB, typ.
3 GHz to 6 GHz
> 14 dB, typ.
Option 075
300 kHz to 3 GHz
> 16 dB, typ.
Attenuator Accuracyc
0 dB
reference; at 50 MHz
300 kHz to 3 GHz
3 GHz to 6 GHz
10 dB
± 0.2 dB, char.
± 0.5 dB, char.
20 dB
± 0.4 dB, char.
± 0.7 dB, char.
30 dB
± 0.5 dB, char.
± 0.9 dB, char.
40 dB
± 0.7 dB, char.
± 1.2 dB, char.
50 dB
± 0.8 dB, char.
± 1.5 dB, char.
60 dB
± 1.0 dB, char.
± 1.8dB, char.
70 dB
± 1.2 dB, char.
± 2.1 dB, char.
a. Source output performance on port 1 only. Port 2 output performance is a characteristic.
b. Change in source output power for a given change in source power setting at any given
frequency.
c. The accuracy, relative to the 0 dB setting, of each setting of an attenuator, at a given
frequency.
1-14
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 1-13 Test Port Output
8753ES Test Port Output
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
Signal Puritya
2nd Harmonic
at maximum output power
16 MHz to 1.5 GHz
(source freq.)
16 MHz to 3 GHz
(Option 006, source freq.)
< −25 dBc (Option 002 only)
< −25 dBc, char.
(non-Option 002)
at 10 dB below maximum
output power
< −40 dBc, typ.
at 20 dB below maximum
output power
< −50 dBc, typ.
3rd Harmonic
at maximum output power
16 MHz to 1 GHz
(source freq.)
16 MHz to 2 GHz
(Option 006, source freq.)
< −25 dBc (Option 002 only)
< −25 dBc, char.
(non-Option 002)
at 10 dB below maximum
output power
< −40 dBc, typ.
at 20 dB below maximum
output power
< −50 dBc, typ.
Non-harmonic Spurious
Mixer Related
at maximum output power
< −30 dBc, typ.
at 20 dB below maximum
output power
< −55 dBc, typ.
a. Source output performance on port 1 only. Port 2 output performance is a characteristic.
1-15
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Test Port Input
Table 1-14 Test Port Input
8753ES Test Port Input
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
Standard
30 kHz to 3.0 GHz
10 kHz to 3 GHz, typ.
Option 006
30 kHz to 6.0 GHz
10 kHz to 6 GHz, typ.
Frequency Range
Frequency Response, Non-Ratio Measurement (A or B)
300 kHz to 3 GHz
±1 dB
at preset power level
3 GHz to 6 GHz
±2 dB
at preset power level
Impedance
50 Ω, nominal.
Standard
Return Loss
Standard
See uncorrected load match
chart
Maximum Input Level
Standard
+10 dBm
Compression
See dynamic accuracy chart
Damage Level
Standard
> +26 dBm or > 35 Vdc, typ.
Noise Floora
8753ES
300 kHz to 3 GHz
3 kHz IF Bandwidth
≤−82 dBm
10 Hz IF Bandwidth
≤−102 dBm
≤−110 dBm, typ.
3 GHz to 6 GHz
3 kHz IF Bandwidth
≤−77 dBm
10 Hz IF Bandwidth
≤−97 dBm
≤−105 dBm, typ.
8753ES Option 075
300 kHz to 3 GHz
3 kHz IF Bandwidth
≤−80 dBm
10 Hz IF Bandwidth
≤−100 dBm
≤−110 dBm, typ.
a. RMS value of a linear magnitude trace expressed in dBm, with the source power set to
minimum to minimize the effects of crosstalk.
1-16
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 1-15 Test Port Input
8753ES Test Port Input
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
Internally Generated Harmonics (Option 002 Only)
2nd Harmonic
at +8 dBm input level
16 MHz to 3 GHz
< −15 dBc
at +0 dBm input level
< −30 dBc, typ.
at −15 dBm input level
< −45 dBc, typ.
3rd Harmonic
at +8 dBm input level
16 MHz to 2 GHz
< −30 dBc
at +0 dBm input level
< −50 dBc, typ.
at −15 dBm input level
< −50 dBc, typ.
Harmonic Measurement Accuracy
16 MHz to 3 GHz
±1.5 dB
3 GHz to 6 GHz
±3 dB
Harmonic Measurement Dynamic Range
−40 dBc, typ.
output at −10 dBm and input
at < −15 dBm
Standard
Frequency Offset Operationa
Frequency Range
Standard
300 kHz to 3 GHz
Option 006
300 kHz to 6 GHz
R Channel Input Requirements
300 kHz to 3 GHz
0 to −35 dBm
3 GHz to 6 GHz
0 to −30 dBm
LO Spectral Purity and
Accuracy
Maximum Spurious Input
< −25 dBc, typ.
Residual FM
< 20 kHz, typ.
Frequency Accuracy
−1 to +1 MHz of nominal
frequency, typ.
a. The RF source characteristics in this mode are dependent on the stability of the external
LO source. The RF source tracks the LO to maintain a stable IF signal at the R channel
receiver input.
1-17
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 1-16 Test Port Input
8753ES Test Port Input
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
Standard
300 kHz to 3 GHz
at −25 dBm R channel power
level
Option 006
300 kHz to 6 GHz
External Source Modea
Frequency Range
R Input Requirements
Power Level
0 to −25 dBm, typ.
R Input Spectral Purity
Requirement
Maximum Spurious Input
< −30 dBc, typ.
Residual FM
< 20 kHz, typ.
Settling Time
Auto
500 ms, typ.
Manual
50 ms, typ.
Frequency Readout Accuracy
0.1%, auto, typ.
Input Frequency Accuracy
Requirement
Manual
−0.5 to 5 MHz, typ.
a. Measurement accuracy is dependent on the stability of the input signal.
1-18
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 1-17 Test Port Input
8753ES Test Port Input
Description
Specification
System Bandwidths
3000 Hz
10 Hz
300 kHz to 3GHz
< 0.006 dB rms
< 0.001 dB rms
3 GHz to 6 GHz
< 0.010 dB rms
< 0.002 dB rms
300 kHz to 3GHz
< 0.038° rms
< 0.006° rms
3 GHz to 6 GHz
< 0.070° rms
< 0.012° rms
Trace Noisea
Magnitude
Phase
a. Trace noise is defined for a transmission measurement in CW mode, using a
“through” cable having 0 dB loss, with the source set to +5 dBm, and no
averaging.
Table 1-18 Test Port Input
8753ES Test Port Input
Description
Specification
Supplemental
Information
Reference Level
Magnitude
Range
±500 dB
Resolution
0.001 dB
Phase
Range
±500°
Resolution
0.01°
1-19
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 1-19 Test Port Input
8753ES Test Port Input
Dynamic Accuracy (Specification)
For input ports 1 and 2, accuracy of the test port input power reading relative to the reference
input power level.
• Inputs: testport 1 and 2
• For test port powers > −50 dBm and < 0 dBm, magnitude dynamic accuracy is
0.02 dB + 0.001 dB/dB from the reference power, phase dynamic accuracy is
0.132 deg + 0.0066 deg/dB from the reference power.
• For Option 075 and 014, for test port powers up to the maximum source power.
1-20
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 1-20 Test Port Input
8753ES R-Channel Input
Dynamic Accuracy (Typical)
Accuracy of the R-channel power reading relative to the R-channel reference power level.
This table applies when the calibrated power level and the measurement power level are not the
same.
Inputs:
• R-channel
• For Option 075 and 014, for test port powers up to the maximum source power.
300 KHz to 3 GHz
3 to 6 GHz
Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy
for Test Port Powers
> −50 dBm and < 0 dBm
.02 dB + .001 dB/dB
from the reference power
.02 dB + .001 dB/dB
from the reference power
> 0 dBm and < 10 dBm
.02 dB + .02 dB/dB
above 0 dBm
.02 dB + .03 dB/dB
above 0 dBm
> −50 dBm and < 0 dBm
.132 deg + .0066 deg/dB
from the reference power
.132 deg + .0066 deg/dB
from the reference power
> 0 dBm and < 10 dBm
.132 deg + .132 deg/dB
above 0 dBm
.132 deg + .198 deg/dB
above 0 dBm
Phase Dynamic Accuracy for
Test Port Powers
1-21
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
General Information
Table 1-21 General Information
8753ES General Information
Description
Specification
Display Range
Magnitude
±200 dB (at 20 dB/div), max
Phase
±180°, max
Polar
10 pico units, min
1000 units, max
Display Resolution
Magnitude
0.001 dB/div, min
Phase
0.01°/div, min
Reference Value Range
Magnitude
±500 dB, max
Phase
±360 °, max
Reference Level Resolution
Magnitude
0.001 dB, min
Phase
0.01°, min
Marker Resolution
Magnitude
0.001 dB, min
Phase
0.01°, min
Polar
0.01 mUnit, min; 0.01, min
1-22
Supplemental Information
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 1-22 General Information
8753ES General Information
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
Group Delaya
Aperture (selectable)
(frequency span)/(number of
points −1)
Maximum Aperture
20% of frequency span
Range
1/2 × (1/minimum aperture)
with smoothing enabled
Maximum Delay
Limited to measuring no more
than 180° of phase change
within the minimum
aperture.)
Accuracy
See graph. Char.
The following graph shows group delay accuracy with 7-mm full 2-port calibration and a 10 Hz IF
bandwidth. Insertion loss is assumed to be < 2 dB and electrical length to be ten meters.
In general, the following formula can be used to determine the accuracy, in seconds, of specific
group delay measurement:
±Relative Phase Accuracyb (deg)/[360 × Aperture (Hz)]
Depending on the aperture and device length, the phase accuracy used is either phase dynamic
accuracy specification or worst case transmission uncertainty phase specification.
a. Group delay is computed by measuring the phase change within a specified frequency
step (determined by the frequency span and the number of points per sweep).
b. Relative phase accuracy is an unspecified parameter. For very narrow apertures with
short devices under test RF systematic error terms can be assumed constant. As aperture
or device electrical length or both increase, RF systematic errors become increasingly
important. Eventually, relative phase accuracy is the same as absolute phase accuracy.
1-23
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 1-23 General Information
8753ES General Information
Description
Supplemental Information
System Bandwidths
IF bandwidth settings
6000 Hz, nom.
3700 Hz, nom.
3000 Hz, nom.
1000 Hz nom.
300 Hz, nom.
100 Hz, nom.
30 Hz, nom.
10 Hz, nom.
Rear Panel
External Auxiliary Input
Connector
Female BNC
Range
±10 V, typ.
External Trigger
Triggers on a positive or negative TTL transition or contact
closure to ground.
Damage Level
< −0.2 V; > +5.2 V, typ.
Limit Test Output
Female BNC.
Damage Level
< −0.2 V; > +5.2 V, typ.
Test Sequence Output
Outputs a TTL signal which can be set to a TTL high pulse
(default) or low pulse at end of sweep; or a fixed TTL high or
low. If limit test is on, the end of sweep pulse occurs after the
limit test is valid. This is useful when used in conjunction with
test sequencing.
Test Set Interconnect
25-pin-D-sub (DB-25) female; use for external special test sets
(K36, K39, etc.)
Measure Restart
Floating closure to restart measurement.
External AM Input
±1 volt into a 5 kΩ resistor, 1 kHz maximum, resulting in
approximately 8 dB/volt amplitude modulation.
High Stability Frequency
Reference Output (10 MHz)
(Option 1D5)
Frequency
10.0000 MHz, char.
Frequency Stability
(0 °C to 55 °C)
±0.05 ppm, char.
Daily aging rate (after 30 days) < 3 x 10−9/day, char.
Yearly aging rate
±0.5 ppm/year, char.
Ouput
≥0 dBm, char.
Output Impedance
50 Ω, nom.
1-24
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 1-24 General Information
8753ES General Information
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
Rear Panel
Test Port Bias Input
Maximum voltage
±30 Vdc
Maximum current (no degradation in
RF specifications)
±200 mA
Maximum current
±1 A
External Reference In
Input Frequency
1, 2, 5, and 10 MHz ±200 Hz at 10 MHz
Input Power
−10 dBm to +20 dBm, typ.
Input Impedance
50 Ω, nom.
VGA Video Output
15-pin mini D-Sub; female. Drives
VGA compatible monitors.
GPIB
Type-57, 24-pin; Microribbon
female
Parallel Port
25-pin D-Sub (DB-25); female;
may be used as printer port or
general purpose I.O. port
RS232
9-pin D-Sub (DB-9); male
Mini-DIN Keyboard/Barcode Reader
6-pin mini DIN (PS/2); female
Line Power
A third-wire ground is required.
Frequency
47 Hz to 66 Hz
Voltage at 115 V setting
90 V to 132 V
115 V, nom.
Voltage at 220 V setting
198 V to 265 V
230 V, nom.
VA Maximum
350 VA max
Front Panel
RF Connectors
7-mm precision, 50 ohm
Type-N, 75 ohm (Option 075)
Connector center pin protrusion
(for 7-mm precision only)
0.000 to 0.003 in.
Probe Power
3-pin connector; male
Positive Supply
400 mA, max
+15 V ±2%, char.
the maximum combined load for
both probe connectors, char.
Negative Supply
300 mA, max
−12.6 V ±5%, char.
the maximum combined load for
both probe connectors, char.
1-25
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 1-25 General Information
8753ES General Information
Description
Specification
Front Panel
Display Pixel Integrity
Red, Green, or Blue Pixels
Red, green, or blue “stuck on” pixels may
appear against a black background. In a
properly working display, the following will
not occur:
• complete rows or columns of stuck pixels
• more than 5 stuck pixels (not to exceed a
maximum of 2 red or blue, and 3 green)
• 2 or more consecutive stuck pixels
• stuck pixels less than 6.5 mm apart
Dark Pixels
Dark “stuck on” pixels may appear against a
white background. In a properly working
display, the following will not occur:
• more than 12 stuck pixels (not to exceed a
maximum of 7 red, green, or blue)
• more than one occurrence of 2
consecutive stuck pixels
• stuck pixels less than 6.5 mm apart
1-26
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 1-26 General Information
8753ES General Information
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
General Environmental
RFI/EMI Susceptibility
Defined by CISPR Pub. 11 and
FCC Class B standards.
ESD
Minimize using static-safe
work procedures and an
antistatic bench mat
(part number 9300-0797).
Dust
Minimize for optimum
reliability.
Operating Environment
Temperature
0 °C to +55 °C
Error-corrected temperature
range
Instrument powers up, phase
locks, and displays no error
messages within this
temperature range.
see system specifications
Humidity
5% to 95% at +40 °C
(non-condensing)
Altitude
0 to 4.5 km (15,000 ft)
Storage Conditions
Temperature
−40 °C to +70 °C
Humidity
0% to 95% RH at +65 °C
(non-condensing)
Altitude
0 to 15.24 km (50,000 ft)
Cabinet Dimensions
Height x Width x Depth
222 x 425 x 457 mm, nom.
(8.75 x 16.75 x 18 in, nom.)
Cabinet dimensions exclude
front and rear protrusions.
Weight
Shipping
32 kg (77 lb), nom.
Net
24 kg (53 lb), nom.
Internal Memory - Data Retention Time with 3 V, 1.2 Ah Batterya
70 °C
250 days (0.68 year), typ.
40 °C
1244 days (3.4 years), typ.
25 °C
10 years, typ.
a. Analyzer power is switched off.
1-27
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Speed Parameters
Table 1-27 8753ES Measurement and Data Transfer Speed Performance
Typical Time for Completion (ms)
Description
Number of Points
51
201
401
1601
Typical Time for Completion (in ms), Center 1 GHz, Span 10 MHz, IFBW=6000
Uncorrected
32
70
121
423
1-port and Enhanced Response cala
35
71
1271
440
2-port calb
62
139
240
848
Typical Time for Completion (in ms), Start 30 kHz, Stop 3 GHz, IFBW=6000
Uncorrected
202
270
304
615
1-port and Enhanced Response cala
202
270
304
615
2-port calb
402
540
607
1237
Typical Time for Completion (in ms), Start 30 kHz, Stop 6 GHz, IFBW=6000
Uncorrected
1-port and Enhanced Response
2-port calb
cala
310
380
415
658
310
380
415
658
618
757
829
1315
Time Domainc (increase over uncorrected sweep time)
Conversions
12
42
86
378
Gating (Frequency Domain)
14
40
80
349
10
16
21
58
32 bit
11
19
28
83
64 bit
13
26
42
141
ASCII
35
112
214
831
GPIB Data
Transferd:
Binary (Internal)
IEEE754 floating point format
a. S11 1-port calibration, with a 6 kHz IF bandwidth. Includes system retrace time, but
does not include bandswitch time. Time domain gating is assumed off.
b. S21 measurement with full 2-port calibration, using a 6 kHz IF bandwidth. Includes
system retrace time and RF switching time, but does not include bandswitch time. Time
domain gating is assumed off.
c. Option 010 only, gating off.
d. Measured with HP Omnibook 7100 Pentium Pro computer.
1-28
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 1-28 8753ES Recall and Sweep Speed Performance
Total Time,
typical (secs)
Operations
Channel
Points
Recall-Only
Time, typical
(secs)
Raw
Offset
Blank
Off
Blank
On
Blank
Off
Blank
On
Error Correction
ON
Recall and Sweep
Single Chan. 201
On
0.389
0.260
0.250
0.126
Recall and Sweep
Single Chan. 201
Off
0.340
0.210
0.201
0.077
Sweep only (no Recall)
Single Chan. 201
N/A
0.139
0.134
N/A
N/A
Recall and Sweep
Single Chan. 1601
On
1.480
1.347
0.632
0.506
Recall and Sweep
Single Chan. 1601
Off
1.102
0.969
0.254
0.128
Sweep only (no Recall)
Single Chan. 1601
N/A
0.848
0.841
N/A
N/A
Recall and Sweep
Dual Chan.
201
On
0.539
0.389
0.357
0.215
Recall and Sweep
Dual Chan.
201
Off
0.489
0.328
0.308
0.154
Sweep only (no Recall)
Dual Chan.
201
N/A
0.182
0.174
N/A
N/A
Recall and Sweep
Dual Chan.
1601
On
2.386
2.219
1.208
1.049
Recall and Sweep
Dual Chan.
1601
Off
2.007
1.839
0.829
0.669
Sweep only (no Recall)
Dual Chan.
1601
N/A
1.178
1.170
N/A
N/A
Error Correction
OFF
Recall and Sweep
Single Chan. 201
On
0.240
0.147
0.170
0.082
Recall and Sweep
Single Chan. 201
Off
0.227
0.134
0.157
0.069
Sweep only (no Recall)
Single Chan. 201
N/A
0.070
0.065
N/A
N/A
Recall and Sweep
Single Chan. 1601
On
0.675
0.587
0.252
0.168
Recall and Sweep
Single Chan. 1601
Off
0.581
0.491
0.157
0.073
Sweep only (no Recall)
Single Chan. 1601
N/A
0.423
0.419
N/A
N/A
Recall and Sweep
Dual Chan.
201
On
0.306
0.170
0.235
0.104
Recall and Sweep
Dual Chan.
201
Off
0.281
0.145
0.211
0.080
Sweep only (no Recall)
Dual Chan.
201
N/A
0.071
0.066
N/A
N/A
Recall and Sweep
Dual Chan.
1601
On
0.802
0.692
0.377
0.273
Recall and Sweep
Dual Chan.
1601
Off
0.613
0.503
0.188
0.084
Sweep only (no Recall)
Dual Chan.
1601
N/A
0.424
0.419
N/A
N/A
Instrument State: CF = 1 GHz, Span = 2 MHz, IF BW = 6 kHz. GPIB commands sent for timing are
Recall;OPC?;SING; or, for sweep only, OPC?;SING;.
1-29
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 1-29 Sweep Time vs. IF Bandwidth
IF Bandwidth
Typical Sweep Time (seconds) a
6000
0.070
3700
0.095
3000
0.121
1000
0.248
300
0.704
100
2.022
30
6.987
10
21.365
a. Preset condition, CF = 1 GHz, Span = 100 MHz; includes retrace time, 201 points.
Table 1-30 Sweep Time vs. Number of Points
Number of Points
Typical Sweep Time (seconds) a
51
0.039
101
0.057
201
0.095
401
0.171
801
0.323
1601
0.625
a. Preset condition, CF = 1 GHz, Span = 100 MHz, Correction off; includes retrace time.
Measurement speed can be improved by selecting the widest IF bandwidth setting of
6000 Hz.
1-30
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Power Meter Calibration Accuracy
Table 1-31 Power Meter Calibration Sweep Speed and Accuracy
Power Desired at
Test Port
+5 dBm
−15 dBm
−30 dBm
Number of
Readings
Sweep Time
Setting (seconds) a
Characteristic
Accuracy (dB) b
1
33
±0.7
2
64
±0.2
3
95
±0.1
1
48
±0.7
2
92
±0.2
3
123
±0.1
1
194
±0.7
2
360
±0.2
3
447
±0.1
a. Sweep speed applies to every sweep in continuous correction mode, and to the first
sweep in sample-and-sweep mode. Subsequent sweeps in sample-and-sweep mode
will be much faster.
b. The accuracy values were derived by combining the accuracy of the power meter and
linearity of the analyzer's internal source, as well as the mismatch uncertainty
associated with the power sensor.
1-31
8753ES Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
1-32
2 8753ET
Specifications and Characteristics
2-1
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Definitions
Definitions
All specifications and characteristics apply over a 25 °C ±5 °C range (unless otherwise
stated) and 1/2 hour after the instrument has been turned on.
Specification (spec.): Warranted performance. Specifications include guardbands to
account for the expected statistical performance distribution, measurement uncertainties,
and changes in performance due to environmental conditions.
Characteristic (char.): A performance parameter that the product is expected to meet
before it leaves the factory, but that is not verified in the field and is not covered by the
product warranty. A characteristic includes the same guardbands as a specification.
Typical (typ.): Expected performance of an average unit which does not include
guardbands. It is not covered by the product warranty.
Nominal (nom.): A general, descriptive term that does not imply a level of performance. It
is not covered by the product warranty.
Calibration: The process of measuring known standards from a calibration kit to
characterize a network analyzer’s systematic (repeatable) errors.
Corrected (residual) Performance: Indicates performance after error correction
(calibration). It is determined by the quality of calibration standards and how well
“known” they are, plus system repeatability, stability, and noise.
Uncorrected (raw) Performance: Indicates instrument performance without error
correction. The uncorrected performance affects the stability of a calibration.
Standard: When referring to the analyzer, this includes all options unless noted otherwise.
2-2
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Corrected System Performance
Corrected System Performance
The specifications in this section apply for measurements made using 10 Hz IF bandwidth,
no averaging, and at an environmental temperature of 25 ±5 °C, with less than 1 °C
deviation from the calibration temperature. Assumes that an isolation calibration was
performed with an averaging factor of 16.
Table 2-1 System Dynamic Range, All Device Connector Types
8753ET, All Options, All Cal Kits, All Cables, 10 Hz IF BW
Description
Specification
Supplemental
Information
System Transmission Dynamic Rangea
300 kHz to 16 MHz
100 dB
16 MHz to 1.3 GHz
110 dB
1.3 GHz to 3 GHz
110 dB
3 GHz to 6 GHz
105 dB
a. The System Transmission Dynamic Range is calculated as the difference
between the receiver noise floor and the lesser of either: the source maximum
output or the receiver maximum input.
2-3
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Corrected System Performance
Table 2-2 Type-N (50 Ω) Device Connector Type
Network Analyzer: 8753ET Standard or Option 004 Attenuator
Calibration Kit: 85032B/E (Type-N, 50 Ω)
Cables: 8120-5639
Calibration: See Below
IF BW = 10 Hz, Avg = off, Temp = 25 ± 5 °C with < 1 °C deviation from cal temp, Isol cal with avg = 8
Specification
Description
300 kHz to 1.3 GHz
1.3 to 3 GHz
3 to 6 GHz
(Opt 006 only)
Reflection Measurementsa
Directivity (dB)
50
47
40
Source Match (dB)
42
36
31
24
19
16
Magnitude (dB)
±(0.009 + .01/°C)
±(0.019 + .02/°C)
±(0.07 + .03/°C)
Phase (deg)
±(0.059 + .05/°C)
±(0.125 + .05/°C)
±(0.462 + .2/°C)
42
36
31
Standard
25
20
14
Option 004
23
18
14
24
19
16
Magnitude (dB)
±(0.006 + .01/°C)
±(0.018 + .02/°C)
±(0.054 + .03/°C)
Phase (deg)
±(0.0396 + .05/°C)
±(0.119 + .05/°C)
±(0.389 + .20/°C)
Magnitude (dB)
±(0.031 + .01/°C)
±(0.1 + .02/°C)
±(0.27 + .03/°C)
Phase (deg)
±(0.203 + .05/°C)
±(0.66 + .05/°C)
±(1.78 + .20/°C)
Magnitude (dB)
±(0.039 + .01/°C)
±(0.122 + .02/°C)
±(0.27 + .03/°C)
Phase (deg)
±(0.255 + .05/°C)
±(0.804 + .05/°C)
±(1.78 + .20/°C)
Load Match
One-Port Cal
Tracking
Transmission Measurementsb
Source Match (dB)
Enhanced Response Cal
Response Only Cal
Load Match
Tracking
Enhanced Response Cal
Response Only Cal
Standard
Option 004
Uncertainty graphs are on the following page.
a. One-port or enhanced response calibration.
b. Enhanced response or response only calibration.
2-4
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Corrected System Performance
Transmissiona Uncertainty: Enhanced Response Calibration (Specification)
Transmission Uncertainty: Response Calibration (Specification)
Reflection Uncertainty: One-Port Calibration (Specification)
a. Option 004 may degrade transmission source match as much as 2 dB, resulting in up to
0.05 dB additional uncertainty in transmission uncertainty.
2-5
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Instrument Specifications
Uncorrected Port Performance
Table 2-3 Type-N (50 Ω) Device Connector Type
8753ET (Type-N, 50 Ω)
Specification
Description
300 kHz to
1.3 GHz
1.3 to 3 GHz
3 to 6 GHz
(Opt 006 only)
30
24
19
Standard (dB)
25
20
14
Option 004 (dB)
23
18
14
24
19
16
Reflection
Trackinga (dB)
±1.0
±1.0
±2.0
Transmission
Trackinga (dB)
±1.5
±1.5
±2.5
Magnitude (db)
.002/°C, typ.
.002/°C, typ.
.004/°C, typ.
Phase (deg)
.004/°C, typ.
.004/°C, typ.
.020/°C, typ.
100
100
90
Directivitya (dB)
Source Matcha
Load
Matcha
(dB)
Tracking Stability
(Ratio Measurement)
Crosstalkb
(dB)
a. Does not include the effect of the cable set on the test ports.
b. Measurement conditions: Normalized to a thru, measured with two shorts, 10 Hz IF
bandwidth, averaging factor of 8, alternate mode, source power set to the lesser of the
maximum power out or the maximum receiver power.
2-6
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Test Port Output
Table 2-4 Test Port Output
8753ET Test Port Output
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
Standard
300 kHz to 3.0 GHz
10 kHz to 3 GHz, typ.
Option 006
300 kHz to 6.0 GHz
10 kHz to 6 GHz, typ.
Frequency
Range
Resolution
1 Hz
Stability
Standard
±7.5 ppm, 0° to 55 °C, typ.
±3 ppm/year, typ.
Option 1D5
±0.05 ppm, 0° to 55 °C, typ.
±0.5 ppm/year, typ.
CW Accuracy
±10 ppm
at 25 °C ±5 °C
Output Power (above 300 kHz)
Level Accuracya
With Option 004 Attenuator
±1.0 dB
at −10 dBm output level
Without Attenuator
±1.0 dB
at −5 dBm output level
Maximum Leveled Powerb
With Option 004 Attenuator
+10 dBm, char.
Without Attenuator
+5 dBm, char.
Power
Rangec
With Option 004 Attenuator
−85 to +10 dBm
Without Attenuator
−20 to +5 dBm
Power Sweep Range
With Option 004 Attenuator
25 dB
33 dB, typ.
Without Attenuator
25 dB
33 dB, typ.
a. Absolute power accuracy at a given power level. Includes absolute accuracy and relative
flatness across frequency.
b. At any given frequency, the achievable power while remaining leveled. Applies to CW
mode only.
c. Power to which the source can be set and phase lock is assured.
2-7
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 2-5 Test Port Output
8753ET Test Port Output
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
Output Powera (above 300 kHz)
Power Resolution
0.01 dB
Attenuator Switch Points (Option 004 Only):
a. Source output performance on port 1 only. Port 2 output performance is a characteristic.
2-8
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 2-6 Test Port Output
8753ET Test Port Output
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
Output Power (above 300 kHz)
Linearitya
Standard
−20 to −15 dBm
±0.5 dB
relative to −5 dBm output level
−15 to 0 dBm
±0.2 dB
relative to −5 dBm output level
±0.5 dB
relative to −5 dBm output level
−15 to +5 dBm
±0.2 dB
relative to 0 dBm output level
+5 to +10 dBm
±0.5 dB
relative to 0 dBm output level
0 to +15 dBm
Option 004
Impedance
Standard
50 Ω, nom.
Return Loss
Standard
300 kHz to 3 GHz
> 20 dB, typ.
3 GHz to 6 GHz
> 14 dB, typ.
Option 004
300 kHz to 3 GHz
> 18 dB, typ.
3 GHz to 6 GHz
> 14 dB, typ.
Attenuator Accuracyb (Option 004 only)
0 dB
reference; at 50 MHz
300 kHz to 3 GHz
3 GHz to 6 GHz
10 dB
± 0.2 dB, char.
± 0.5 dB, char.
20 dB
± 0.4 dB, char.
± 0.7 dB, char.
30 dB
± 0.5 dB, char.
± 0.9 dB, char.
40 dB
± 0.7 dB, char.
± 1.2 dB, char.
50 dB
± 0.8 dB, char.
± 1.5 dB, char.
60 dB
± 1.0 dB, char.
± 1.8 dB, char.
a. Change in source output power for a given change in source power setting at any given
frequency.
b. The accuracy, relative to the 0 dB setting, of each setting of an attenuator, at a given
frequency.
2-9
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 2-7 Test Port Output
8753ET Test Port Output
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
Signal Purity
2nd Harmonic
16 MHz to 1.5 GHz (source frequency)
16 MHz to 3 GHz
(Option 006, source frequency)
at the maximum output
power
< −25 dBc, char. (Option 002)
at 10 dB below maximum
output power
< −40 dBc, typ.
at 20 dB below maximum
output power
< −50 dBc, typ.
3rd Harmonic
16 MHz to 1 GHz (source frequency)
16 MHz to 2 GHz
(Option 006, source frequency)
at the maximum output
power
< −25 dBc, char. (Option 002)
at 10 dB below maximum
output power
< −40 dBc, typ.
at 20 dB below maximum
output power
< −50 dBc, typ.
Non-harmonic Spurious
Mixer Related
at maximum output power
< −30 dBc, typ.
at 20 dB below maximum
output power
< −55 dBc, typ.
2-10
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Test Port Input
Table 2-8 Test Port Input
8753ET Test Port Input
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
Standard
300 kHz to 3.0 GHz
10 kHz to 3 GHz, typ.
Option 006
300 kHz to 6.0 GHz
10 kHz to 6 GHz, typ.
Frequency Range
Frequency Response (Transmission)
300 kHz to 3 GHz
±1 dB
at preset power level
3 GHz to 6 GHz
±2 dB
at preset power level
Impedance
50 Ω, nominal.
Standard
Return Loss
Standard
See uncorrected load match
chart.
Maximum Input Level
Transmission Port
0 dBm
Reflection Port
+10 dBm
Compression
See dynamic accuracy chart
Damage Level
Standard
> +20 dBm or > 35 Vdc, typ.
Noise Floora
8753ET Transmission Port
300 kHz to 3 GHz
3 kHz IF Bandwidth
≤ −90 dBm
10 Hz IF Bandwidth
≤ −110 dBm
≤ −120 dBm, typ.
3 GHz to 6 GHz
3 kHz IF Bandwidth
≤ −85 dBm
10 Hz IF Bandwidth
≤ −105 dBm
≤ −114 dBm, typ.
a. RMS value of a linear magnitude trace expressed in dBm.
2-11
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 2-9 Test Port Input
8753ET Test Port Input
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
Internally Generated Harmonics (Option 002 Only)
2nd Harmonic
16 MHz to 3 GHz
at 0 dBm input level
< −15 dBc, char.
at −10 dBm input level
< −30 dBc, typ.
at −25 dBm input level
< −45 dBc, typ.
3rd Harmonic
16 MHz to 2 GHz
at 0 dBm input level
< −30 dBc, char.
at −10 dBm input level
< −50 dBc, typ.
at −25 dBm input level
< −50 dBc, typ.
Harmonic Measurement Accuracy
16 MHz to 3 GHz
±1.5 dB, char.
3 GHz to 6 GHz
±3 dB, char.
Harmonic Measurement Dynamic Range
Standard
2-12
−40 dBc, typ.
output at −10 dBm and input
at < −15 dBm
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 2-10 Test Port Input
8753ET Test Port Input
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
Frequency Offset Operationa
Frequency Range
Standard
300 kHz to 3 GHz
Option 006
300 kHz to 6 GHz
R Channel Input Requirements
300 kHz to 3 GHz
0 to −35 dBm
3 GHz to 6 GHz
0 to −30 dBm
LO Spectral Purity and
Accuracy
Maximum Spurious Input
< −25 dBc, typ.
Residual FM
< 20 kHz, typ.
Frequency Accuracy
−1 to +1 MHz of nominal
frequency, typ.
External Source Modeb
Frequency Range
Standard
300 kHz to 3 GHz
Option 006
300 kHz to 6 GHz
at − 25 dBm R channel power
level
R Input Requirements
Power Level
0 to −25 dBm, typ.
R Input Spectral Purity
Requirement
Maximum Spurious Input
< −30 dBc, typ.
Residual FM
< 20 kHz, typ.
Settling Time
Auto
500 ms, typ.
Manual
50 ms, typ.
Frequency Readout Accuracy
0.1%, auto, typ.
Input Frequency Accuracy
Requirement
Manual
−0.5 to 5 MHz, typ.
a. The RF source characteristics in this mode are dependent on the stability of the external
LO source. The RF source tracks the LO to maintain a stable IF signal at the R channel
receiver input.
b. Measurement accuracy is dependent on the stability of the input signal.
2-13
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 2-11 Test Port Input
8753ET Test Port Input
Description
Specification
System Bandwidths
3000 Hz
10 Hz
300 kHz to 3GHz
< 0.006 dB rms
< 0.001 dB rms
3 GHz to 6 GHz
< 0.010 dB rms
< 0.002 dB rms
300 kHz to 3GHz
< 0.038° rms
< 0.006° rms
3 GHz to 6 GHz
< 0.070° rms
< 0.012° rms
Trace Noisea
Magnitude
Phase
a. Trace noise is defined for a ratio measurement. For the transmission
measurement (B/R), the connection is a 0 dB loss thru with 0 dBm into the
receiver. For a reflection measurement (A/R), an open is used on the
Reflection port with +5 dBm reflected power.
Table 2-12 Test Port Input
8753ET Test Port Input
Description
Specification
Supplemental
Information
Reference Level
Magnitude
Range
± 500 dB
Resolution
0.001 dB
Phase
Range
± 500°
Resolution
0.01°
Stability (Ratio Measurement)
Magnitude
300 kHz to 3 GHz
0.02 dB/°C, typ.
3 GHz to 6 GHz
0.04 dB/°C, typ.
Phase
2-14
300 kHz to 3 GHz
0.05 deg/°C, typ.
3 GHz to 6 GHz
0.20 deg/°C, typ.
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 2-13 Test Port Input
8753ET Test Port Input
Dynamic Accuracy (Characteristic)
For the transmission port, accuracy of the test port input power reading relative to the reference
input power level.
• Input: transmission port
• For test port powers > −60 dBm and < −10 dBm, magnitude dynamic accuracy is
0.02 dB + 0.001 dB/dB from the reference power, phase dynamic accuracy is
0.132 deg + 0.0066 deg/dB from the reference power.
2-15
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 2-14 Test Port Input
8753ET Test Port Input
Dynamic Accuracy (Characteristic)
For the reflection port, accuracy of the test port input power reading relative to the reference
input power level.
• Input: reflection port
• For test port powers > −50 dBm and < 0 dBm, magnitude dynamic accuracy is
0.02 dB + 0.001 dB/dB from the reference power, phase dynamic accuracy is
0.132 deg + 0.0066 deg/dB from the reference power.
• For frequencies < 2 MHz, the accuracy is degraded 0.1 dB above 5 dBm test port power.
2-16
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 2-15 Test Port Input
8753ET R-Channel Input
Dynamic Accuracy (Typical)
Accuracy of the R-channel power reading relative to the R-channel reference power level.
This chart applies when the calibrated power level and the measurement power level are not the
same.
• Inputs: R-channel
300 KHz to 3 GHz
3 to 6 GHz
Magnitude Dynamic Accuracy
for Test Port Powers
> −50 dBm and < 0 dBm
.02 dB + .001 dB/dB
from the reference power
.02 dB + .001 dB/dB
from the reference power
> 0 dBm and < 10 dBm
.02 dB + .02 dB/dB
above 0 dBm
.02 dB + .03 dB/dB
above 0 dBm
> −50 dBm and < 0 dBm
.132 deg + .0066 deg/dB
from the reference power
.132 deg + .0066 deg/dB
from the reference power
> 0 dBm and < 10 dBm
.132 deg + .132 deg/dB
above 0 dBm
.132 deg + .198 deg/dB
above 0 dBm
Phase Dynamic Accuracy for
Test Port Powers
2-17
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
General Information
Table 2-16 General Information
8753ET General Information
Description
Specification
Display Range
Magnitude
± 200 dB (at 20 dB/div), max
Phase
± 180°, max
Polar
10 pico units, min
1000 units, max
Display Resolution
Magnitude
0.001 dB/div, min
Phase
0.1°/div, min
Reference Level Range
Magnitude
± 500 dB, max
Phase
± 360°, max
Reference Level Resolution
Magnitude
0.001 dB, min
Phase
0.01°, min
Marker Resolution
Magnitude
0.001 dB, min
Phase
0.01°, min
Polar
0.01 mUnit, min; 0.01, min
2-18
Supplemental Information
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 2-17 General Information
8753ET General Information
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
Group Delaya
Aperture (selectable)
(frequency span)/(number of
points − 1)
Maximum Aperture
20% of frequency span
Range
1/2 × (1/minimum aperture)
Maximum Delay
Limited to measuring no more
than 180° of phase change
within the minimum aperture.
Accuracy
See graph. Char.
The following graph shows group delay accuracy with 7-mm full 2-port calibration and a 10 Hz IF
bandwidth. Insertion loss is assumed to be < 2 dB and electrical length to be ten meters.
In general, the following formula can be used to determine the accuracy, in seconds, of specific
group delay measurement:
±Relative Phase Accuracyb (deg)/[360 × Aperture (Hz)]
Depending on the aperture and device length, the phase accuracy used is either phase dynamic
accuracy specification or worst case transmission uncertainty phase specification.
a. Group delay is computed by measuring the phase change within a specified frequency
step (determined by the frequency span and the number of points per sweep).
b. Relative phase accuracy is an unspecified parameter. For very narrow apertures with
short devices under test RF systematic error terms can be assumed constant. As aperture
and/or device electrical length increase RF systematic errors become increasingly
important, eventually relative phase accuracy is the same as absolute phase accuracy.
2-19
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 2-18 General Information
8753ET General Information
Description
Supplemental Information
System Bandwidths
IF bandwidth settings
6000 Hz, nom.
3700 Hz, nom.
3000 Hz, nom.
1000 Hz nom.
300 Hz, nom.
100 Hz, nom.
30 Hz, nom.
10 Hz, nom.
Rear Panel
External Auxiliary Input
Connector
Female BNC
Range
10 V, typ.
External Trigger
Triggers on a positive or negative TTL transition or contact
closure to ground.
Damage Level
< −0.2 V; > +5.2 V, typ.
Limit Test Output
Female BNC.
Damage Level
< −0.2 V; > +5.2 V, typ.
Test Sequence Output
Outputs a TTL signal which can be set to a TTL high pulse
(default) or low pulse at end of sweep; or a fixed TTL high or
low. If limit test is on, the end of sweep pulse occurs after the
limit test is valid. This is useful when used in conjunction with
test sequencing.
Test Set Interconnect
25-pin-D-sub (DB-25) female; use for external special test sets
(K36, K39, etc.)
Measure Restart
Floating closure to restart measurement.
External AM Input
± 1 volt into a 5 kΩ resistor, 1 kHz maximum, resulting in
approximately 8 dB/volt amplitude modulation.
High Stability Frequency
Reference Output (10 MHz)
(Option 1D5)
Frequency
10.0000 MHz, char.
Frequency Stability
(0 °C to 55 °C)
±0.05 ppm, char.
Daily aging rate (after 30 days) < 3 x 10−9/day, char.
Yearly aging rate
±0.5 ppm/year, char.
Output
≥ 0 dBm, char.
Output Impedance
50 Ω, nom.
2-20
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 2-19 General Information
8753ET General Information
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
Rear Panel
External Reference In
Input Frequency
1, 2, 5, and 10 MHz ± 200 Hz at 10 MHz
Input Power
−10 dBm to +20 dBm, typ.
Input Impedance
50 Ω, nom.
VGA Video Output
15-pin mini D-Sub; female. Drives
VGA compatible monitors.
GPIB
Type-57, 24-pin; Microribbon
female
Parallel Port
25-pin D-Sub (DB-25); female;
may be used as printer port or
general purpose I.O. port
RS232
9-pin D-Sub (DB-9); male
Mini-DIN Keyboard/Barcode Reader
6-pin mini DIN (PS/2); female
Line Power
A third-wire ground is required.
Frequency
47 Hz to 66 Hz
Voltage at 115 V setting
90 V to 132 V
115 V, nom.
Voltage at 220 V setting
198 V to 265 VAC
230 V, nom.
VA Maximum
350 VA max
Front Panel
RF Connectors
Type-N, 50 ohm
Probe Power
3-pin connector; male
Positive Supply
400 mA, max
+15 V ± 2%, char.
the maximum combined load for
both probe connectors, char.
Negative Supply
300 mA, max
− 12.6 V ± 5%, char.
the maximum combined load for
both probe connectors, char.
2-21
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 2-20 General Information
8753ET General Information
Description
Specification
Front Panel
Display Pixel Integrity
Red, Green, or Blue Pixels
Red, green, or blue "stuck on" pixels may
appear against a black background. In a
properly working display, the following will
not occur:
• complete rows or columns of stuck pixels
• more than 5 stuck pixels (not to exceed a
maximum of 2 red or blue, and 3 green)
• 2 or more consecutive stuck pixels
• stuck pixels less than 6.5 mm apart
Dark Pixels
Dark "stuck on" pixels may appear against a
white background. In a properly working
display, the following will not occur:
• more than 12 stuck pixels (not to exceed a
maximum of 7 red, green, or blue)
• more than one occurrence of 2
consecutive stuck pixels
• stuck pixels less than 6.5 mm apart
2-22
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 2-21 General Information
8753ET General Information
Description
Specification
Supplemental Information
General Environmental
RFI/EMI Susceptibility
Defined by CISPR Pub. 11 and
FCC Class B standards.
ETD
Minimize using static-safe
work procedures and an
antistatic bench mat
(part number 9300-0797).
Dust
Minimize for optimum
reliability.
Operating Environment
Temperature
0 °C to +55 °C
Error-corrected temperature
range
Instrument powers up, phase
locks, and displays no error
messages within this
temperature range.
see system specifications
Humidity
5% to 95% at +40 °C
(non-condensing)
Altitude
0 to 4.5 km (15,000 ft)
Storage Conditions
Temperature
−40 °C to +70 °C
Humidity
0% to 95% RH at +65 °C
(non-condensing)
Altitude
0 to 15.24 km (50,000 ft)
Cabinet Dimensions
Height x Width x Depth
222 x 425 x 457 mm, nom.
(8.75 x 16.75 x 18 in, nom.)
Cabinet dimensions exclude
front and rear protrusions.
Weight
Shipping
32 kg (77 lb), nom.
Net
24 kg (53 lb), nom.
Internal Memory - Data Retention Time with 3 V, 1.2 Ah Batterya
70 °C
250 days (0.68 year), char.
40 °C
1244 days (3.4 years), char.
25 °C
10 years, char.
a. Analyzer power is switched off.
2-23
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Speed Parameters
Table 2-22 Measurement and Data Transfer Speed Performance
Typical Time for Completion (ms)
Description
Number of Points
51
201
401
1601
Typical Time for Completion (in ms), Center 1 GHz, Span 10 MHz, IFBW=6000
Uncorrected
32
70
121
423
1-port and Enhanced Response cala
35
71
127
440
2-port calb
62
139
240
848
Typical Time for Completion (in ms), Start 30 kHz, Stop 3 GHz, IFBW=6000
Uncorrected
202
270
304
615
1-port and Enhanced Response cal
202
270
304
615
2-port cal
402
540
607
1237
Typical Time for Completion (in ms), Start 30 kHz, Stop 6 GHz, IFBW=6000
Uncorrected
310
380
415
658
1-port and Enhanced Response cal
310
380
415
658
2-port cal
618
757
829
1315
c
Time Domain (increase over uncorrected sweep time)
Conversions
12
42
86
378
Gating (Frequency Domain)
14
40
80
349
10
16
21
58
32 bit
11
19
28
83
64 bit
13
26
42
141
ASCII
35
112
214
831
GPIB Data Transferd:
Binary (Internal)
IEEE754 floating point format
a. S11 1-port calibration, with a 6 kHz IF bandwidth. Includes system retrace time, but
does not include bandswitch time. Time domain gating is assumed off.
b. S21 measurement with full 2-port calibration, using a 6 kHz IF bandwidth. Includes
system retrace time and RF switching time, but does not include bandswitch time. Time
domain gating is assumed off.
c. Option 010 only, gating off.
d. Measured with HP Omnibook 7100 Pentium computer.
2-24
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 2-23 Recall and Sweep Speed Performance
Total Time,
typical (secs)
Operations
Channel
Points
Recall-Only
Time, typical
(secs)
Raw
Offset
Blank
Off
Blank
On
Blank
Off
Blank
On
Error Correction
ON
Recall and Sweep
Single Chan. 201
On
0.389
0.260
0.250
0.126
Recall and Sweep
Single Chan. 201
Off
0.340
0.210
0.201
0.077
Sweep only (no Recall)
Single Chan. 201
N/A
0.139
0.134
N/A
N/A
Recall and Sweep
Single Chan. 1601
On
1.480
1.347
0.632
0.506
Recall and Sweep
Single Chan. 1601
Off
1.102
0.969
0.254
0.128
Sweep only (no Recall)
Single Chan. 1601
N/A
0.848
0.841
N/A
N/A
Recall and Sweep
Dual Chan.
201
On
0.539
0.389
0.357
0.215
Recall and Sweep
Dual Chan.
201
Off
0.489
0.328
0.308
0.154
Sweep only (no Recall)
Dual Chan.
201
N/A
0.182
0.174
N/A
N/A
Recall and Sweep
Dual Chan.
1601
On
2.386
2.219
1.208
1.049
Recall and Sweep
Dual Chan.
1601
Off
2.007
1.839
0.829
0.669
Sweep only (no Recall)
Dual Chan.
1601
N/A
1.178
1.170
N/A
N/A
Error Correction
OFF
Recall and Sweep
Single Chan. 201
On
0.240
0.147
0.170
0.082
Recall and Sweep
Single Chan. 201
Off
0.227
0.134
0.157
0.069
Sweep only (no Recall)
Single Chan. 201
N/A
0.070
0.065
N/A
N/A
Recall and Sweep
Single Chan. 1601
On
0.675
0.587
0.252
0.168
Recall and Sweep
Single Chan. 1601
Off
0.581
0.491
0.157
0.073
Sweep only (no Recall)
Single Chan. 1601
N/A
0.423
0.419
N/A
N/A
Recall and Sweep
Dual Chan.
201
On
0.306
0.170
0.235
0.104
Recall and Sweep
Dual Chan.
201
Off
0.281
0.145
0.211
0.080
Sweep only (no Recall)
Dual Chan.
201
N/A
0.071
0.066
N/A
N/A
Recall and Sweep
Dual Chan.
1601
On
0.802
0.692
0.377
0.273
Recall and Sweep
Dual Chan.
1601
Off
0.613
0.503
0.188
0.084
Sweep only (no Recall)
Dual Chan.
1601
N/A
0.424
0.419
N/A
N/A
Instrument State: CF = 1 GHz, Span = 2 MHz, IF BW = 6 kHz. GPIB commands sent for timing are
Recall;OPC?;SING; or, for sweep only, OPC?;SING;.
2-25
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Table 2-24 Sweep Time vs. IF Bandwidth
IF Bandwidth
Typical Sweep Time (seconds) a
6000
0.070
3700
0.095
3000
0.121
1000
0.248
300
0.704
100
2.022
30
6.987
10
21.365
a. Preset condition, CF = 1 GHz, Span = 100 MHz; includes retrace time, 201 points.
Table 2-25 Sweep Time vs. Number of Points
Number of Points
Typical Sweep Time (seconds)a
51
0.039
101
0.057
201
0.095
401
0.171
801
0.323
1601
0.625
a. Preset condition, CF = 1 GHz, Span = 100 MHz, Correction off; includes retrace time.
Measurement speed can be improved by selecting the widest IF bandwidth setting of 6000 Hz.
2-26
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
Power Meter Calibration Accuracy
Table 2-26 Power Meter Calibration Sweep Speed and Accuracy
Power Desired at
Test Port
Number of
Readings
Sweep Time
Setting (seconds) a
Characteristic
Accuracy (dB) b
+5 dBm
1
33
±0.7
2
64
±0.2
3
95
±0.1
1
48
±0.7
2
92
±0.2
3
123
±0.1
1
194
±0.7
2
360
±0.2
3
447
±0.1
−15 dBm
−30 dBm
a. Sweep speed applies to every sweep in continuous correction mode, and to the first
sweep in sample-and-sweep mode. Subsequent sweeps in sample-and-sweep mode
will be much faster.
b. The accuracy values were derived by combining the accuracy of the power meter and
linearity of the analyzer's internal source, as well as the mismatch uncertainty
associated with the power sensor.
2-27
8753ET Specifications and Characteristics
Instrument Specifications
2-28
3 Front/Rear Panel
3-1
Front/Rear Panel
Front Panel Features
Front Panel Features
CAUTION
Do not mistake the line switch for the disk eject button. See the following
illustrations. If the line switch is mistakenly pushed, the instrument will be
turned off, losing all settings and data that have not been saved.
Figure 3-1 8753ES Front Panel
3-2
Front/Rear Panel
Front Panel Features
Figure 3-2 8753ET Front Panel
The location of the following front panel features and key function blocks is shown in
Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2. These features are described in more detail later in this chapter,
and in Chapter 5 , “Hardkey/Softkey Reference,”.
1.
LINE switch. This switch controls ac power to the analyzer. 1 is on, 0 is
off.
2.
Display. This shows the measurement data traces, measurement
annotation, and softkey labels. The display is divided into specific
information areas, illustrated in Figure 3-3.
3.
Disk drive. This 3.5 inch floppy-disk drive allows you to store and recall
instrument states and measurement results for later analysis.
4.
Disk eject button.
5.
Softkeys. These keys provide access to menus that are shown on the
display.
6.
STIMULUS function block. The keys in this block allow you to control
the analyzer source's frequency, power, and other stimulus functions.
7.
RESPONSE function block. The keys in this block allow you to control
the measurement and display functions of the active display channel.
8.
ACTIVE CHANNEL keys. The analyzer has two independent primary
channels and two auxiliary channels. These keys allow you to select the
active channel. Any function you enter applies to the selected channel.
3-3
Front/Rear Panel
Front Panel Features
9.
The ENTRY block. This block includes the knob, the step
keys, the number pad, and the backspace key. These allow you to enter
numerical data and control the markers.
You can use the numeric keypad to select digits, decimal points, and a
minus sign for numerical entries. You must also select a units terminator
to complete value inputs.
The backspace key has two independent functions: it modifies entries, and
it turns off the softkey menu so that marker information can be moved off
of the grids and into the softkey menu area. For more details, refer to the
“Making Measurements” chapter in the user’s guide.
10.
INSTRUMENT STATE function block. These keys allow you to control
channel-independent system functions such as the following:
• copying, save/recall, and GPIB controller mode
• limit testing
• external source mode
• tuned receiver mode
• frequency offset mode
• test sequence function
• harmonic measurements (Option 002)
• time domain transform (Option 010)
GPIB STATUS indicators are also included in this block.
11.
Preset key. This key returns the instrument to either a known factory
preset state, or a user preset state that can be defined. Refer to Chapter 8 ,
“Preset State and Memory Allocation,” for a complete listing of the
instrument preset condition.
12.
PROBE POWER connectors. These connector (fused inside the
instrument) supply power to an active probe for in-circuit measurements
of ac circuits.
13.
R CHANNEL connectors. These connectors allow you to apply an input
signal to the analyzer's R channel, for frequency offset mode.
14. (ES)
PORT 1 and PORT 2. These ports output a signal from the source and
receive input signals from a device under test. PORT 1 allows you to
measure S12 and S11. PORT 2 allows you to measure S21 and S22.
14. (ET)
REFLECTION and TRANSMISSION ports. The REFLECTION port
outputs a signal from the source and allows you to make reflection
measurements. The TRANSMISSION port receives input signals from a
device under test and allows you to make transmission measurements.
3-4
Front/Rear Panel
Analyzer Display
Analyzer Display
Figure 3-3 Analyzer Display (Single Channel, Cartesian Format)
The analyzer display shows various measurement information:
• The grid where the analyzer plots the measurement data.
• The currently selected measurement parameters.
• The measurement data traces.
Figure 3-3 illustrates the locations of the different information labels described below.
In addition to the full-screen display shown in the illustration above, multi-graticule and
multi-channel displays are available, as described in the “Making Measurements” chapter
of the user’s guide.
Several display formats are available for different measurements, as described under
Format in Chapter5 ,“Hardkey/Softkey Reference.”
1.
Stimulus Start Value. This value could be any one of the following:
• The start frequency of the source in frequency domain measurements.
• The start time in CW mode (0 seconds) or time domain measurements.
• The lower power value in power sweep.
When the stimulus is in center/span mode, the center stimulus value is
shown in this space. The color of the stimulus display reflects the current
active channel.
3-5
Front/Rear Panel
Analyzer Display
2.
Stimulus Stop Value. This value could be any one of the following:
• The stop frequency of the source in frequency domain measurements.
• The stop time in time domain measurements or CW sweeps.
• The upper limit of a power sweep.
When the stimulus is in center/span mode, the span is shown in this space.
The stimulus values can be blanked, as described under the
FREQUENCY BLANK softkey in Chapter5 ,“Hardkey/Softkey
Reference.”
(For CW time and power sweep measurements, the CW frequency is
displayed centered between the start and stop times or power values.)
3.
Status Notations. This area shows the current status of various
functions for the active channel.
The following notations are used:
Avg
Sweep-to-sweep averaging is on. The averaging count is
shown immediately below. (See the Avg key in
Chapter5 ,“Hardkey/Softkey Reference.”)
Cor
Error correction is on. (For error-correction procedures,
refer to the “Calibrating for Increased Measurement
Accuracy” chapter in the user’s guide. For error correction
theory, refer to the “Operating Concepts” chapter of the
user’s guide.
C∆
Stimulus parameters have changed from the
error-corrected state, or interpolated error correction is on.
(For error-correction procedures, refer to the “Calibrating
for Increased Measurement Accuracy” chapter in the
user’s guide. For error correction theory, refer to the
“Operating Concepts” chapter of the user’s guide.
C2 (ES)
Full two-port error-correction is on and the reverse sweep
is not updated each sweep
Any one of the following causes the reverse sweep not to be
updated each sweep:
• the instrument uses a mechanical switch, for example
Options 85 and 007.
• different channel power ranges (PORT POWER
UNCOUPLED) which puts the test set switch in HOLD
mode except Option 400 (dual step attenuators).
• the user manually puts the test set switch in HOLD
mode (TESTSET SW 0 or >1).
Del
3-6
Electrical delay has been added or subtracted, or port
extensions are active. (See the “Operating Concepts”
chapter of the user’s guide and the Scale Ref key in
Chapter5 ,“Hardkey/Softkey Reference.”)
Front/Rear Panel
Analyzer Display
ext
Waiting for an external trigger.
Ofs
Frequency offset mode is on. (See the “Making Mixer
Measurements” chapter in the user’s guide.)
Of?
Frequency offset mode error, the IF frequency is not
within 10 MHz of expected frequency. LO inaccuracy is the
most likely cause. (See the “Making Mixer Measurements”
chapter in the user’s guide.)
Gat
Gating is on (time domain Option 010 only). (For time
domain measurement procedures and theory, refer to the
“Making Time Domain Measurements” chapter of the
user’s guide.)
H=2
Harmonic mode is on, and the second harmonic is being
measured (harmonics Option 002 only). (See
Chapter7 ,“Options and Accessories.”)
H=3
Harmonic mode is on, and the third harmonic is being
measured (harmonics Option 002 only). (See
Chapter7 ,“Options and Accessories.”)
Hld
Hold sweep. (See HOLD in Chapter5 ,“Hardkey/Softkey
Reference.”)
man
Waiting for manual trigger.
PC
Power meter calibration is on. (For power meter
calibration procedures, refer to the “Calibrating for
Increased Measurement Accuracy” chapter of the user’s
guide.)
PC?
The analyzer's source could not be set to the desired level,
following a power meter calibration. (For power meter
calibration procedures, refer to the “Calibrating for
Increased Measurement Accuracy” chapter in the user’s
guide.)
P?
Source power is unleveled at start or stop of sweep. (Refer
to the service guide for troubleshooting.)
P↓
Source power has been automatically set to minimum, due
to receiver overload. (See POWER in
Chapter5 ,“Hardkey/Softkey Reference.”)
PRm
(ES or ET Option 004) Power range is in manual mode.
Smo
Trace smoothing is on. (See Avg in
Chapter5 ,“Hardkey/Softkey Reference.”)
3-7
Front/Rear Panel
Analyzer Display
tsH
(ES or ET Option 004) Indicates that the test set hold
mode is engaged. That is, a mode of operation is selected
which would cause repeated switching of the step
attenuator. This hold mode may be overridden. See
MEASURE RESTART or NUMBER OF GROUPS in
Chapter5 ,“Hardkey/Softkey Reference.”
↑
Fast sweep indicator. This symbol is displayed in the
status notation block when sweep time is ≤1.0 second.
When sweep time is ≥ 1.0 second, this symbol moves along
the displayed trace.
*
Source parameters changed: measured data in doubt until
a complete fresh sweep has been taken.
4.
Active Entry Area. This displays the active function and its current
value.
5.
Message Area. This displays prompts or error messages.
6.
Title. This is a descriptive alphanumeric string title that you define and
enter through an attached keyboard or as described the “Printing,
Plotting, and Saving Measurement Results” chapter of the user’s guide.
7.
Active Channel. This is the label for the number for the active channel,
selected with the Chan 1 , Chan 2 , Chan 3 , and Chan 4 keys.
If multiple channels are overlaid, the labels will appear in this area. The
active channel is denoted by a rectangle around the channel number.
For multiple-graticule displays, the channel information labels will be in
the same relative position for each graticule.
NOTE
The label of the active channel is enclosed in a rectangle to differentiate it
from inactive channels.
8.
Measured Input(s). This shows the parameter, input, or ratio of inputs
currently measured, as selected using the Meas key. Also indicated in
this area is the current display memory status.
9.
Format. This is the display format that you selected using the Format
key.
10.
Scale/Div. This is the scale that you selected using the Scale Ref key, in
units appropriate to the current measurement.
11.
Reference Level. This value is the reference line in Cartesian formats or
the outer circle in polar formats, whichever you selected using the
Scale Ref key. The reference level is also indicated by a small triangle
adjacent to the graticule, at the left for channel 1 and at the right for
channel 2 in Cartesian formats.
3-8
Front/Rear Panel
Analyzer Display
12.
Marker Values. These are the values of the active marker, in units
appropriate to the current measurement. (Refer to “Using Analyzer
Display Markers” in the “Making Measurement” chapter of the user’s
guide.)
13.
Marker Stats, Bandwidth. These are statistical marker values that the
analyzer calculates when you access the menus with the Marker Fctn key.
(Refer to “Using Analyzer Display Markers” in the “Making
Measurements” chapter of the user’s guide.)
This general area is also where information for additional markers is
placed. Note that Stats and Bandwidth have priority.
14.
Softkey Labels. These menu labels redefine the function of the softkeys
that are located to the right of the analyzer display.
15.
Pass Fail. During limit testing, the result will be annunciated as PASS if
the limits are not exceeded, and FAIL if any points exceed the limits.
3-9
Front/Rear Panel
Rear Panel Features and Connectors
Rear Panel Features and Connectors
Figure 3-4 8753ET/ES Rear Panel
Figure 3-4 illustrates the features and connectors of the rear panel, described below.
Requirements for input signals to the rear panel connectors are provided in the
specifications and characteristics chapter.
1.
GPIB connector. This allows you to connect the analyzer to an external
controller, compatible peripherals, and other instruments for an
automated system. Refer to Chapter 7 , “Options and Accessories,” for
GPIB information, limitations, and configurations.
2.
PARALLEL interface. This connector allows the analyzer to output to a
peripheral with a parallel input. Also included, is a general purpose
input/output (GPIO) bus that can control eight output bits and read five
input bits through test sequencing. Refer to Chapter 7 , “Options and
Accessories,” for information on configuring a peripheral. Also refer to
“The GPIO Mode” in the “Operating Concepts” chapter of the user’s guide.
3.
RS-232 interface. This connector allows the analyzer to output to a
peripheral with an RS-232 (serial) input.
4.
KEYBOARD input (mini-DIN). This connector allows you to connect an
external keyboard. This provides a more convenient means to enter a title
for storage files, as well as substitute for the analyzer's front panel
keyboard.
5.
Power cord receptacle, with fuse. For information on replacing the
fuse, refer to the installation and quick start guide.
6.
Line voltage selector switch. For more information, refer to the
installation and quick start guide.
3-10
Front/Rear Panel
Rear Panel Features and Connectors
7.
Fan. This fan provides forced-air cooling for the analyzer.
8.
10 MHZ PRECISION REFERENCE OUTPUT. (Option 1D5)
9.
10 MHZ REFERENCE ADJUST. (Option 1D5)
10.
EXTERNAL REFERENCE INPUT connector. This allows for a
frequency reference signal input that can phase lock the analyzer to an
external frequency standard for increased frequency accuracy.
The analyzer automatically enables the external frequency reference
feature when a signal is connected to this input. When the signal is
removed, the analyzer automatically switches back to its internal
frequency reference.
11.
AUXILIARY INPUT connector. This allows for a dc or ac voltage input
from an external signal source, such as a detector or function generator,
which you can then measure, using the S-parameter menu. (You can also
use this connector as an analog output in service routines, as described in
the service guide.)
12.
EXTERNAL AM connector. This allows for an external analog signal
input that is applied to the ALC circuitry of the analyzer's source. This
input analog signal amplitude modulates the RF output signal.
13.
EXTERNAL TRIGGER connector. This allows connection of an
external negative-going TTL-compatible signal that will trigger a
measurement sweep. The trigger can be set to external through softkey
functions.
14.
TEST SEQUENCE. This outputs a TTL signal that can be programmed
in a test sequence to be high or low, or pulse (10 µseconds) high or low at
the end of a sweep for robotic part handler interface.
15.
LIMIT TEST. This outputs a TTL signal of the limit test results as
follows:
• Pass: TTL high
• Fail: TTL low
16.
MEASURE RESTART. This allows the connection of an optional foot
switch. Using the foot switch will duplicate the key sequence Meas
MEASURE RESTART
17.
TEST SET INTERCONNECT. Not used in standard configuration.
18.
BIAS INPUTS AND FUSES. These connectors bias devices connected to
port 1 and port 2. The fuses (1 A, 125 V) protect the port 1 and port 2 bias
lines.
19.
Serial number plate. The serial number of the instrument is located on
this plate.
20.
EXTERNAL MONITOR: VGA. VGA output connector provides analog
red, green, and blue video signals which can drive a VGA monitor.
3-11
Front/Rear Panel
Rear Panel Features and Connectors
3-12
4 Menu Maps
4-1
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
This chapter contains menus maps for the hardkeys listed below. The figure number of
these menu maps is listed next to the name of the hardkey. Fold Outs are located at the
end of this chapter.
Table 4-1 Menu Map Locations
Menu Map
Figure Number
Menu Map
Figure Number
Avg
Figure 4-1
Meas
(ES Models)
Figure 4-8
Cal
(ET Models)
Fold Out
Power & Sweep Setup
(ET Models)
Figure 4-9
Cal
(ES Models)
Fold Out
Power and Sweep Setup
(ES Models)
Figure 4-10
Copy
Figure 4-2
Preset
Figure 4-11
Display
Figure 4-3
Save/Recall
Figure 4-12
Format
Figure 4-4
Scale Ref
Figure 4-13
Local
Figure 4-5
Seq
Fold Out
Marker, Marker Fctn, and
Marker Search
Figure 4-6
System
(ET Models)
Fold Out
Meas
(ET Models)
Figure 4-7
System
(ES Models)
Fold Out
Figure 4-1 Menu Map for Avg
4-2
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
Figure 4-2 Menu Map for Copy
4-3
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
Figure 4-3 Menu Map for Display
4-4
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
Figure 4-4 Menu Map for Format
4-5
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
Figure 4-5 Menu Map for Local
4-6
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
Figure 4-6 Menu Map for Marker, Marker Fctn, and Marker Search
4-7
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
Figure 4-7 Menu Map for Meas (ET Models Only)
Meas
S-Parameter
Menu
Aux Input
Menu
REFLECTION
RESOLUTION
[LOW]
TRANSMISSN
AUX OUT
on OFF
ANALOG IN
Aux Input
Input Ports
Menu
OFF
A/R
Z:Ref l
B/R
Z:Trans
A/B
COUNTER:
OFF
Y: Ref I
A
ANALOG BUS
Y:Trans
FRAC N
*
Conversion
Menu
1/S
DIV FRAC N
B
R
CONVERSION
[ ]
INPUT
PORTS
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
* Aux input menu appears only when the analog bus
on OFF (service menu key under the system hardkey)
is turned to ON.
ka513e
4-8
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
Figure 4-8 Menu Map for Meas (ES Models Only)
4-9
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
Figure 4-9 Menu Map for Power and Sweep Setup (ET Only)
4-10
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
Figure 4-10 Menu Map for Power and Sweep Setup (ES Only)
4-11
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
Figure 4-11 Menu Map for Preset
4-12
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
Figure 4-12 Menu Map for Save/Recall
4-13
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
Figure 4-13 Menu Map for Scale Ref
4-14
Cal
Correction
Menu
ECal
Menu
CORRECTION
on OFF
MODULE
A b
INTERPOL
ON off
REFLECTION
1-PORT
ECal
Pause Menu
ECal
Config Menu
CONTINUE
ECal
MODULE
A b
ECal
Confidence
Power Meter
Cal. Main Menu
Pwr. Loss/Sens.
Lists Menu
ECal STD
[CONF]
PWRMTR CAL
OFF
USE SENSOR
A/B
REFL STD
[0]
EACH SWEEP
SET CONF
STANDARD
CONFIDENCE
CHECK
1
ONE SWEEP
CAL FACTOR
SENSOR A
PARAMETER
[RFL]
TAKE CAL
SWEEP
CAL FACTOR
SENSOR B
TRACE TYPE
[DATA]
NUMBER of
READINGS
MODULE
INFO
CALIBRATE
MENU
PARAMETER
[RFL]
RESUME CAL
SEQUENCE
ECal
MENU
ECal
Service Menu
TRAN/REFL
ENH. RESP.
1, 2
CONFIGURE
[MODULE A]
MORE
RETURN
TRACE TYPE
[DATA]
ISOLATION
AVERAGES
AUTO SCALE
PWR LOSS
on OFF
MAN’L THRU
on OFF
ECal
SERVICE
LOSS/SENSR
LISTS
RETURN
RETURN
AUTO SCALE
CAL KIT
[ ]
PWRMTR CAL
[OFF]
OMIT ISOL
ON off
ABORT
ECal
RETURN
Segment
Modify Menu
SEGMENT
Seg. Edit (Cal
Factor) Menu
Seg. Edit (Pwr.
Loss) Menu
FREQUENCY
CAL
FACTOR
Enhanced
Response Menu
Clear List
Menu
Calibrate
Menu
FREQUENCY
CLEAR LIST
LOSS
YES
ENHANCED
RESPONSE
Enh. Resp.
Cal. Menu
RESPONSE
NO
EDIT
RESPONSE
& ISOL'N
ENH. REFL.
on OFF
DO BOTH
FWD THRUS
TRANSMISSION
SHORTS
FWD TRANS
THRU
ISOLATION
LOAD
Opens
Menu
Enh. Resp.
Isolation Menu
OPEN ( M )
OPEN ( F )
FWD MATCH
THRU
DELETE
REFLECTION
1-PORT
ADD
Enh. Resp.
Trans. Menu
FORWARD:
OPENS
REFLECT'N
TRAN / REFL
ENH. RESP.
Enh. Resp.
Refl. Menu
OMIT
ISOLATION
FWD ISOL'N
CLEAR
LIST
POWER
LOSS
RETURN
DONE
RETURN
RECEIVER
CAL
DONE
DONE
DONE FWD
ENH RESP
RETURN
STANDARDS
DONE
STANDARDS
DONE
DONE:
OPENS
ISOLATION
DONE
Calibration Factor Softkey Path
Power Loss Softkey Path
Cal Kit
Menu
SELECT
CAL KIT
Select Cal Kit
Menu
7mm
85031
3.5mmD
85033D/E
SAVE
USER KIT
MODIFY
[ ]
RETURN
Select Cal Kit
More Menu
2.4mm
85056
2.9mm
other kits
N 50W
85032B/E
TRL 3.5mm
85052C
USER KIT
MORE
RETURN
Reference
Plane Menu
PORT
EXTENSIONS
EXTENSIONS
on OFF
Modify Cal Kit
Menu
Specify Class
Menu
Specify Class
More Menu
DEFINE
STANDARD
S11A
FWD TRANS
EXTENSION
INPUT A
VELOCITY
FACTOR
2.92*
85056K
N 50W
85032F
N 75W
85036
Calibrate
More Menu
EXTENSION
INPUT B
SET ZÆ
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
FWD MATCH
SPECIFY:
TRL THRU
CAL Z0:
LINE Z0
SYSTEM Z0
SET REF:
THRU
Label Class
Menu
S22B
LABEL
KIT
S22C
RESPONSE
& ISOL'N
TRL/LRM
OPTION
MORE
MORE
KIT DONE
(MODIFIED)
SPECIFY
CLASS DONE
SPECIFY
CLASS DONE
Label Class
More Menu
REV MATCH
Label Class / Kit
More Menu
Label Select
Menu
FWD TRANS
LABEL:
TRL THRU
SELECT
LETTER
S11B
REV TRANS
SPACE
S11C
TRL
REFLECT
FWD MATCH
S22A
REV MATCH
TRL LINE
OR MATCH
BACK
SPACE
RETURN
RESPONSE
& ISOL'N
MORE
LABEL
CLASS DONE
LABEL
CLASS DONE
SHORT (F)
FORWARD:
OPENS
Shorts
Menu
Rcvr Cal
Menu
SHORT (M)
SHORT (F)
SHORTS
LOAD
OPEN (F)
TRL LINE
OR MATCH
TAKE RCVR
CAL SWEEP
STD TYPE:
OPEN
LABEL
CLASS DONE
Def. Arbitrary
Imped. Menu
Define Delay/
Thru Menu
Define Load
Menu
Define Short
Menu
TERMINAL
IMPEDANCE
SHORT
LOAD
FIXED
FIXED
DELAY /
THRU
SLIDING
SLIDING
ARBITRARY
IMPEDANCE
SPECIFY
OFFSET
OFFSET
MODIFY STD
DEFINITION
ERASE
TITLE
DONE
1-PORT CAL
DONE RESP
ISOL 'N CAL
SPECIFY
CLASS DONE
RESPONSE
MORE
ISOL 'N STD
TRL
REFLECT
REFLECT
S22C
SHORT (M)
Reflection
1-Port Menu
RESPONSE
S11A
S22B
RESPONSE
OPEN (M)
Define Standard
Menu
TRL Option
Menu
Response
Menu
THRU
LABEL
CLASS
ALTERNATE
RFL/TRN
CHOP
RFL/TRN
S11C
S22A
EXTENSION
TRANS PORT
3.5mmC
85033C
REV TRANS
SPECIFY
CLASS
EXTENSION
REFL PORT
7-16
85038
S11B
Response &
Isolation Menu
Specify Class
More Menu
RETURN
LABEL
STD
STD DONE
(DEFINED)
DONE:
SHORTS
RETURN
Define Open
Menu
C0
Specify Offset
Menu
Label Standard
Menu
C1
OFFSET
DELAY
SELECT
LETTER
C2
OFFSET
LOSS
SPACE
C3
OFFSET
Z0
SPECIFY
OFFSET
SPECIFY
OFFSET
SPECIFY
OFFSET
SPECIFY
OFFSET
LABEL
STD
LABEL
STD
LABEL
STD
LABEL
STD
STD DONE
(DEFINED)
STD DONE
(DEFINED)
STD DONE
(DEFINED)
STD DONE
(DEFINED)
BACK
SPACE
MINIMUM
FREQUENCY
MAXIMUM
FREQUENCY
ERASE
TITLE
COAX
WAVEGUIDE
STD OFFSET
DONE
DONE
DONE
1. When two ECal modules are used in a measurement, the routine will pause to allow you to insert
the next module. A "CONTINUE ECal" and "ABORT ECal" menu will be displayed during the pause.
kl508ets
2. When "MAN'L THRU" is turned "ON", the calibration will pause and allow you to insert your own thru.
A "CONTINUE ECal" and "ABORT ECal" menu will be displayed during the pause.
Menu Map For Cal (8753ET) only
ECal
Menu
Correction
Menu
Cal
MODULE
A b
CORRECTION
on OFF
INTERPOL
on OFF
S11
1-PORT
1
CALIBRATE
MENU
S22
1-PORT
1
ECal
Pause Menu
ECal
Config Menu
CONTINUE
ECal
MODULE
A b
ECal
Service Menu
Power Meter
Cal. Main Menu
Pwr. Loss/Sens.
Lists Menu
ECal STD
[CONF]
PWRMTR CAL
OFF
USE SENSOR
A/B
SET CONF
STANDARD
CONFIDENCE
CHECK
REFL STD
[0]
PARAMETER
[S11]
S11/S21 1, 2
ENH. RESP.
OMIT ISOL
ON off
TRACE TYPE
[DATA]
TRACE TYPE
[DATA]
CAL KIT
[ ]
S22/S12 1, 2
ENH. RESP.
ISOLATION
AVERAGES
AUTO SCALE
AUTO SCALE
CONFIGURE
[MODULE A]
MORE
RETURN
ABORT
ECal
MAN’L THRU
on OFF
ECal
SERVICE
RETURN
RETURN
ONE SWEEP
CAL FACTOR
SENSOR A
TAKE CAL
SWEEP
CAL FACTOR
SENSOR B
PARAMETER
[S11]
ECal
MENU
PWRMTR CAL
[OFF]
EACH SWEEP
MODULE
INFO
FULL 1, 2
2-PORT
RESUME CAL
SEQUENCE
ECal
Confidence
Segment
Modify Menu
Seg. Edit (Cal
Factor) Menu
Seg. Edit (Pwr.
Loss) Menu
SEGMENT
FREQUENCY
FREQUENCY
CLEAR LIST
CAL
FACTOR
LOSS
YES
Clear List
Menu
NO
EDIT
STD TYPE:
OPEN
Def. Arbitrary
Imped. Menu
Define Load
Menu
Define Delay/
Thru Menu
Define Short
Menu
TERMINAL
IMPEDANCE
FIXED
DELAY /
THRU
SLIDING
ARBITRARY
IMPEDANCE
SPECIFY
OFFSET
Specify Offset
Menu
Label Standard
Menu
C0
OFFSET
DELAY
SELECT
LETTER
C1
OFFSET
LOSS
SPACE
C2
OFFSET
Z0
BACK
SPACE
C3
MINIMUM
FREQUENCY
Define Open
Menu
SHORT
LOAD
DELETE
FIXED
SLIDING
ADD
NUMBER of
READINGS
PWR LOSS
on OFF
CLEAR
LIST
POWER
LOSS
MODIFY STD
DEFINITION
LOSS/SENSR
LISTS
DONE
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
Define Standard
Menu
DONE
DONE
OFFSET
LABEL
STD
STD DONE
(DEFINED)
RETURN
MAXIMUM
FREQUENCY
SPECIFY
OFFSET
SPECIFY
OFFSET
SPECIFY
OFFSET
SPECIFY
OFFSET
LABEL
STD
LABEL
STD
LABEL
STD
LABEL
STD
WAVEGUIDE
STD DONE
(DEFINED)
STD DONE
(DEFINED)
STD DONE
(DEFINED)
STD DONE
(DEFINED)
STD OFFSET
DONE
ERASE
TITLE
COAX
DONE
Calibration Factor Softkey Path
Power Loss Softkey Path
Cal Kit
Menu
SELECT
CAL KIT
Select Cal Kit
Menu
RETURN
Adapter
Removal Menu
2.4mm
85056
PORT
EXTENSIONS
HELP ADAPT
REMOVAL
3.5mmD
85033D/E
2.92*
85056K
VELOCITY
FACTOR
RECALL CAL
STETS
2.9mm
other kits
SET ZÆ
ADAPTER
DELAY
N 50W
85032B/E
MODIFY
[ ]
Calibrate
More Menu
7mm
85031
N 50W
85032F
SAVE
USER KIT
Select Cal Kit
More Menu
TRL 3.5mm
85052C
N 75W
85036
USER KIT
7-16
85038
MORE
3.5mmC
85033C
RETURN
RETURN
TRL Option
Menu
CAL Z0:
LINE Z0
SYSTEM Z0
SET REF:
THRU
ADAPTER
REMOVAL
TESTSET SW
CONTINUOUS
Recall Cal Sets
Menu
RECALL
CAL PORT 1
Specify Class
More Menu
DEFINE
STANDARD
S11A
FWD TRANS
S11B
REV TRANS
EXTENSIONS
on OFF
RECALL
CAL PORT 2
S11C
S22A
ADAPTER:
COAX
EXTENSION
PORT 1
LABEL
CLASS
S22B
WAVEGUIDE
EXTENSION
PORT 2
LABEL
KIT
S22C
RESPONSE
& ISOL'N
TRL/LRM
OPTION
MORE
MORE
KIT DONE
(MODIFIED)
SPECIFY
CLASS DONE
SPECIFY
CLASS DONE
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
Rcvr Cal
Menu
Label Class
More Menu
FWD TRANS
REV TRANS
S11C
FWD MATCH
S22A
REV MATCH
S22B
RESPONSE
Label Class
More Menu
Label Select
Kit Menu
LABEL:
TRL THRU
SELECT
LETTER
TRL
REFLECT
SPACE
TRL LINE
OR MATCH
Specify Class
More Menu
TRL
REFLECT
REV MATCH
MORE
RETURN
LABEL
CLASS DONE
S11/S21
ENH. RESP.
RESPONSE
S22/S12
ENH. RESP.
RESPONSE
& ISOL'N
MORE
LABEL
CLASS DONE
DO BOTH
*** :
OPENS
TRANSMISSION
*** THRUS
SHORTS
*** TRANS
ISOLATION
LOAD
REFLECT'N
Enh. Resp.
Isolation Menu
Response &
Isolation Menu
Shorts
Menu
SHORT (M)
RESPONSE
SHORT (M)
SHORT (F)
ISOL 'N STD
SHORT (F)
DONE RESP
ISOL 'N CAL
DONE:
SHORTS
OPEN (M)
THRU
*** MATCH
Response
Menu
OMIT
ISOLATION
OPEN (F)
THRU
THRU
***
ISOL'N
FULL
2-PORT
TRL*/LRM*
2-PORT
SPECIFY
CLASS DONE
TRL/LRM
Cal Menu
RECEIVER
CAL
TRL/LRM
Isolation Menu
DONE ***
ENH RESP
RETURN
Line / Match
Menu
2-Port Trans.
Menu
STANDARDS
DONE
2-Port Isolation
Menu
OMIT
ISOLATION
DO BOTH
FWD + REV
S22 REFL
OPENS
DO BOTH
FWD + REV
FWD TRANS
THRU
OMIT
ISOLATION
ISOLATION
FWD ISOL 'N
ISOL 'N STD
DO BOTH
FWD + REV
FWD MATCH
THRU
DO BOTH
FWD + REV
LN/MATCH1
LOAD
REV TRANS
THRU
FWD ISOL 'N
ISOL 'N STD
LN/MATCH2
LOAD
REV MATCH
THRU
REV ISOL 'N
ISOL 'N STD
DONE
LINE / MATCH
STANDARDS
DONE
ISOLATION
DONE
REV ISOL 'N
ISOL 'N STD
DONE
TRL/LRM
STANDARDS
DONE
Full 2-Port
Menu
ISOLATION
DONE
ISOLATION
DONE
2-Port Reflection
Menu
S22 1-Port
Menu
S11 1-Port
Menu
FORWARD:
OPENS
TRANSMISSION
REVERSE:
OPENS
FORWARD:
OPENS
SHORTS
SHORTS
SHORTS
ISOLATION
LOAD
LOAD
REFLECTION
S11 REFL
OPENS
TAKE RCVR
CAL SWEEP
RETURN
Enh. Resp.
Trans. Menu
S22
1-PORT
LINE/MATCH
ERASE
TITLE
Enh. Resp.
Refl. Menu
ENH. REFL.
on OFF
S11
1-PORT
RESPONSE
Enh. Resp.
Cal. Menu
THRU
THRU
BACK
SPACE
RESPONSE
& ISOL'N
LABEL
CLASS DONE
ENHANCED
RESPONSE
TRL LINE
OR MATCH
REFLECT
S22C
Enhanced
ResponseMenu
Calibrate
Menu
SPECIFY:
TRL THRU
FWD MATCH
SPECIFY
CLASS
REMOVE
ADAPTER
S11B
Specify Class
Menu
EXTENSION
INPUT B
CHOP
A and B
S11A
Modify Cal Kit
Menu
EXTENSION
INPUT A
ALTERNATE
A and B
Label Class
Menu
Reference
Plane Menu
Opens
Menu
OPEN (M)
OPEN (F)
LOAD
REVERSE:
OPENS
SHORTS
LOAD
DONE
2-PORT CAL
STANDARDS
DONE
DONE
1-PORT CAL
DONE
1-PORT CAL
DONE:
OPENS
DONE
1. When two ECal modules are used in a measurement, the routine will pause to allow you to insert
the next module. A "CONTINUE ECal" and "ABORT ECal" menu will be displayed during the pause.
2. When "MAN'L THRU" is turned "ON", the calibration routine will pause and allow you to insert your own thru.
A "CONTINUE ECal" and "ABORT ECal" menu will be displayed during the pause.
kl507ets
*** Represents "FORWARD"/"FWD" when calibrating the forward path or "REVERSE"/ "REV" when calibrating the reverse path.
Menu Map For Cal (8753ES only)
Select Seq
Menu
A
TTL I/O
Menu
New / Modify
Seq Menu
SEQUENCE X
SEQ X
TTL OUT
SEQUENCE 1
SEQ 1
TTL OUT
HIGH
PARALLEL
OUT ALL
SEQUENCE 2
SEQ 2
Seq
TTL Out
Menu
TTL OUT
LOW
SET BIT
SEQUENCE 3
SEQ 3
CLEAR BIT
END SWEEP
HIGH PULSE
SEQUENCE 4
SEQ 4
PARALL IN
BIT NUMBER
END SWEEP
LOW PULSE
SEQUENCE 5
SEQ 5
PARALL IN
IF BIT H
SEQUENCE 6
SEQ 6
IF BIT L
Seq Spec
Func Menu
Seq Dec
Making Menu
New / Modify
Seq Menu
Spec Func
More Menu
DECISION
MAKING
IF LIMIT
TEST PASS
SEQUENCE 1
SEQ 1
EMIT
BEEP
PERIPHERAL
HPIB ADDR
IF LIMIT
TEST FAIL
SEQUENCE 2
SEQ 2
TITLE TO
PRNTR/GPIB
TITLE TO
PERIPHERAL
LOOP
COUNTER
SEQUENCE 3
SEQ 3
TITLE TO
P MTR/GPIB
GOSUB
SEQUENCE
WAIT x
INCR LOOP
COUNTER
SEQUENCE 4
SEQ 4
SHOW
MENUS
NEW SEQ/
MODIFY SEQ
PAUSE
DECR LOOP
COUNTER
SEQUENCE 5
SEQ 5
ASSERT SRQ
DONE SEQ
MODIFY
MARKER-----CW
IF LOOP
COUNTER=0
SEQUENCE 6
SEQ 6
TTL I/O
MORE
IF LOOP
COUNTER<>0
SPECIAL
FUNCTIONS
RETURN
RETURN
Sequencing
Menu
CONTINUE
SEQUENCE
PAUSE TO
SELECT
DO
SEQUENCE
RETURN
TESTSET
I/O FWD
*
I/O REV
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
P MTR/GPIB
TO TITLE
TITLE TO
MEMORY
RETURN
RETURN
MORE
A
Select Seq
Menu2
Seq Load
Menu
STORE SEQ
TO DISK
SEQUENCE 1
SEQ 1
LOAD SEQ
SEQ 1
SEQUENCE 1
SEQ 1
SELECT
LETTER
PURGE SEQ
SEQ 1
LOAD SEQ
FROM DISK
SEQUENCE 2
SEQ 2
LOAD SEQ
SEQ 2
SEQUENCE 2
SEQ 2
SPACE
PURGE SEQ
SEQ 2
DUPLICATE
SEQUENCE
SEQUENCE 3
SEQ 3
LOAD SEQ
SEQ 3
SEQUENCE 3
SEQ 3
SEQUENCE 4
SEQ 4
LOAD SEQ
SEQ 4
TITLE
SEQUENCE
SEQUENCE 5
SEQ 5
LOAD SEQ
SEQ 5
SEQUENCE 5
SEQ 5
CLEAR
SEQUENCE
SEQUENCE 6
SEQ 6
LOAD SEQ
SEQ 6
SEQUENCE 6
SEQ 6
Sequencing
More Menu
PRINT
SEQUENCE
Select Seq
Menu
SEQUENCE X
SEQX
Select Seq
Menu
SEQUENCE X
SEQX
A
Select Seq
Menu2
File Title
Menu
SEQUENCE 4
SEQ 4
A Displays only the user-defined sequence (X),
where X is the sequence number, when not modifying
a sequence. When modifying a sequence all sequence
labels are shown.
RETURN
RETURN
GET SEQ
TITLES
RETURN
RETURN
STORE SEQ
SEQX
Purge Seq
Menu
PURGE SEQ
SEQ 4
PURGE SEQ
SEQ 5
PURGE SEQ
SEQ 6
ERASE
TITLE
DONE
A
PURGE SEQ
SEQ 3
BACK
SPACE
READ SEQ
FILE TITLS
RETURN
Seq Store
Menu
PURGE
SEQUENCES
READ SEQ
FILE TITLS
RETURN
GET SEQ
TITLES
Menu Map for Seq
ka521e
Set Clock
Menu
TIME STAMP
ON off
User Settings
Menu
PRESET
SETTINGS
Preset Settings
Menu
CAL INTERP
ON off
ROUND
SECONDS
SET
MINUTES
K36 MODE
on OFF
SET
HOUR
K39 MODE
on OFF
Ripple
Test Menu
Select Limits
Menu
Edit Ripple
Limits Menu
LIMIT LINE
RIPL LIMIT
on OFF
FREQUENCY
BAND
RIPPLE
LIMIT
RIPL TEST
on OFF
MINIMUM
FREQUENCY
BANDWIDTH
LIMIT
RIPL VALUE
[ OFF ]
MAXIMUM
FREQUENCY
BW DISPLAY
on OFF
MAXIMUM
RIPPLE
BW MARKER
on OFF
DELETE
N DB
POINTS
ADD
MINIMUM
BANDWIDTH
CLEAR
LIST
MAXIMUM
BANDWIDTH
DONE
RETURN
RIPL VALUE
BAND
SET
DAY
EDIT
RIPL LIMIT
SET
MONTH
SET
YEAR
RETURN
RETURN
Configure
Menu
System
SET CLOCK
CONFIGURE
MENU
USER
SETTINGS
LIMIT
MENU
RETURN
HARMONIC
MEAS
AMPLITUDE
OFFSET
SET FREQ
LOW PASS
Specify Gate
Menu
LOW PASS
IMPULSE
Gate Shape
Menu
EDIT
LOWER
LIMIT
DELETE
ADD
DELTA
LIMITS
ADD
CLEAR
LIST
MIDDLE
VALUE
LIMIT LINE
OFFSETS
LIMIT
TYPE
MARKER
MIDDLE
RETURN
DONE
DONE
EDIT
LIMIT LINE
Limit Type
Menu
WIDE
FLAT
LINE
CENTER
BANDPASS
SPAN
SINGLE
POINT
MINIMUM
Offset Table
Menu
USE SENSOR
A/B
CAL FACTOR
SENSOR A
SPECIFY
GATE
PHASE
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
SRC TUNE
on OFF
SLOPE
OFFSET DAC
CAL FACTOR
SENSOR B
ALC
ON off
PWR DAC
on OFF
POWER
LOSS
SRC ADJUST
DACS
****
DONE
DONE
Adjust DACS
Menu
SLOPE
DAC
AMPLITUDE
FREQUENCY
CLEAR
LIST
Source
Adjust Menu
SRC TUNE
FREQ
DEMOD:
OFF
GATE
SHAPE
Edit Sensor
Menu
CAL
FACTOR
EDIT
NORMAL
USE MEMORY
on OFF
SEGMENT
DELETE
GATE:
START
NORMAL
STIMULUS
VALUE
Edit List
Menu
UPPER
LIMIT
SLOPING
LINE
STOP
Edit Segment
Menu
MARKER
STIMULUS
BEEP FAIL
on OFF
GATE SHAPE
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
SEGMENT
LIMIT TEST
on OFF
WINDOW:
MAXIMUM
LOW PASS
STEP
RETURN
Window
Menu
BW TEST
on OFF
LIMIT LINE
on OFF
GATE
on OFF
WINDOW
**
***
Instrument
Mode Menu
Frequency
Offset Menu
LO
Menu
Harmonic
Mode Menu
NETWORK
ANALYZER
FREQ OFFS
on OFF
FREQUENCY :
CW
HARMONIC
OFF
EXT SOURCE
AUTO
LO
MENU
SWEEP
SECOND
DOWN
CONVERTER
POWER :
FIXED
THIRD
EXT SOURCE
MANUAL
TUNED
RECEIVER
UP
CONVERTER
SQUARE LAW
LINEAR DAC
*
Only appears on instruments
equipped with Option 010.
DETECTOR
OFFSET DAC
**
Only appears on instruments
equipped with Option 002.
LOG
OFFSET DAC
WRITE
EEPROM
***
****
Service menu key descriptions are
located in this analyzer's service guide.
Loss appears thru the power loss path.
HB FLTR SW
on OFF
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
FREQ OFFS
MENU
RETURN
Service
Menu
TESTS
Tests
Menu
RETURN
EXECUTE
TEST
TEST
OPTIONS
SELF
DIAGNOSIS
INTERNAL
TESTS
Service Modes
Menu
Peek / Poke
Menu
Serve Mode
More Menu
CONTINUE
TEST
FRACN TUNE
on OFF
PEEK / POKE
ADDRESS
SAMPLE COR
ON off
REPEAT
on OFF
SRC ADJUST
MENU
RECORD
on OFF
SOURCE PLL
ON off
Test Options
Menu
IF GAIN
AUTO
PEEK
SERVICE
MODES
EXTERNAL
TESTS
LO CONTROL
on OFF
ANALOG BUS
on OFF
SYS VER
TESTS
RF < LO
LO SOURCE
ADDRESS
PEEK /
POKE
ADJUSTMENT
TESTS
LOSS / SENSR
LISTS
VIEW
MEASURE
VIEW
MEASURE
FIRMWARE
REVISION
DISPLAY
TESTS
DUMP GRAPH
on OFF
MORE
RESET
MEMORY
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
LIMITS
[ NORM ]
PWR LOSS
on OFF
IF GAIN
OFF
PLL AUTO
ON off
SPUR TEST
on OFF
PLL DIAG
on OFF
PLL PAUSE
[ CONT ]
IF GAIN
ON
POKE
SWEEP
RF > LO
kl504ets
RETURN
.
Edit Limits
Menu
*
INSTRUMENT
MODE
SERVICE
MENU
TRANSFORM
on OFF
RAW OFFSET
ON off
SPUR AVOID
ON off
Transform
Menu
STIMULUS
OFFSET
MARKER
AMP. OFS.
System
Menu
TRANSFORM
MENU
Offset Limits
Menu
Limits
Menu
Bandwidth
Test Menu
STORE EEPR
on OFF
SPUR AVOID
ON off
RETURN
Menu Map for System (8753ET only)
Set Clock
Menu
TIME STAMP
ON off
Preset Settings
Menu
User Settings
Menu
PRESET
SETTINGS
CAL INTERP
ON off
ROUND
SECONDS
SET
MINUTES
K36 MODE
on OFF
SET
HOUR
K39 MODE
on OFF
*****
Ripple
Test Menu
Select Limits
Menu
Edit Ripple
Limits Menu
LIMIT LINE
RIPL LIMIT
on OFF
FREQUENCY
BAND
RIPPLE
LIMIT
RIPL TEST
on OFF
MINIMUM
FREQUENCY
BANDWIDTH
LIMIT
RIPL VALUE
[ OFF ]
MAXIMUM
FREQUENCY
BW DISPLAY
on OFF
MAXIMUM
RIPPLE
BW MARKER
on OFF
DELETE
N DB
POINTS
ADD
MINIMUM
BANDWIDTH
CLEAR
LIST
MAXIMUM
BANDWIDTH
DONE
RETURN
******
RIPL VALUE
BAND
SET
DAY
EDIT
RIPL LIMIT
SET
MONTH
SET
YEAR
RETURN
RETURN
Configure
Menu
System
TESTSET SW
CONTINUOUS
SET CLOCK
SPUR AVOID
ON off
CONFIGURE
MENU
USER
SETTINGS
LIMIT
MENU
RETURN
HARMONIC
MEAS
TRANSFORM
on OFF
AMPLITUDE
OFFSET
SET FREQ
LOW PASS
MARKER
AMP. OFS.
Specify Gate
Menu
LOW PASS
IMPULSE
Gate Shape
Menu
EDIT
LOWER
LIMIT
DELETE
ADD
DELTA
LIMITS
ADD
CLEAR
LIST
MIDDLE
VALUE
LIMIT LINE
OFFSETS
LIMIT
TYPE
MARKER
MIDDLE
RETURN
DONE
DONE
EDIT
LIMIT LINE
Limit Type
Menu
WIDE
FLAT
LINE
CENTER
BANDPASS
SPAN
SINGLE
POINT
MINIMUM
Offset Table
Menu
USE SENSOR
A/B
CAL FACTOR
SENSOR A
SPECIFY
GATE
PHASE
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
SRC TUNE
on OFF
SLOPE
OFFSET DAC
CAL FACTOR
SENSOR B
ALC
ON off
PWR DAC
on OFF
POWER
LOSS
SRC ADJUST
DACS
SQUARE LAW
LINEAR DAC
*
Only appears on instruments
equipped with Option 010.
DETECTOR
OFFSET DAC
**
Only appears on instruments
equipped with Option 002.
LOG
OFFSET DAC
WRITE
EEPROM
HB FLTR SW
on OFF
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
****
DONE
DONE
Adjust DACS
Menu
SLOPE
DAC
AMPLITUDE
FREQUENCY
CLEAR
LIST
Source
Adjust Menu
SRC TUNE
FREQ
DEMOD:
OFF
GATE
SHAPE
Edit Sensor
Menu
CAL
FACTOR
EDIT
NORMAL
USE MEMORY
on OFF
SEGMENT
DELETE
GATE:
START
NORMAL
STIMULUS
VALUE
Edit List
Menu
UPPER
LIMIT
SLOPING
LINE
STOP
Edit Segment
Menu
MARKER
STIMULUS
BEEP FAIL
on OFF
GATE SHAPE
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
SEGMENT
LIMIT TEST
on OFF
WINDOW:
MAXIMUM
LOW PASS
STEP
RETURN
Window
Menu
BW TEST
on OFF
LIMIT LINE
on OFF
GATE
on OFF
WINDOW
**
***
Instrument
Mode Menu
Frequency
Offset Menu
LO
Menu
Harmonic
Mode Menu
NETWORK
ANALYZER
FREQ OFFS
on OFF
FREQUENCY :
CW
HARMONIC
OFF
EXT SOURCE
AUTO
LO
MENU
SWEEP
SECOND
DOWN
CONVERTER
POWER :
FIXED
THIRD
EXT SOURCE
MANUAL
TUNED
RECEIVER
UP
CONVERTER
FREQ OFFS
MENU
RETURN
Service
Menu
TESTS
Tests
Menu
***
Service menu key descriptions are
located in this analyzer's service guide.
****
*****
Loss appears thru the power loss path.
Only appears on instruments equipped
with Option K36.
******
Only appears on instruments equipped
with Option K39.
RETURN
EXECUTE
TEST
TEST
OPTIONS
SELF
DIAGNOSIS
INTERNAL
TESTS
Service Modes
Menu
Peek / Poke
Menu
Serve Mode
More Menu
CONTINUE
TEST
FRACN TUNE
on OFF
PEEK / POKE
ADDRESS
SAMPLE COR
ON off
REPEAT
on OFF
SRC ADJUST
MENU
RECORD
on OFF
SOURCE PLL
ON off
Test Options
Menu
IF GAIN
AUTO
PEEK
SERVICE
MODES
EXTERNAL
TESTS
LO CONTROL
on OFF
ANALOG BUS
on OFF
SYS VER
TESTS
RF < LO
LO SOURCE
ADDRESS
PEEK /
POKE
ADJUSTMENT
TESTS
LOSS / SENSR
LISTS
VIEW
MEASURE
VIEW
MEASURE
FIRMWARE
REVISION
DISPLAY
TESTS
DUMP GRAPH
on OFF
MORE
RESET
MEMORY
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
RETURN
LIMITS
[ NORM ]
PWR LOSS
on OFF
IF GAIN
OFF
PLL AUTO
ON off
SPUR TEST
on OFF
PLL DIAG
on OFF
PLL PAUSE
[ CONT ]
IF GAIN
ON
POKE
SWEEP
RF > LO
kl503ets
RETURN
.
Edit Limits
Menu
*
INSTRUMENT
MODE
SERVICE
MENU
Transform
Menu
STIMULUS
OFFSET
RAW OFFSET
ON off
System
Menu
TRANSFORM
MENU
Offset Limits
Menu
Limits
Menu
Bandwidth
Test Menu
STORE EEPR
on OFF
SPUR AVOID
ON off
RETURN
Menu Map for System (8753ES only)
Menu Maps
Menu Maps
4-24
5 Hardkey/Softkey Reference
5-1
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Key Reference
Key Reference
This chapter contains information on the following topics:
• softkey and front-panel functions in alphabetical order (includes a brief description of
each function)
• cross reference of programming commands to key functions
• cross reference of softkeys to front-panel access keys
NOTE
5-2
The SERVICE MENU keys are not included in this chapter. Information on
the SERVICE MENU keys can be found in the service guide.
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Where to Look for More Information
Where to Look for More Information
Additional information about many of the topics discussed in this chapter is located in the
following areas:
• "Making Measurements" in the user’s guide contains step-by-step procedures for
making measurements or using particular functions.
• "Printing, Plotting, and Saving Measurement Results" in the user’s guide contains
instructions for saving to disk or the analyzer internal memory, and printing and
plotting displayed measurements.
• “Optimizing Measurement Results” in the user’s guide describes techniques and
functions for achieving the best measurement results.
• “Operating Concepts” chapter of the user’s guide contains explanatory-style
information about many applications and analyzer operation.
• The programmer’s guide provides a complete description of all GPIB mnemonics.
Guide Terms and Conventions
The eight keys along the right side of the analyzer display are called softkeys. Their labels
are shown on the display. The softkeys appear in shaded boxes in this chapter (for
example, TRANSMISSION ). The labeled keys that are on the front panel of the analyzer
are called front-panel keys or hardkeys. The front-panel keys appear in unshaded boxes in
this chapter (for example, Start ).
5-3
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
Analyzer Functions
This section contains an alphabetical listing of softkey and front-panel functions, and a
brief description of each function.
.
is used to add a decimal point to the number you are
entering.
−
is used to add a minus sign to the number you are
entering.
is used to step up the current value of the active function.
The analyzer defines the step size for different functions.
No units terminator is required. For editing a test
sequence, this key can be used to scroll through and
execute the displayed sequence one step at a time.
is used to step down the current value of the active
function. The analyzer defines the step size for different
functions. No units terminator is required. For editing a
test sequence, this key can be used to scroll backwards
through the displayed sequence without executing it.
has two independent functions:
• modifies entries and test sequences
• moves marker information off of the graticules
The backspace key will delete the last entry, or the last
digit entered from the numeric keypad. The backspace key
can also be used in two ways for modifying a test sequence:
• deleting a single-key command that you may have
pressed by mistake, (for example A/R )
• deleting the last digit in a series of entered digits, as
long as you haven't yet pressed a terminator, (for
example if you pressed Start 1 2 but did not press
G/n , etc.)
The second function of this key is to move marker
information off of the graticules so that the display traces
are clearer. If there are two or more markers activated on
a channel on the right side of the display, pressing
will turn off the softkey menu and move the marker
information into the softkey display area. Pressing
,
or any hardkey which brings up a menu, or a softkey, will
restore the softkey menu and move the marker
information back onto the graticules.
5-4
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
∆ MODE MENU
goes to the delta marker menu, which is used to read the
difference in values between the active marker and a
reference marker.
∆ MODE OFF
turns off the delta marker mode, so that the values
displayed for the active marker are absolute values.
∆ REF = 1
establishes marker 1 as a reference. The active marker
stimulus and response values are then shown relative to
this delta reference. Once marker 1 has been selected as
the delta reference, the softkey label ∆ REF = 1 is
underlined in this menu, and the marker menu is
returned to the screen. In the marker menu, the first key
is now labeled MARKER ∆ REF = 1 . The notation
“∆REF=1” appears at the top right corner of the graticule.
∆ REF = 2
makes marker 2 the delta reference. Active marker
stimulus and response values are then shown relative to
this reference.
∆ REF = 3
makes marker 3 the delta reference.
∆ REF = 4
makes marker 4 the delta reference.
∆ REF = 5
makes marker 5 the delta reference.
∆ REF = ∆ FIXED MKR
sets a user-specified fixed reference marker. The stimulus
and response values of the reference can be set arbitrarily,
and can be anywhere in the display area. Unlike markers
1 to 5, the fixed marker need not be on the trace. The fixed
marker is indicated by a small triangle ∆, and the active
marker stimulus and response values are shown relative
to this point. The notation "∆REF=∆" is displayed at the
top right corner of the graticule.
Pressing this softkey turns on the fixed marker. Its
stimulus and response values can then be changed using
the fixed marker menu, which is accessed with the
FIXED MKR POSITION softkey described below.
Alternatively, the fixed marker can be set to the current
active marker position, using the MKR ZERO softkey in
the marker menu.
1/S
expresses the data in inverse S-parameter values, for use
in amplifier and oscillator design.
2X: [1&2]/[3&4]
sets up a two-graticule display with channel 1 and 2 on the
top graticule and channels 3 and 4 in the bottom graticule.
2X: [1&3]/[2&4]
sets up a two-graticule display with channel 1 and 3 in the
top graticule and channels 2 and 4 in the bottom graticule.
2.4mm 85056
selects the 85056A or the 85056D cal kit.
5-5
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
2.92* 85056K
selects the 85056K cal kit.
2.92mm other kits
selects the 2.92 mm cal kit model.
3.5mmC 85033C
selects the 85033C cal kit.
3.5mmD 85033D/E
selects the 85033D or the 85033E cal kit.
4X: [1] [2]/[3] [4]
sets up a four-graticule display with channel 2 in the
upper right quadrant and channel 3 in the lower left
quadrant.
4X: [1] [3]/[2] [4]
sets up a four-graticule display with channel 3 in the
upper right quadrant and channel 2 in the lower left
quadrant.
4 PARAM DISPLAYS
provides single-keystroke options to quickly set up
multiple-channel displays, and information on
multiple-channel displays.
7-16 85038
selects the 85038A/F/M cal kit.
7 mm 85031
selects the 85031B cal kit.
A
measures the absolute power amplitude at input A.
A/B
calculates and displays the complex ratio of input A to
input B.
ABORT ECal
is displayed during ECal dual module operation and
during manual thru operation as a pause in the process of
measurement. Press this softkey to stop the process and
return to the main ECal menu.
A/R
calculates and displays the complex ratio of the signal at
input A to the reference signal at input R.
ACTIVE ENTRY
puts the name of the active entry in the display title.
ACTIVE MAGNITUDE
puts the active marker magnitude in the display title.
ADAPTER: COAX
selects coaxial as the type of adapter used in adapter
removal calibration.
ADAPTER: WAVEGUIDE
selects waveguide as the type of adapter used in adapter
removal calibration.
ADAPTER DELAY
is used to enter the value of electrical delay of the adapter
used in adapter removal calibration.
ADAPTER REMOVAL
provides access to the adapter removal menu.
ADD
1) displays the edit segment menu and adds a new
segment to the end of the list. The new segment is initially
a duplicate of the segment indicated by the pointer > and
selected with the SEGMENT softkey.
5-6
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
2) adds a new frequency band to the Ripple Limit list
which is indicated by the pointer >. The new frequency
band is a duplicate of the most recently selected frequency
band.
ADDRESS: 8753
sets the GPIB address of the analyzer, using the entry
controls. There is no physical address switch to set in the
analyzer. The default GPIB address is 16.
ADDRESS: CONTROLLER
sets the GPIB address the analyzer will use to
communicate with the external controller.
ADDRESS: DISK
sets the GPIB address the analyzer will use to
communicate with an external GPIB disk drive.
ADDRESS: P MTR/GPIB
sets the GPIB address the analyzer will use to
communicate with the power meter used in service
routines.
ADJUST DISPLAY
presents a menu for adjusting display intensity, colors,
and accessing save and recall functions for modified LCD
color sets.
ADJUSTMENT TESTS
leads to the beginning of the adjustment tests. These tests
generate correction constants that are used by the
analyzer.
ALL SEGS SWEEP
retrieves the full frequency list sweep.
ALTERNATE A and B
measures only one input, A or B, per frequency sweep, in
order to reduce spurious signals. Thus, this mode
optimizes the dynamic range for all four S-parameter
measurements.
AMPLITUDE OFFSET
adds or subtracts an offset in amplitude value. This allows
limits already defined to be used for testing at a different
response level. For example, if attenuation is added to or
removed from a test setup, the limits can be offset an
equal amount. Use the entry block controls to specify the
offset.
ANALOG IN Aux Input
displays a dc or low frequency ac auxiliary voltage on the
vertical axis, using the real format. An external signal
source such as a detector or function generator can be
connected to the rear panel AUXILIARY INPUT
connector.
ARBITRARY IMPEDANCE
defines the standard type to be a load, but with an
arbitrary impedance (different from system Z0).
ASSERT SRQ
sets the sequence bit in the Event Status Register, which
can be used to generate an SRQ (service request) to the
system controller.
5-7
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
AUTO FEED ON off
turns the plotter auto feed function on or off when in the
define plot menu. It turns the printer auto feed on or off
when in the define print menu.
AUTO SCALE
brings the trace data in view on the display with one
keystroke. Stimulus values are not affected, only scale and
reference values. The analyzer determines the smallest
possible scale factor that will put all displayed data onto
80% of the vertical graticule. The reference value is chosen
to put the trace in center screen, then rounded to an
integer multiple of the scale factor.
AUX CHAN on OFF
enables and disables auxiliary channels 3 and 4.
AUX OUT on OFF
allows you to monitor the analog bus nodes (except nodes
1, 2, 3, 4, 9, 10, and 12) with external equipment. To do
this, connect the equipment to the AUX INPUT BNC
connector on the rear panel.
AVERAGING FACTOR
makes averaging factor the active function. Any value up
to 999 can be used. The algorithm used for averaging is:
A ( n ) = [ S ( n ) + S ( n – 1 ) + ... + S ( n – F + 1 ) ] ⁄ F
where
A(n) = current average
S(n) = current measurement
F = average factor
AVERAGING on OFF
turns the averaging function on or off for the active
channel. “Avg” is displayed in the status notations area at
the left of the display, together with the sweep count for
the averaging factor, when averaging is on. The sweep
count for averaging is reset to 1 whenever an instrument
state change affecting the measured data is made.
At the start of the averaging or following
AVERAGING RESTART , averaging starts at 1 and
averages each new sweep into the trace until it reaches the
specified averaging factor. The sweep count is displayed in
the status notations area below “Avg” and updated every
sweep as it increments. When the specified averaging
factor is reached, the trace data continues to be updated,
weighted by that averaging factor.
AVERAGING RESTART
5-8
averaging starts at 1 and averages each new sweep into
the trace until it reaches the specified averaging factor.
The sweep count is displayed in the status notations area
below “Avg” and updated every sweep as it increments.
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
Avg
is used to access three different noise reduction
techniques: sweep-to-sweep averaging, display smoothing,
and variable IF bandwidth. Any or all of these can be used
simultaneously. Averaging and smoothing can be set
independently for each channel, and the IF bandwidth can
be set independently if the stimulus is uncoupled.
B
measures the absolute power amplitude at input B.
B/R
calculates and displays the complex ratio of input B to
input R.
BACK SPACE
deletes the last character entered.
BACKGROUND INTENSITY
sets the background intensity of the LCD as a percent of
white. The factory-set default value is stored in
non-volatile memory.
BANDPASS
(Option 010 only) sets the time-domain bandpass mode.
BANDWIDTH LIMIT
selects the bandwidth limit line choice. This selection
leads to the menu used to define and test bandwidth limits
of a bandpass filter. Refer to the “Using Bandwidth Limits
to Test a Bandpass Filter” section in the “Making
Measurements” chapter of the user’s guide.
BEEP DONE ON off
toggles an annunciator which sounds to indicate
completion of certain operations such as calibration or
instrument state save.
BEEP FAIL on OFF
turns the limit fail beeper on or off. When limit testing is
on and the fail beeper is on, a beep is sounded each time a
limit test is performed and a failure detected. The limit
fail beeper is independent of the warning beeper and the
operation complete beeper.
BEEP WARN on OFF
toggles the warning annunciator. When the annunciator is
on it sounds a warning when a cautionary message is
displayed.
BLANK DISPLAY
switches off the analyzer's display. This feature may be
helpful in prolonging the life of the LCD in applications
where the analyzer is left unattended (such as in an
automated test system). Pressing any front panel key will
restore the default display operation.
BRIGHTNESS
adjusts the brightness of the color being modified. Refer to
the section on adjusting the display color in the “Using
Measurement Functions” chapter of the user’s guide for an
explanation of using this softkey for color modification of
display attributes.
BW DISPLAY on OFF
displays the measured bandwidth value to the right of the
pass/fail message.
5-9
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
BW MARKER on OFF
displays the cutoff frequencies of the bandwidth using
markers on the data trace.
BW TEST on OFF
turns bandpass filter bandwidth testing on or off. When
bandwidth testing is on, the analyzer locates the
maximum point of the data trace and uses it as the
reference from which to measure the filter’s bandwidth.
Then, the analyzer determines the two cutoff frequencies
of the bandpass filter. The cutoff frequencies are the two
points on the data trace at a user-specified amplitude
below the reference point. The cutoff frequencies are also
referred to as the N dB Points where “N” is defined as the
number of decibels below the peak of the bandpass that
the filter is specified. (The amplitude is specified using the
N DB POINTS softkey.)
The bandwidth is the frequency difference between the
two cutoff frequencies. The bandwidth is compared to the
user-specified minimum and maximum bandwidth limits
(entered using the MINIMUM BANDWIDTH and
MAXIMUM BANDWIDTH softkeys.)
If the test passed, a message is displayed in green text in
the upper left portion of the LCD. An example of this
message is: BW1: Pass, where the “1” indicates the
channel where the bandwidth test is performed. If the
bandwidth test does not pass, a fail message indicating
whether the bandpass was too wide or too narrow is
displayed in red text. An example of this message is BW1:
Wide.
C0
is used to enter the C0 term in the definition of an OPEN
standard in a calibration kit, which is the constant term of
the cubic polynomial and is scaled by 10−15.
C1
is used to enter the C1 term, expressed in F/Hz
(Farads/Hz) and scaled by 10−27.
C2
is used to enter the C2 term, expressed in F/Hz2 and
scaled by 10−36.
C3
is used to enter the C3 term, expressed in F/Hz3 and
scaled by 10−45.
Cal
key leads to a series of menus to perform measurement
calibrations for vector error correction (accuracy
enhancement), and for specifying the calibration
standards used. The CAL key also leads to softkeys
which activate interpolated error correction and power
meter calibration.
5-10
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
CAL FACTOR
accepts a power sensor calibration factor % for the
segment.
CAL FACTOR SENSOR A
brings up the segment modify menu and segment edit
(calibration factor menu) which allows you to enter a
power sensor's calibration factors. The calibration factor
data entered in this menu will be stored for power sensor
A.
CAL INTERP ON off
sets the preset state of interpolated error-correction on or
off.
CAL FACTOR SENSOR B
brings up the segment modify menu and segment edit
(calibration factor menu) which allows you to enter a
power sensor's calibration factors. The calibration factor
data entered in this menu will be stored for power sensor
B.
CAL KIT [ ]
indicates the currently selected cal kit and leads to the
select cal kit menu, which is used to select one of the
default calibration kits available for different connector
types. This, in turn, leads to additional menus used to
define calibration standards other than those in the
default kits (refer to “Modifying Calibration Kits” in the
“Operating Concepts” chapter of the user’s guide). When a
calibration kit has been specified, its connector type is
displayed in brackets in the softkey label. The cal kits
available are listed below, refer to the softkey descriptions
for these softkeys for more information.
— 2.4mm 85056
— 2.92* 85056K
— 2.92mm other kits
— 3.5mmC 85033C
— 3.5mmD 85033D/E
— 7-16 85038
— 7mm 85031
— N 50Ω 85032B/E
— N 50Ω 85032F
— N 75Ω 85036
— TRL 3.5mm 85052C
CAL Z0: LINE Z0
this default selection establishes the TRL/LRM
LINE/MATCH standard as the characteristic impedance.
5-11
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
CAL Z0: SYSTEM Z0
allows you to modify the characteristic impedance of the
system for TRL/LRM calibration.
CALIBRATE MENU
leads to the calibration menu, which provides several
accuracy enhancement procedures ranging from a simple
frequency response calibration to a full two-port
calibration. At the completion of a calibration procedure,
this menu is returned to the screen, correction is
automatically turned on, and the notation Cor or C2 is
displayed at the left of the screen.
Center
is used, along with the Span key, to define the frequency
range of the stimulus. When the Center key is pressed,
its function becomes the active function. The value is
displayed in the active entry area, and can be changed
with the knob, step keys, or numeric keypad.
CENTER
sets the center frequency of a subsweep in a list frequency
sweep.
CH1 DATA [ ]
brings up the printer color selection menu. The channel 1
data trace default color is magenta for color prints.
CH1 DATA LIMIT LN
selects channel 1 data trace and limit line for display color
modification.
CH1 MEM
selects channel 1 memory trace for display color
modification.
CH1 MEM [ ]
brings up the printer color selection menu. The channel 1
memory trace default color is green for color prints.
CH2 DATA [ ]
brings up the printer color selection menu. The channel 2
data trace default color is blue for color prints.
CH2 DATA LIMIT LN
selects channel 2 data trace and limit line for display color
modification.
CH2 MEM
selects channel 2 memory trace for display color
modification.
CH2 MEM [ ]
brings up the printer color selection menu. The channel 2
memory trace default color is red for color prints.
CH3 DATA [ ]
brings up the printer color selection menu. The channel 3
data trace default color is magenta for color prints.
CH3 DATA LIMIT LN
selects channel 3 data trace and limit line for display color
modification.
CH3 MEM
selects channel 3 memory trace for display color.
CH3 MEM [ ]
brings up the printer color selection menu. The channel 2
data trace default color is green for color prints.
5-12
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
CH4 DATA [ ]
brings up the printer color selection menu. The channel 4
data trace default color is blue for color prints.
CH4 DATA LIMIT LN
selects channel 4 data trace and limit line for display color
modification.
CH4 MEM
selects channel 4 memory trace for display color
modification.
CH4 MEM [ ]
brings up the printer color selection menu. The channel 2
memory trace default color is red for color prints.
Chan 1
allows you to select channel 1 as the active channel.
The active channel is indicated by an amber LED adjacent
to the corresponding channel key. All of the
channel-specific functions you select, such as format or
scale, apply to the active channel. By default, Chan 1
measures S11 in log mag format.
Chan 2
allows you to select channel 2 as the active channel.
The active channel is indicated by an amber LED adjacent
to the corresponding channel key. All of the
channel-specific functions you select, such as format or
scale, apply to the active channel. By default, Chan 2
measures S21 in log mag format.
Chan 3
allows you to select channel 3 as the active channel.
The active channel is indicated by an amber LED adjacent
to the corresponding channel key. All of the
channel-specific functions you select, such as format or
scale, apply to the active channel. Chan 3 is the auxiliary
channel of Chan 1 . By default, Chan 3 measures S12 in
log mag format.
Chan 4
allows you to select channel 4 as the active channel.
The active channel is indicated by an amber LED adjacent
to the corresponding channel key. All of the
channel-specific functions you select, such as format or
scale, apply to the active channel. Chan 4 is the auxiliary
channel of Chan 2 . By default, Chan 4 measures S22 in
log mag format.
CHAN POWER [COUPLED]
is used to apply the same power levels to Chan 1/3 & 2/4.
CHAN POWER [UNCOUPLED is used to apply different power levels to Chan 1/3 & 2/4.
CHANNEL POSITION
configures multiple-channel displays so that the auxiliary
channels are adjacent to or beneath the primary channels.
CHOP A and B
measures A and B inputs simultaneously for faster
measurements.
5-13
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
CLEAR BIT
when the parallel port is configured for GPIO, 8 output
bits can be controlled with this key. When this key is
pressed, “TTL OUT BIT NUMBER” becomes the active
function. This active function must be entered through the
keypad number keys, followed by the x1 key. The bit is
cleared when the x1 key is pressed. Entering numbers
larger than 7 will result in bit 7 being cleared, and
entering numbers lower than 0 will result in bit 0 being
cleared.
CLEAR LIST
deletes all segments or bands in the list.
CLEAR SEQUENCE
clears a sequence from memory. The titles of cleared
sequences will remain in load, store, and purge menus.
This is done as a convenience for those who often reuse the
same titles.
COAX
defines the standard (and the offset) as coaxial. This
causes the analyzer to assume linear phase response in
any offsets.
COAXIAL DELAY
applies a linear phase compensation to the trace for use
with electrical delay. That is, the effect is the same as if a
corresponding length of perfect vacuum dielectric coaxial
transmission line was added to the reference signal path.
COLOR
adjusts the degree of whiteness of the color being modified.
Refer to the section on adjusting the display color in the
“Using Measurement Functions” chapter of the user’s
guide for an explanation of using this softkey for color
modification of display attributes.
CONFIDENCE CHECK
provides access to the ECal confidence menu. This menu
contains choices to compare current measurements of the
selected ECal module against factory measurements.
CONFIGURE EXT DISK
provides access to the configure ext disk menu. This menu
contains softkeys used to the disk address, unit number,
and volume number.
CONFIGURE MENU
provides access to the configure menu. This menu contains
softkeys to control raw offsets, spur avoidance, the test set
transfer switch, and user preset settings.
CONFIGURE [MODULE A]
provides access to the ECal module configure menu. This
menu contains softkeys to check the operation of the
module, to get information about the module, and to set
isolation parameters.
CONTINUE ECal
is displayed during ECal dual module operation and
during manual thru operation as a pause in the process of
measurement. After you have inserted the next module or
connected the thru, press this softkey to continue the
process.
5-14
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
CONTINUE SEQUENCE
resumes a paused sequence.
CONTINUOUS
located under the Sweep Setup key, is the standard
sweep mode of the analyzer, in which the sweep is
triggered automatically and continuously and the trace is
updated with each sweep.
CONVERSION [ ]
brings up the conversion menu which converts the
measured data to impedance (Z) or admittance (Y). When
a conversion parameter has been defined, it is shown in
brackets under the softkey label. If no conversion has been
defined, the softkey label reads CONVERSION [OFF] .
Copy
provides access to the menus used for controlling external
plotters and printers and defining the plot parameters.
CORRECTION on OFF
turns error correction on or off. The analyzer uses the most
recent calibration data for the displayed parameter. If the
stimulus state has been changed since calibration, the
original state is recalled, and the message "SOURCE
PARAMETERS CHANGED" is displayed.
COUNTER: ANALOG BUS
switches the counter to count the analog bus.
COUNTER: DIV FRAC N
switches the counter to count the A14 fractional-N VCO
frequency after it has been divided down to 100 kHz for
phase-locking the VCO.
COUNTER: FRAC N
switches the counter to count the A14 fractional-N VCO
frequency at the node shown on the overall block diagram.
COUNTER: OFF
switches the internal counter off and removes the counter
display from the LCD.
COUPLED CH ON off
toggles the channel coupling of stimulus values. With
COUPLED CH ON (the preset condition), both channels
have the same stimulus values (the inactive channel takes
on the stimulus values of the active channel).
CW FREQ
is used to set the frequency for power sweep and CW time
sweep modes. If the instrument is not in either of these
two modes, it is automatically switched into CW time
mode.
CW TIME
turns on a sweep mode similar to an oscilloscope. The
analyzer is set to a single frequency, and the data is
displayed versus time. The frequency of the CW time
sweep is set with CW FREQ in the stimulus menu.
D2/D1 to D2 on OFF
this math function ratios channels 1 and 2, and puts the
results in the channel 2 data array. Both channels must be
on and have the same number of points. Refer to the
"Making Measurements" chapter in the user’s guide for
information on how to use this function to make gain
compression measurements.
5-15
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
DATA and MEMORY
displays both the current data and memory traces.
DATA ARRAY on OFF
specifies whether or not to store the error-corrected data
on disk with the instrument state.
DATA/MEM
divides the data by the memory, normalizing the data to
the memory, and displays the result. This is useful for
ratio comparison of two traces, for instance in
measurements of gain or attenuation.
DATA - MEM
subtracts the memory from the data. The vector
subtraction is performed on the complex data. This is
appropriate for storing a measured vector error, for
example directivity, and later subtracting it from the
device measurement.
DATA → MEMORY
stores the current active measurement data in the
memory of the active channel. It then becomes the
memory trace, for use in subsequent math manipulations
or display. If a parameter has just been changed and the *
status notation is displayed at the left of the display, the
data is not stored in memory until a clean sweep has been
executed. The gating and smoothing status of the trace are
stored with the measurement data.
DATA ONLY on OFF
stores only the measurement data of the device under test
to a disk file. The instrument state and calibration are not
stored. This is faster than storing with the instrument
state, and uses less disk space. It is intended for use in
archiving data that will later be used with an external
controller, and data cannot be read back by the analyzer.
DECISION MAKING
presents the sequencing decision making menu under the
Seq menu.
DECR LOOP COUNTER
decrements the value of the loop counter by 1.
DEFAULT COLORS
returns all the display color settings back to the
factory-set default values that are stored in non-volatile
memory.
DEFAULT PLOT SETUP
resets the plotting parameters to their default values.
DEFAULT PRNT SETUP
resets the printing parameters to their default values.
DEFINE DISK-SAVE
leads to the define save menu. Use this menu to specify
the data to be stored on disk in addition to the instrument
state.
DEFINE PLOT
leads to a sequence of three menus. The first defines which
elements are to be plotted and the auto feed state. The
second defines which pen number is to be used with each
of the elements (these are channel dependent.) The third
defines the line types (these are channel dependent), plot
scale, and plot speed.
5-16
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
DEFINE PRINT
leads to the define print menu. This menu defines the
printer mode (monochrome or color) and the auto-feed
state.
DEFINE STANDARD
makes the standard number the active function, and
brings up the define standard menus. The standard
number (1 to 8) is an arbitrary reference number used to
reference standards while specifying a class.
DELAY
selects the group delay format, with marker values given
in seconds.
DELAY/THRU
defines the standard type as a transmission line of
specified length, for calibrating transmission
measurements.
DELETE
deletes the segment or the frequency band indicated by
the > pointer.
DELETE ALL FILES
deletes all files.
DELETE FILE
deletes a selected file.
DELTA LIMITS
sets the limits an equal amount above and below a
specified middle value, instead of setting upper and lower
limits separately. This is used in conjunction with
MIDDLE VALUE or MARKER → MIDDLE , to set limits
for testing a device that is specified at a particular value
plus or minus an equal tolerance.
For example, a device may be specified at 0 dB ±3 dB.
Enter the delta limits as 3 dB and the middle value as
0 dB.
DEMOD: AMPLITUDE
(Option 010 only) amplitude demodulation for CW time
transform measurements.
DEMOD: OFF
(Option 010 only) turns time domain demodulation off.
DEMOD: PHASE
(Option 010 only) phase demodulation for CW TIME
transform measurements.
DIRECTORY SIZE
lets you specify the number of directory files to be
initialized on a disk. This is particularly useful with a
hard disk, where you may want a directory larger than the
default 256 files, or with a floppy disk you may want to
reduce the directory to allow extra space for data files. The
number of directory files must be a multiple of 8. The
minimum number is 8, and there is no practical maximum
limit. Set the directory size before initializing a disk.
5-17
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
DISK UNIT NUMBER
specifies the number of the disk unit in the disk drive that
is to be accessed in an external disk store or load routine.
This is used in conjunction with the GPIB address of the
disk drive, and the volume number, to gain access to a
specific area on a disk. The access hierarchy is GPIB
address, disk unit number, disk volume number.
DISP MKRS ON off
displays response and stimulus values for all markers that
are turned on. Available only if no marker functions are
on, for example MKR STATS .
Display
provides access to a series of menus for instrument and
active channel display functions. The first menu defines
the displayed active channel trace in terms of the
mathematical relationship between data and trace
memory. Other functions include auxiliary channel
enabling, dual channel display (overlaid or split), display
intensity, color selection, active channel display title, and
frequency blanking.
DISPLAY: DATA
displays the current measurement data for the active
channel.
DISPLAY TESTS
leads to a series of service tests for the display.
DO BOTH FWD + REV
activates both forward and reverse measurements of
selected calibration standards.
DO BOTH FWD THRUS
activates both forward measurements (reflection and
transmission) of the thru standard from the selective
enhanced response calibration menus.
DO BOTH REV THRUS
activates both reverse measurements of the thru standard
S22/S12 from the S11/S21 selective enhanced response
calibration menus. (ES only).
DO SEQUENCE
has two functions:
• It shows the current sequences in memory. To run a
sequence, press the softkey next to the desired
sequence title.
• When entered into a sequence, this command performs
a one-way jump to the sequence residing in the
specified sequence position (SEQUENCE 1 through 6).
DO SEQUENCE jumps to a softkey position, not to a
specific sequence title. Whatever sequence is in the
selected softkey position will run when the
DO SEQUENCE command is executed. This command
prompts the operator to select a destination sequence
position.
5-18
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
DONE 1-PORT CAL
finishes one-port calibration (after all standards are
measured) and turns error correction on.
DONE 2-PORT CAL
finishes two-port calibration (after all standards are
measured) and turns error correction on (ES only).
DONE FWD ENH RESP.
finishes the transmission portion of the enhanced response
calibration.
DONE LOADS
finishes all the load standards when the cal kit defines
more than one load standard.
DONE OPENS
finishes all the open standards when the cal kit defines
more than one open standard.
DONE SHORTS
finishes all the short standards when the cal kit defines
more than one short standard.
DONE RESP ISOL'N CAL
finishes response and isolation calibration (after all
standards are measured) and turns error correction on.
DONE REV ENH RESP.
finishes the transmission portion of the enhanced response
calibration. (ES only)
DONE SEQ MODIFY
terminates the sequencing edit mode.
DONE TRL/LRM
finishes TRL/LRM two-port calibration (after all
standards are measured) and turns error correction on.
DOWN CONVERTER
sets the analyzer's source higher than the analyzer's
receiver for making measurements in frequency offset
mode.
DUAL CH on OFF
toggles between the display of both measurement channels
or the active channel only. This is used in conjunction with
SPLIT DISP 1X 2X 4X in the display
DUAL|QUAD SETUP menu to display multiple
channels. With SPLIT DISP 1X the two traces are
overlaid on a single graticule.
DUAL|QUAD SETUP
activates a sub-menu of Display , which allows you to
enable the auxiliary channels and configure
multiple-channel displays.
DUPLICATE SEQUENCE
duplicates a sequence currently in memory into a different
softkey position. Duplicating a sequence is
straightforward. Follow the prompts on the analyzer
screen. This command does not affect the original
sequence.
5-19
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
EACH SWEEP
Power meter calibration occurs on each sweep. Each
measurement point is measured by the power meter,
which provides the analyzer with the actual power
reading. The analyzer corrects the power level at that
point. The number of measurement/correction iterations
performed on each point is determined by the
NUMBER OF READINGS softkey. This measurement
mode sweeps slowly, especially when the measured power
is low. Low power levels require more time for the power
meter to settle. The power meter correction table in
memory is updated after each sweep. This table can be
read or changed via GPIB.
ECal MENU
provides access to the calibration menu for ECal correction
routines and other menu choices that pertain to ECal
operation.
ECal SERVICE
provides access to the service menu for ECal. In this menu
you can check the operation of the ECal module.
ECal STD [CONF]
is located in the ECal service menu. This softkey allows
you to check ECal module parameters. The choices are:
CONF (confidence state), THRU, ISOL, S11 REFL, and
S22 REFL.
EDIT LIMIT LINE
displays a table of limit segments on the LCD,
superimposed on the trace. The edit limits menu is
presented so that limits can be defined or changed. It is
not necessary for limit lines or limit testing to be on while
limits are defined.
EDIT LIST
presents the edit list menu. This is used in conjunction
with the edit subsweep menu to define or modify the
frequency sweep list. The list frequency sweep mode is
selected with the LIST FREQ softkey described below.
EDIT RIPL LIMIT
selects the menu used to edit the ripple limits. The edit
ripple limits menu allows you to add, change, or delete
ripple limits for the ripple test.
ELECTRICAL DELAY
adjusts the electrical delay to balance the phase of the
DUT. It simulates a variable length loss-less transmission
line, which can be added to or removed from a receiver
input to compensate for interconnecting cables, etc. This
function is similar to the mechanical or analog “line
stretchers” of other network analyzers. Delay is annotated
in units of time with secondary labeling in distance for the
current velocity factor.
EMIT BEEP
causes the instrument to beep once.
END OF LABEL
terminates the HP-GL "LB" command.
5-20
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
END SWEEP HIGH PULSE
sets the TTL output on TEST SEQ BNC or the test set
interconnect to normally high with a 10 microseconds
pulse high at the end of each sweep.
END SWEEP LOW PULSE
sets the TTL output on TEST SEQ BNC or the test set
interconnect to normally low with a 10 µs pulse low at the
end of each sweep.
ENHANCED RESPONSE
provides access to the series of menus used to perform an
enhanced response calibration.
ENH. REFL. on OFF
selects the enhanced reflection calibration. This
calibration improves the response of an enhanced response
calibration.
NOTE
Use enhanced reflection only on a bilateral device. A bilateral device has
similar forward and reverse transmission characteristics. Examples of
bilateral devices are passive devices (filters, attenuators, and switches). Most
active devices (amplifiers) and some passive devices (isolators and
circulators) are not bilateral. If this calibration is used for a non-bilateral
device, errors may occur in the resulting measurement.
ENTRY Off
turns the active entry off. This also removes error and
warning messages.
ERASE TITLE
deletes the entire title.
EXECUTE TEST
runs the selected service test.
EXT SOURCE AUTO
selects the auto external source mode.
EXT SOURCE MANUAL
selects the manual external source mode.
EXT TRIG ON POINT
is similar to the trigger on sweep, but triggers each data
point in a sweep.
EXT TRIG ON SWEEP
is used when the sweep is triggered on an externally
generated signal connected to the rear panel EXT
TRIGGER input. The sweep is started with a high to low
transition of a TTL signal. If this key is pressed when no
external trigger signal is connected, the notation “Ext” is
displayed at the left side of the display to indicate that the
analyzer is waiting for a trigger. When a trigger signal is
connected, the “Ext” notation is replaced by the sweep
speed indicator either in the status notation area or on the
trace. External trigger mode is allowed in every sweep
mode.
EXTENSION INPUT A
Use this feature to add electrical delay (in seconds) to
extend the reference plane at input A to the end of the
cable. This is used for any input measurements including
S-parameters.
5-21
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
EXTENSION INPUT B
adds electrical delay to the input B reference plane for any
B input measurements including S-parameters.
EXTENSION PORT 1
extends the reference plane for measurements of S11, S21,
and S12.
EXTENSION PORT 2
extends the reference plane for measurements of S22, S12,
and S21.
EXTENSIONS on OFF
toggles the reference plane extension mode. When this
function is on, all extensions defined above are enabled;
when off, none of the extensions are enabled.
EXTERNAL DISK
selects an (optional) external disk drive for
SAVE/RECALL.
EXTERNAL TESTS
leads to a series of service tests.
FILETITLE FILE0
appears during sequence modification, when external disk
is selected. FILE0 is the default name. A new name can be
entered when you save the state to disk.
FILETYPE: GRAPHIC
saves the display to the disk drive as a graphic file when
SAVE FILE pressed. The format of the graphic file is
determined by the GRAPH FMT [ ] selection.
FILETYPE: TEXT
saves the display to the disk drive as a text file
when SAVE FILE is pressed. The form of the text file is
determined by the TEXT FMT [ ] selection.
FILE NAME
supplies a name for the saved state and or data file. Brings
up the TITLE FILE MENU.
FILE UTILITIES
provides access to the file utilities menu.
FIXED
defines the load in a calibration kit as a fixed (not sliding)
load.
FIXED MKR AUX VALUE
is used only with a polar or Smith format. It changes the
auxiliary response value of the fixed marker. This is the
second part of a complex data pair, and applies to a
magnitude/phase marker, a real/imaginary marker, an
R+jX marker, or a G+jB marker. Fixed marker auxiliary
response values are always uncoupled in the two channels.
To read absolute active marker auxiliary values following
a MKR ZERO operation, the auxiliary value can be reset
to zero.
FIXED MKR POSITION
5-22
leads to the fixed marker menu, where the stimulus and
response values for a fixed reference marker can be set
arbitrarily.
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
FIXED MKR STIMULUS
changes the stimulus value of the fixed marker. Fixed
marker stimulus values can be different for the two
channels if the channel markers are uncoupled using the
marker mode menu. To read absolute active marker
stimulus values following a MKR ZERO operation, the
stimulus value can be reset to zero.
FIXED MKR VALUE
changes the response value of the fixed marker. In a
Cartesian format this is the y-axis value. In a polar or
Smith chart format with a magnitude/phase marker, a
real/imaginary marker, an R+jX marker, or a G+jB
marker, this applies to the first part of the complex data
pair. Fixed marker response values are always uncoupled
in the two channels.
To read absolute active marker response values following
a MKR ZERO operation, the response value can be reset
to zero.
FLAT LINE
defines a flat limit line segment whose value is constant
with frequency or other stimulus value. This line is
continuous to the next stimulus value, but is not joined to
a segment with a different limit value. If a flat line
segment is the final segment it terminates at the stop
stimulus. A flat line segment is indicated as FL on the
table of limits.
FORM FEED
puts a form feed command into the display title.
Format
presents a menu used to select the display format for the
data. Various rectangular and polar formats are available
for display of magnitude, phase, impedance, group delay,
real data, and SWR.
FORMAT ARY on OFF
specifies whether or not to store the formatted data on
disk with the instrument state.
FORMAT DISK
brings up a menu for formatting a LIF or DOS disk.
FORMAT: DOS
causes subsequent disk initialization to use the DOS disk
format.
FORMAT: LIF
causes subsequent disk initialization to use the LIF disk
format. FORMAT: LIF is the default setting.
FORMAT EXT DISK
initializes media in external drive, and formats the disk
using the selected (DOS or LIF) format.
FORMAT INT DISK
initializes media in internal drive, and formats the disk
using the selected (DOS or LIF) format.
FORMAT INT MEMORY
clears all internal save registers and associated cal data
and memory traces.
5-23
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
FORWARD: OPEN
a calibration standard type.
FREQ OFFS MENU
leads to the frequency offset menu (Option 089 only).
FREQ OFFS on OFF
switches the frequency offset mode on and off.
FREQUENCY
specifies the frequency of a calibration factor or loss value
in the power meter cal loss/sensor lists.
FREQUENCY BAND
selects an existing frequency band to be reviewed, edited,
or deleted. The maximum number of frequency bands is 12
(numbered 1 to 12).
FREQUENCY BLANK
blanks the displayed frequency notation for security
purposes. Frequency labels cannot be restored except by
instrument preset or turning the power off and then on.
FREQUENCY: CW
sets the LO frequency to CW mode for frequency offset.
FREQUENCY: SWEEP
sets the LO frequency to sweep mode for frequency offset.
FULL 2-PORT
provides access to the series of menus used to perform a
complete calibration for measurement of all four
S-parameters of a two-port device. This is the most
accurate calibration for measurements of two-port devices.
(ES only)
FWD ISOL'N
measures the forward isolation of the calibration
standard.
FWD MATCH (Label Class)
lets you enter a label for the forward match class. The
label appears during a calibration that uses this class.
FWD MATCH (Specify Class) specifies which standards are in the forward match class
in the calibration kit.
FWD MATCH THRU
measures the forward match using a thru standard.
FWD TRANS (Label Class)
lets you enter a label for the forward transmission class.
The label appears during a calibration that uses this class.
FWD TRANS (Specify Class)
specifies which standards are in the forward transmission
class in the calibration kit.
FWD TRANS THRU
measures the forward transmission frequency response in
a two-port calibration.
G+jB MKR
displays the complex admittance values of the active
marker in rectangular form. The active marker values are
displayed in terms of conductance (in Siemens),
susceptance, and equivalent capacitance or inductance.
Siemens are the international units of admittance, and are
equivalent to mhos (the inverse of Ωs). The Smith chart
graticule is changed to admittance form.
G/n
5-24
giga/nano (109 / 10−9). Used to terminate numeric entries.
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
GATE on OFF
(Option 010 only) turns gating on or off in time domain
mode.
GATE: CENTER
(Option 010 only) allows you to specify the time at the
center of the gate.
GATE: SPAN
(Option 010 only) allows you to specify the gate periods.
GATE: START
(Option 010 only) allows you to specify the starting time of
the gate.
GATE: STOP
(Option 010 only) allows you to specify the stopping time of
the gate.
GATE SHAPE
(Option 010 only) leads to the gate shape menu.
GATE SHAPE MAXIMUM
(Option 010 only) selects the widest time domain gate with
the smallest passband ripple.
GATE SHAPE MINIMUM
(Option 010 only) selects the narrowest time domain gate
with the largest passband ripple.
GATE SHAPE NORMAL
(Option 010 only) selects an intermediate time domain
gate.
GATE SHAPE WIDE
(Option 010 only) selects an intermediate time domain
gate.
GET SEQ TITLES
copies the sequence titles currently in memory into the six
softkey positions.
GOSUB SEQUENCE
calls sub-routines in sequencing.
GPIB DIAG on off
toggles the GPIB diagnostic feature (debug mode). This
mode should only be used the first time a program is
written: if a program has already been debugged, it is
unnecessary.
When diagnostics are on, the analyzer scrolls a history of
incoming GPIB commands across the display in the title
line. Nonprintable characters are represented as pi. If a
syntax error is received, the commands halt and a pointer
wedge indicates the misunderstood character. For
information on clearing a syntax error, refer to the
programmer's guide.
GRAPH FMT [ ]
sets the format of the graphic file when
FILETYPE: GRAPHIC is selected. The only graphic
selection currently available is the JPEG format.
GRAPHICS on OFF
specifies whether or not to store display graphics on disk
with the instrument state.
GRATICULE [ ]
brings up the graticule print color definition menu. The
graticule default print color is cyan.
5-25
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
GRATICULE
selects the display graticule for color modification.
HARMONIC MEAS
(Option 002 only) leads to the harmonics menu. Measured
harmonics cannot exceed the frequency range of the
analyzer receiver.
HARMONIC OFF
(Option 002 only) turns off the harmonic measurement
mode.
HARMONIC SECOND
(Option 002 only) selects measurement of the second
harmonic.
HARMONIC THIRD
(Option 002 only) selects measurement of the third
harmonic.
HELP ADAPT REMOVAL
provides an on-line quick reference guide to using the
adapter removal technique.
HOLD
freezes the data trace on the display, and the analyzer
stops sweeping and taking data. The notation “Hld” is
displayed at the left of the graticule. If the * indicator is on
at the left side of the display, trigger a new sweep with
SINGLE .
IF BW [ ]
is used to select the bandwidth value for IF bandwidth
reduction. Allowed values (in Hz) are 6000, 3700, 3000,
1000, 300, 100, 30, and 10. Any other value will default to
the closest allowed value. A narrow bandwidth slows the
sweep speed but provides better signal-to-noise ratio. The
selected bandwidth value is shown in brackets in the
softkey label.
IF LIMIT TEST FAIL
jumps to one of the six sequence positions (SEQUENCE 1
through 6) if the limit test fails. This command executes
any sequence residing in the selected position. Sequences
may jump to themselves as well as to any of the other
sequences in memory. When this softkey is pressed, the
analyzer presents a softkey menu showing the six
sequence positions and the titles of the sequences located
in them. Choose the destination sequence to be called if
the limit test fails.
IF LIMIT TEST PASS
jumps to one of the six sequence positions (SEQUENCE 1
through 6) if the limit test passes. This command executes
any sequence residing in the selected position. Sequences
may jump to themselves as well as to any of the other
sequences in memory. When this softkey is pressed, the
analyzer presents a softkey menu showing the six
sequence positions, and the titles of the sequences located
in them. Choose the sequence to be called if the limit test
passes (destination sequence).
5-26
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
IF LOOP COUNTER = 0
prompts the user to select a destination sequence position
(SEQUENCE 1 through 6). When the value of the loop
counter reaches zero, the sequence in the specified position
will run.
IF LOOP < > COUNTER 0
prompts the user to select a destination sequence position
(SEQUENCE 1 through 6). When the value of the loop
counter is no longer zero, the sequence in the specified
position will run.
IMAGINARY
displays only the imaginary (reactive) portion of the
measured data on a Cartesian format. This format is
similar to the real format except that reactance data is
displayed on the trace instead of impedance data.
INCR LOOP COUNTER
increments the value of the loop counter by 1.
INPUT PORTS
accesses a menu that allows you to measure the R, A, and
B channels and their ratios.
INSTRUMENT MODE
presents the instrument mode menu. This provides access
to the primary modes of operation (analyzer modes).
INTENSITY
sets the LCD intensity as a percent of the brightest
setting. The factory-set default value is stored in
non-volatile memory.
INTERNAL TESTS
leads to a series of service tests.
INTERNAL DISK
selects the analyzer internal disk for the storage device.
INTERNAL MEMORY
selects internal non-volatile memory as the storage
medium for subsequent save and recall activity.
INTERPOL on OFF
turns interpolated error correction on or off. The
interpolated error correction feature allows the operator to
calibrate the system, then select a subset of the frequency
range or a different number of points. Interpolated error
correction functions in linear frequency, power sweep and
CW time modes. When using the analyzer in linear sweep,
it is recommended that the original calibration be
performed with at least 67 points per 1 GHz of frequency
span.
ISOLATION
leads to the isolation menu.
ISOLATION AVERAGES
allows the number of isolation averages taken in the ECal
correction to be set manually. Use the number keypad to
set the number of averages. The number of averages can
be set from 1 to 999. The default number of averages is 10.
ISOLATION DONE
returns to the two-port cal menu.
ISOL'N STD
measures the isolation of the device connected to the test
port.
5-27
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
k/m
kilo/milli (103 / 10−3)
KIT DONE (MODIFIED)
terminates the cal kit modification process, after all
standards are defined and all classes are specified. Be sure
to save the kit with the SAVE USER KIT softkey, if it is to
be used later.
LABEL CLASS
leads to the label class menu, to give the class a
meaningful label for future reference during calibration.
LABEL CLASS DONE
finishes the label class function and returns to the modify
cal kit menu.
LABEL KIT
leads to a menu for constructing a label for the
user-modified cal kit. If a label is supplied, it will appear
as one of the five softkey choices in the select cal kit menu.
The approach is similar to defining a display title, except
that the kit label is limited to ten characters.
LABEL STD
The function is similar to defining a display title, except
that the label is limited to ten characters.
LEFT LOWER
draws a quarter-page plot in the lower left quadrant of the
page.
LEFT UPPER
draws a quarter-page plot in the upper left quadrant of the
page.
LIMIT LINE
selects the standard limit line choice. This selection leads
to a series of menus used to define limits or specifications
with which to compare a test device. Refer to “Limit Line
Operation” in the “Operating Concepts” chapter of the
user’s guide and the limit line testing section of the
“Making Measurements” chapter of the user’s guide.
LIMIT LINE OFFSETS
leads to the offset limits menu, which is used to offset the
complete limit set in either stimulus or amplitude value.
LIMIT LINE on OFF
turns limit lines on or off. To define limits, use the
EDIT LIMIT LINE softkey described below. If limits have
been defined and limit lines are turned on, the limit lines
are displayed on the LCD for visual comparison of the
measured data in all Cartesian formats.
If limit lines are on, they are plotted with the data on a
plot, and saved in memory with an instrument state. In a
listing of values from the copy menu with limit lines on,
the upper limit and lower limit are listed together with the
pass or fail margin, as long as other listed data allows
sufficient space.
LIMIT MENU
5-28
accesses the menu that allows you to set up the three limit
line types: standard limit lines, ripple limit lines, and
bandwidth limit lines.
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
LIMIT TEST on OFF
turns limit testing on or off. When limit testing is on, the
data is compared with the defined limits at each measured
point. Limit tests occur at the end of each sweep,
whenever the data is updated, when formatted data is
changed, and when limit testing is first turned on.
Limit testing is available for both magnitude and phase
values in Cartesian formats. In polar and Smith chart
formats, the value tested depends on the marker mode and
is the magnitude or the first value in a complex pair. The
message "NO LIMIT LINES DISPLAYED" is displayed in
polar and Smith chart formats if limit lines are turned on.
Five indications of pass or fail status are provided when
limit testing is on. A PASS or FAIL message is displayed
at the right of the LCD. The trace vector leading to any
measured point that is out of limits is set to red at the end
of every limit test, both on a displayed plot and a hard
copy plot. The limit fail beeper sounds if it is turned on. In
a listing of values using the copy menu, an asterisk * is
shown next to any measured point that is out of limits. A
bit is set in the GPIB status byte.
LIMIT TEST RESULT
puts the result of a limit test into the display title.
LIMIT TYPE
leads to the limit type menu, where one of three segment
types can be selected: sloping line, flat line, or single point.
LIN FREQ
activates a linear frequency sweep displayed on a
standard graticule with ten equal horizontal divisions.
This is the default preset sweep type.
LIN MAG
displays the linear magnitude format. This is a Cartesian
format used for unitless measurements such as reflection
coefficient magnitude ρ or transmission coefficient
magnitude τ, and for linear measurement units. It is used
for display of conversion parameters and time domain
transform data.
LIN MKR
displays a readout of the linear magnitude and the phase
of the active marker. Marker magnitude values are
expressed in units and phase is expressed in degrees.
LINE/MATCH
provides access to the Line/Match Menu for TRL/LRM
calibration.
LINE TYPE DATA
selects the line type for the data trace plot. The default
line type is 7, which is a solid unbroken line.
LINE TYPE MEMORY
selects the line type for the memory trace plot. The default
line type is 7.
5-29
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
LIST
provides a tabular listing of all the measured data points
and their current values, together with limit information if
it is turned on. At the same time, the screen menu is
presented, to enable hard copy listings and access new
pages of the table. 30 lines of data are listed on each page,
and the number of pages is determined by the number of
measurement points specified in the stimulus menu.
LIST FREQ [SWEPT]
or [STEPPED]
provides two user-definable arbitrary frequency list
modes. This list is defined and modified using the edit list
menu and the edit subsweep menu. Up to 30 frequency
subsweeps (called “segments”) of several different types
can be specified, for a maximum total of 1601 points. One
list is common to both channels. Once a frequency list has
been defined and a measurement calibration performed on
the full frequency list, one or all of the frequency segments
can be measured and displayed without loss of calibration.
For more information on the different list frequency sweep
modes, refer to “Sweep Types” in the “Operating Concepts”
chapter of the user’s guide.
LIST IF BW on OFF
enables or disables the ability to set independent IF
bandwidths for each segment in a swept list measurement.
LIST POWER on OFF
enables or disables the ability to set independent power
levels for each segment in a swept list measurement.
When on, sets power range mode to manual to set a range
for the power values. (The range can be chosen using the
PWR RANGE key.) The power values can be entered
using the SEGMENT POWER key. If ports are uncoupled,
the power can be set independently for each port.
When off, the SEGMENT POWER key will not function
and the power column in the swept list table will display
asterisks. In this case, the power is set by the normal test
port power value.
LIST TYPE [SWEPT]
selects either stepped or swept list mode. For in-depth
information on swept list mode, refer to “Swept List
Frequency Sweep (Hz)” in the “Operating Concepts”
chapter of the user’s guide.
LN/MATCH 1
measures the TRL/LRM line or match standard for
PORT 1.
LN/MATCH 2
measures the TRL/LRM line or match standard for
PORT 2.
LO CONTROL on OFF
turns the LO control mode on and off for frequency offset.
5-30
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
LO MENU
leads to the LO menu. Allows you to configure the external
source for frequency offset.
LO SOURCE ADDRESS
shows the GPIB address of the LO source.
LOAD
defines the standard type as a load (termination). Loads
are assigned a terminal impedance equal to the system
characteristic impedance Z0, but delay and loss offsets
may still be added. If the load impedance is not Z0, use the
arbitrary impedance standard definition.
LOAD NO OFFSET
initiates measurement of a calibration standard load
without offset.
LOAD OFFSET
initiates measurement of a calibration standard load with
offset.
LOAD SEQ FROM DISK
presents the load sequence from disk menu. Select the
desired sequence and the analyzer will load it from disk.
Local
This key is used to return the analyzer to local (front
panel) operation from remote (computer controlled)
operation. This key will also abort a test sequence or
hardcopy print/plot. In this local mode, with a controller
still connected on GPIB, the analyzer can be operated
manually (locally) from the front panel. This is the only
front panel key that is not disabled when the analyzer is
remotely controlled over GPIB by a computer. The
exception to this is when local lockout is in effect: this is a
remote command that disables the Local key, making it
difficult to interfere with the analyzer while it is under
computer control.
LOG FREQ
activates a logarithmic frequency sweep mode. The source
is stepped in logarithmic increments and the data is
displayed on a logarithmic graticule. This is slower than a
continuous sweep with the same number of points, and the
entered sweep time may therefore be changed
automatically. For frequency spans of less than two
octaves, the sweep type automatically reverts to linear
sweep.
LOG MAG
displays the log magnitude format. This is the standard
Cartesian format used to display magnitude-only
measurements of insertion loss, return loss, or absolute
power in dB versus frequency.
5-31
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
LOG MKR
displays the logarithmic magnitude value and the phase of
the active marker in Polar or Smith chart format.
Magnitude values are expressed in dB and phase in
degrees. This is useful as a fast method of obtaining a
reading of the log magnitude value without changing to
log magnitude format.
LOOP COUNTER
displays the current value of the loop counter and allows
you to change the value of the loop counter. Enter any
number from 0 to 32767 and terminate with the x1 key.
The default value of the counter is zero. This command
should be placed in a sequence that is separate from the
measurement sequence. For this reason: the measurement
sequence containing a loop decision command must call
itself in order to function. The LOOP COUNTER
command must be in a separate sequence or the counter
value would always be reset to the initial value.
LOOP COUNTER
(Sequence Filenaming)
inserts the string “[LOOP]” into the file name.
LOSS
accepts a power loss value for a segment in the power
meter cal power loss list. This value, for example, could be
the difference (in dB) between the coupled arm and
through arm of a directional coupler.
LOSS/SENSR LISTS
presents the power loss/sensor lists menu. This menu
performs two functions:
• Corrects coupled-arm power loss when a directional
coupler is used to sample the RF output.
• Allows calibration factor data to be entered for one or
two power sensors.
Each function provides up to 12 separate frequency points,
called segments, at which the user may enter a different
power loss or calibration factor. The instrument
interpolates between the selected points. Two power
sensor lists are provided because no single power sensor
can cover the frequency range of the network analyzer.
LOW PASS IMPULSE
(Option 010 only) sets the transform to low pass impulse
mode, which simulates the time domain response to an
impulse input.
LOW PASS STEP
(Option 010 only) sets the transform to low pass step
mode, which simulates the time domain response to a step
input.
5-32
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
LOWER LIMIT
M/µ
sets the lower limit value for the start of the segment in a
limit line list. If an upper limit is specified, a lower limit
must also be defined. If no lower limit is required for a
particular measurement, force the lower limit value out of
range (for example −500 dB).
mega/micro (106 / 10−6)
MAN ’ L THRU on OFF
allows the insertion of a different thru during the ECal
correction routine. When turned ON, the routine will
pause for the insertion of the thru and display a menu that
contains a continue and abort softkey.
MANUAL TRG ON POINT
waits for a manual trigger for each point. Subsequent
pressing of this softkey triggers each measurement. The
annotation “man” will appear at the left side of the display
when the instrument is waiting for the trigger to occur.
This feature is useful in a test sequence when an external
device or instrument requires changes at each point.
Marker
displays an active marker on the screen and provides
access to a series of menus to control from one to five
display markers for each channel. Markers provide
numerical readout of measured values at any point of the
trace.
The menus accessed from the Marker key provide several
basic marker operations. These include special marker
modes for different display formats, and a marker delta
mode that displays marker values relative to a specified
value or another marker.
MARKER → AMP. OFS.
uses the active marker to set the amplitude offset for the
limit lines. Move the marker to the desired middle value of
the limits and press this softkey. The limits are then
moved so that they are centered an equal amount above
and below the marker at that stimulus value.
MARKER → CENTER
changes the stimulus center value to the stimulus value of
the active marker, and centers the new span about that
value.
MARKER → CW
sets the CW frequency of the analyzer to the frequency of
the active marker. This feature is useful in automated
compression measurements. Test sequences allow the
instrument to automatically find a maximum or minimum
point on a response trace. The MARKER → CW
command sets the instrument to the CW frequency of the
active marker. When power sweep in engaged, the CW
frequency will already be selected.
5-33
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
MARKER → DELAY
adjusts the electrical delay to balance the phase of the
DUT. This is performed automatically, regardless of the
format and the measurement being made. Enough line
length is added to or subtracted from the receiver input to
compensate for the phase slope at the active marker
position. This effectively flattens the phase trace around
the active marker, and can be used to measure electrical
length or deviation from linear phase. Additional electrical
delay adjustments are required on DUTs without constant
group delay over the measured frequency span. Since this
feature adds phase to a variation in phase versus
frequency, it is applicable only for ratioed inputs.
MARKER → MIDDLE
sets the midpoint for DELTA LIMITS using the active
marker to set the middle amplitude value of a limit
segment. Move the marker to the desired value or device
specification, and press this key to make that value the
midpoint of the delta limits. The limits are automatically
set an equal amount above and below the marker.
MARKER → REFERENCE
makes the reference value equal to the active marker's
response value, without changing the reference position.
In a polar or Smith chart format, the full scale value at the
outer circle is changed to the active marker response
value. This softkey also appears in the scale reference
menu.
MARKER → SPAN
changes the start and stop values of the stimulus span to
the values of the active marker and the delta reference
marker. If there is no reference marker, the message
"NO MARKER DELTA − SPAN NOT SET" is displayed.
MARKER → START
changes the stimulus start value to the stimulus value of
the active marker.
MARKER → STIMULUS
sets the starting stimulus value of a limit line segment
using the active marker. Move the marker to the desired
starting stimulus value before pressing this key, and the
marker stimulus value is entered as the segment start
value.
MARKER → STOP
changes the stimulus stop value to the stimulus value of
the active marker.
MARKER 1
turns on marker 1 and makes it the active marker. The
active marker appears on the display as ∇. The active
marker stimulus value is displayed in the active entry
area, together with the marker number. If there is a
marker turned on, and no other function is active, the
stimulus value of the active marker can be controlled with
the knob, the step keys, or the numeric keypad. The
marker response and stimulus values are displayed in the
upper right-hand corner of the screen.
5-34
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
MARKER 2
turns on marker 2 and makes it the active marker. If
another marker is present, that marker becomes inactive
and is represented on the display as ∆.
MARKER 3
turns on marker 3 and makes it the active marker.
MARKER 4
turns on marker 4 and makes it the active marker.
MARKER 5
turns on marker 5 and makes it the active marker.
MARKER all OFF
turns off all the markers and the delta reference marker,
as well as the tracking and bandwidth functions that are
accessed with the MKR FCTN key.
Marker Fctn
key activates a marker if one is not already active, and
provides access to additional marker functions. These can
be used to quickly change the measurement parameters,
to search the trace for specified information, and to
analyze the trace statistically.
MARKER MODE MENU
provides access to the marker mode menu, where several
marker modes can be selected including special markers
for polar and Smith chart formats.
Marker Search
allows user to turn tracking on, off and search for the
maximum, minimum, and target points on the trace.
MARKERS: CONTINUOUS
located under the Marker key, interpolates between
measured points to allow the markers to be placed at any
point on the trace. Displayed marker values are also
interpolated. This is the default marker mode.
MARKERS: COUPLED
couples the marker stimulus values for the two display
channels. Even if the stimulus is uncoupled and two sets
of stimulus values are shown, the markers track the same
stimulus values on each channel as long as they are within
the displayed stimulus range.
MARKERS: DISCRETE
places markers only on measured trace points determined
by the stimulus settings.
MARKERS: UNCOUPLED
allows the marker stimulus values to be controlled
independently on each channel.
MAX
moves the active marker to the maximum point on the
trace.
MAXIMUM BANDWIDTH
sets the maximum bandwidth value of the bandwidth test
limits.
5-35
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
MAXIMUM FREQUENCY
is used to:
1) define the highest frequency at which a calibration kit
standard can be used during measurement calibration. In
waveguide, this is normally the upper cutoff frequency of
the standard.
or
2) set the maximum frequency of the selected frequency
band when setting up ripple test parameters.
MAXIMUM RIPPLE
sets the maximum ripple allowed of the selected frequency
band. The maximum allowable ripple is 100 dB.
Meas
key provides access to a series of softkey menus for
selecting the parameters or inputs to be measured.
MEASURE RESTART
aborts the sweep in progress, then restarts the
measurement. This can be used to update a measurement
following an adjustment of the device under test. When a
full two-port calibration is in use, the
MEASURE RESTART key will initiate another update of
both forward and reverse S-parameter data. This softkey
will also override the test set hold mode, which inhibits
continuous switching of either the test port transfer switch
or step attenuator. This softkey will override the test set
hold mode for one measurement.
If the analyzer is taking a number of groups, the sweep
counter is reset at 1. If averaging is on,
MEASURE RESTART resets the sweep-to-sweep
averaging and is effectively the same as
AVERAGING RESTART . If the sweep trigger is in
HOLD mode, MEASURE RESTART executes a single
sweep.
MEMORY
displays the trace memory for the active channel. This is
the only memory display mode where the smoothing and
gating of the memory trace can be changed. If no data has
been stored in memory for this channel, a warning
message is displayed.
MIDDLE VALUE
sets the midpoint for DELTA LIMITS . It uses the entry
controls to set a specified amplitude value vertically
centered between the limits.
MIN
moves the active marker to the minimum point on the
trace.
MINIMUM BANDWIDTH
sets the minimum bandwidth value of the bandwidth test
limits.
5-36
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
MINIMUM FREQUENCY
is used to:
1) define the lowest frequency at which a calibration kit
standard can be used during measurement calibration. In
waveguide, this must be the lower cutoff frequency of the
standard, so that the analyzer can calculate dispersive
effects correctly (see OFFSET DELAY ).
or
2) set the minimum frequency of the selected frequency
band when setting up ripple test parameters.
MKR SEARCH [ ]
leads to the marker search menu, which is used to search
the trace for a particular value or bandwidth.
MKR STATS on OFF
calculates and displays the mean, standard deviation, and
peak-to-peak values of the section of the displayed trace
between the active marker and the delta reference marker.
If there is no delta reference, the statistics are calculated
for the entire trace. A convenient use of this feature is to
find the peak-to-peak value of passband ripple without
searching separately for the maximum and minimum
values.
The statistics are absolute values: the delta marker here
serves to define the span. For polar and Smith chart
formats, the statistics are calculated using the first value
of the complex pair (magnitude, real part, resistance, or
conductance).
MKR ZERO
puts a fixed reference marker at the present active marker
position, and makes the fixed marker stimulus and
response values at that position equal to zero. All
subsequent stimulus and response values of the active
marker are then read out relative to the fixed marker. The
fixed marker is shown on the display as a small triangle ∆
(delta), smaller than the inactive marker triangles. The
softkey label changes from MKR ZERO to
MKR ZERO ∆REF = ∆ and the notation “∆REF = ∆” is
displayed at the top right corner of the graticule. Marker
zero is canceled by turning delta mode off in the delta
marker menu or turning all the markers off with the
ALL OFF softkey.
MODIFY [ ]
leads to the modify cal kit menu, where a default cal kit
can be user-modified.
MODIFY COLORS
present a menu for color modification of display elements.
Refer to the section on adjusting the display color in the
“Using Measurement Functions” chapter of the user’s
guide for information on modifying display elements.
5-37
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
MODULE A b
selects the module to be used in the ECal operation. Select
the module according to frequency range and connector
type of the DUT. In some cases the Module B selection will
not be used.
MODULE INFO
presents a text window that contains information about
the selected module.
MORE RANGES
provides access to more power ranges.
N 50Ω 85032B/E
selects the 85032B/E cal kit.
N 50Ω 85032F
selects the 85032F cal kit.
N 75Ω 85036
selects the 85036B/E cal kit.
N DB POINTS
sets the N dB point which is used to determine the
bandwidth test cutoff frequencies. Enter the number of
decibels below the peak of the bandpass that the filter is
specified.
NETWORK ANALYZER
sets the analyzer to network analyzer mode.
NEW SEQ/MODIFY SEQ
activates the sequence edit mode and presents the
new/modify sequence menu with a list of sequences that
can be created or modified.
NEWLINE
puts a new line command into the display title.
NEXT PAGE
steps forward through a tabular list of data page-by-page.
NUMBER OF GROUPS
triggers a user-specified number of sweeps, and returns to
the hold mode. This function can be used to override the
test set hold mode (indicated by the notation “tsH” at the
left of the screen). In this mode, the electro-mechanical
transfer switch (Option 007) and attenuator are not
protected against unwanted continuous switching. This
occurs in a full two-port calibration, in a measurement of
two different parameters that require power out from both
ports, or when the channels are uncoupled and a different
power level is set for each channel.
If averaging is on, the number of groups should be at least
equal to the averaging factor selected to allow
measurement of a fully averaged trace. Entering a number
of groups resets the averaging counter to 1.
NUMBER of POINTS
5-38
is used to select the number of data points per sweep to be
measured and displayed. Using fewer points allows a
faster sweep time but the displayed trace shows less
horizontal detail. Using more points gives greater data
density and improved trace resolution, but slows the
sweep and requires more memory for error correction or
saving instrument states.
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
The possible values that can be entered for number of
points are 3, 11, 26, 51, 101, 201, 401,801, and 1601. The
number of points can be different for the two channels if
the stimulus values are uncoupled.
In list frequency sweep, the number of points displayed is
the total number of frequency points for the defined list
(see “Sweep Types” in the “Operating Concepts” chapter of
the user’s guide).
NUMBER OF READINGS
determines the number of measurement/correction
iterations performed on each point in a power meter
calibration. This feature helps eliminate residual power
errors after the initial correction. The amount of residual
error is directly proportional to the magnitude of the
initial correction. The user should initially set the source
power so that it is approximately correct at the device
under test. If power uncertainty at the device under test is
expected to be greater than a few dB, it is recommended
that the number of readings be greater than 1.
OFFSET
selects the calibration standard load as being offset.
OFFSET DELAY
is used to specify the one-way electrical delay from the
measurement (reference) plane to the standard, in seconds
(s). (In a transmission standard, offset delay is the delay
from plane to plane.) Delay can be calculated from the
precise physical length of the offset, the permittivity
constant of the medium, and the speed of light.
OFFSET LOADS DONE
completes the selection in the Offset Load Menu.
OFFSET LOSS
is used to specify energy loss, due to skin effect, along a
one-way length of coax offset. The value of loss is entered
as Ωs/nanosecond (or Giga Ωs/second) at 1 GHz. (Such
losses are negligible in waveguide, so enter 0 as the loss
offset.)
OFFSET Z0
is used to specify the characteristic impedance of the coax
offset. (Note: This is not the impedance of the standard
itself.) (For waveguide, the offset impedance should always
be assigned a value equal to the system Z0.)
OMIT ISOLATION
is used to omit the isolation portion of the calibration.
OMIT ISOL ON off
is used to toggle the isolation portion of the calibration for
the ECal correction routine.
5-39
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
ONE-PATH 2-PORT
leads to the series of menus used to perform a
high-accuracy two-port calibration without an
S-parameter test set. This calibration procedure
effectively removes directivity, source match, load match,
isolation, reflection tracking, and transmission tracking
errors in one direction only. Isolation correction can be
omitted for measurements of devices with limited dynamic
range. (The device under test must be manually reversed
between sweeps to accomplish measurement of both input
and output responses.) The required standards are a
short, an open, a thru, and an impedance-matched load.
ONE SWEEP
This mode does not measure each sweep, but corrects each
point with the data currently in the power meter
correction table.
OP PARMS (MKRS etc)
provides a tabular listing on the analyzer display of the
key parameters for both channels. The screen menu is
presented to allow hard copy listings and access new pages
of the table. Four pages of information are supplied. These
pages list operating parameters, marker parameters, and
system parameters that relate to control of peripheral
devices rather than selection of measurement parameters.
OPEN
defines the standard type as an open, used for calibrating
reflection measurements. Opens are assigned a terminal
impedance of infinite Ωs, but delay and loss offsets may
still be added.
OPEN (F)
for cal kits with different models for male and female test
port standards, this selects the open model for a female
test port. Note that the sex of a calibration standard
always refers to the test port.
OPEN (M)
for cal kits with different models for male and female test
port standards, this selects the open model for a male test
port. Note that the sex of a calibration standard always
refers to the test port.
P MTR/GPIB TO TITLE
gets data from an GPIB device set to the address at which
the analyzer expects to find a power meter. The data is
stored in a title string. The analyzer must be in system
controller or pass control mode.
PARAMETER [S11]
is located in the ECal confidence and ECal service menus.
In ES models you can display the S11, S22, S21, or S12
ECal module factory response and the actual
measurement response. In ET models, you can display the
TRN or RFL responses.
PARALL IN BIT NUMBER
while creating a sequence, this softkey will insert a
command that selects the single bit (0 to 4) that a
sequence will be looking for from the GPIO bus.
5-40
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
PARALL IN IF BIT H
while creating a sequence, this softkey inserts a command
to jump to another sequence if the single input selected is
in a high state.
PARALL IN IF BIT L
while creating a sequence, this softkey inserts a command
to jump to another sequence if the single input selected is
in a low state.
PARALLEL
sets the printer or plotter port to parallel.
PARALLEL [COPY/GPIO]
toggles the parallel output port between the copy and
GPIO output modes.
PARALLEL OUT ALL
allows you to input a number (0 to 255) in base 10, and
outputs it to the bus as binary, when the parallel port is in
GPIO mode.
PAUSE
pauses the sequence so the operator can perform a needed
task, such as changing the DUT, changing the calibration
standard, or other similar task. Press
CONTINUE SEQUENCE when ready.
PAUSE TO SELECT
when editing a sequence, PAUSE TO SELECT appears
when you press DO SEQUENCE . When placed in a
sequence, it presents the menu of up to 6 available
sequences (softkeys containing non-empty sequences). If
the operator selects one of the sequences, that sequence is
executed. Any other key can be used to exit this mode.
This function is not executed if used during modify mode
and does nothing when operated manually. This softkey is
not visible on the display, and the function is not available,
unless programmed into analyzer memory.
PEN NUM DATA
selects the number of the pen to plot the data trace. The
default pen for channel 1 is pen number 2, and for channel
2 is pen number 3.
PEN NUM GRATICULE
selects the number of the pen to plot the graticule. The
default pen for channel 1 is pen number 1, and for channel
2 is pen number 1.
PEN NUM MARKER
selects the number of the pen to plot both the markers and
the marker values. The default pen for channel 1 is pen
number 7, and for channel 2 is pen number 7.
PEN NUM MEMORY
selects the number of the pen to plot the memory trace.
The default pen for channel 1 is pen number 5, and for
channel 2 is pen number 6.
PEN NUM TEXT
selects the number of the pen to plot the text. The default
pen for channel 1 is pen number 7, and for channel 2 is pen
number 7.
5-41
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
PHASE OFFSET
adds or subtracts a phase offset that is constant with
frequency (rather than linear). This is independent of
MARKER → DELAY and ELECTRICAL DELAY .
PHASE
(Option 010 only) displays a Cartesian format of the phase
portion of the data, measured in degrees. This format
displays the phase shift versus frequency.
PLOT
makes a hard copy plot of one page of the tabular listing
on the display, using a compatible HP plotter connected to
the analyzer through GPIB. This method is appropriate
when speed of output is not a critical factor.
PLOT DATA ON off
specifies whether the data trace is to be drawn (on) or not
drawn (off) on the plot.
PLOT GRAT ON off
specifies whether the graticule and the reference line are
to be drawn (on) or not drawn (off) on the plot. Turning
PLOT GRAT ON and all other elements off is a
convenient way to make preplotted grid forms. However,
when data is to be plotted on a preplotted form,
PLOT GRAT OFF should be selected.
PLOT MEM ON off
specifies whether the memory trace is to be drawn (on) or
not drawn (off) on the plot. Memory can only be plotted if it
is displayed (refer to the “Making Measurements” chapter
in the user’s guide).
PLOT MKR ON off
specifies whether the markers and marker values are to be
drawn (on) or not drawn (off) on the plot.
PLOT NAME PLOTFILE
supplies a name for the plot file generated by a PLOT to
disk. Brings up the TITLE FILE MENU.
PLOT SPEED [ ]
toggles between fast and slow speeds.
PLOT TEXT ON off
selects plotting of all displayed text except the marker
values, softkey labels, and display listings such as the
frequency list table or limit table. (Softkey labels can be
plotted under the control of an external controller. Refer to
the programmer’s guide.)
PLOTTER BAUD RATE
sets the serial port data transmission speed for plots.
PLOTTER FORM FEED
sends a page eject command to the plotter.
PLOTTER PORT
configures the port analyzer will use to communicate with
the plotter.
PLTR PORT: DISK
directs plots to the selected disk (internal or external).
PLTR PORT GPIB
directs plots to the GPIB port and sets the GPIB address
the analyzer will use to communicate with the plotter.
5-42
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
PLTR PORT PARALLEL
configures the analyzer for a plotter that has a parallel
(centronics) interface.
PLTR PORT SERIAL
configures the analyzer for a plotter that has a serial
(RS-232) interface.
PLTR TYPE [PLOTTER]
selects a pen plotter such as the HP 7440A, HP 7470A,
HP 7475A, or HP 7550B as the plotter type.
PLTR TYPE [HPGL PRT]
selects a PCL5 compatible printer, which supports
HP-GL/2, such as the LaserJet III or LaserJet 4 for a
monochrome plotter type, or the DeskJet 1200C for a color
plotter type.
POLAR
displays a polar format. Each point on the polar format
corresponds to a particular value of both magnitude and
phase. Quantities are read vectorally: the magnitude at
any point is determined by its displacement from the
center (which has zero value), and the phase by the angle
counterclockwise from the positive x-axis. Magnitude is
scaled in a linear fashion, with the value of the outer circle
usually set to a ratio value of 1. Since there is no frequency
axis, frequency information is read from the markers.
POLAR MKR MENU
leads to a menu of special markers for use with a polar
format.
PORT EXTENSIONS
goes to the reference plane menu, which is used to extend
the apparent location of the measurement reference plane
or input.
PORT POWER [COUPLED]
is used to set the same power levels at each port.
PORT POWER [UNCOUPLED] allows you to set different power levels at each port.
Power
makes power level the active function and sets the RF
output power level of the analyzer's internal source. The
analyzer will detect an input power overload at any of the
three receiver inputs. This is indicated with the message
“OVERLOAD ON INPUT (R, A, B).” If power meter cal is
on, cal power is the active entry.
POWER: FIXED
sets the external LO fixed power.
POWER RANGES
leads to the power ranges menu which allows the user to
select among 12 power ranges from −75 to −5 dBm.
POWER: SWEEP
sets the external LO power sweep.
POWER LOSS
brings up the segment modify menu and segment edit
(power loss) menu explained in the following pages. This
softkey is intended for use when the power output is being
sampled by a directional coupler or power splitter. In the
case of the directional coupler, enter the power loss caused
by the coupled arm.
5-43
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
This feature may be used to compensate for attenuation
non-linearities in either a directional coupler or a power
splitter. Up to 12 segments may be entered, each with a
different frequency and power loss value.
POWER MTR
toggles between 436A or 438A/437 . These power meters
are GPIB compatible with the analyzer. The model
number in the softkey label must match the power meter
to be used.
POWER SWEEP
turns on a power sweep mode that is used to characterize
power-sensitive circuits. In this mode, power is swept at a
single frequency, from a start power value to a stop power
value, selected using the Start and Stop keys and the
entry block. This feature is convenient for such
measurements as gain compression or AGC (automatic
gain control) slope. To set the frequency of the power
sweep, use CW FREQ in the stimulus menu. Refer to the
user's guide for an example of a gain compression
measurement.
Note that power range switching is not allowed in power
sweep mode.
In power sweep, the entered sweep time may be
automatically changed if it is less than the minimum
required for the current configuration (number of points,
IF bandwidth, averaging, etc.).
Preset
presents a menu to select a factory or user defined preset
state.
PRESET: FACTORY
is used to select the preset conditions defined by the
factory.
PRESET: USER
is used to select a preset condition defined by the user.
This is done by saving a state in a register under
Save/Recall and naming the register UPRESET. When
PRESET: USER is underlined, the Preset key will
bring up the state of the UPRESET register.
PRESET SETTINGS
selects a menu to set the preset states of some items, such
as calibration interpolation and step sweep mode.
PREVIOUS PAGE
steps backward through a tabular list of data
page-by-page.
PREVIOUS RANGES
steps back to the previous range menus.
PRINT ALL COLOR
when displaying list values, prints the entire list in color.
When displaying operating parameters, prints all but the
last page in color. The data is sent to the printer as ASCII
text rather than as raster graphics, which causes the
printout to be faster.
5-44
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
PRINT ALL MONOCHROME when displaying list values, prints the entire list in
monochrome. When displaying operating parameters,
prints all but the last page in monochrome. The data is
sent to the printer as ASCII text rather than as raster
graphics, which causes the printout to be faster.
PRINT: COLOR
sets the print command to default to a color printer. The
printer output is always in the analyzer default color
values. This command does not work with a black and
white printer.
PRINT COLOR
prints the displayed measurement results in color.
PRINT COLORS
is used to select the print colors menu.
PRINT: MONOCHROME
sets the print command to default to a black and white
printer.
PRINT MONOCHROME
prints the displayed measurement results in black and
white.
PRINT SEQUENCE
prints any sequence currently in memory to a compatible
printer.
PRINTER BAUD RATE
sets the serial port data transmission speed for prints.
PRINTER FORM FEED
sends a conditional form feed to the printer.
PRINTER PORT
configures the port the analyzer will use to communicate
with the printer.
PRNTR PORT GPIB
directs prints to the GPIB port and sets the GPIB address
the analyzer will use to communicate with the printer.
PRNTR PORT PARALLEL
configures the analyzer for a printer that has a parallel
(centronics) interface.
PRNTR PORT SERIAL
configures the analyzer for a printer that has a serial
(RS-232) interface.
PRNTR TYPE [DESKJET]
sets the printer type to the DeskJet series.
PRNTR TYPE [EPSON-P2]
sets the printer type to Epson compatible printers, which
support the Epson ESC/P2 printer control language.
PRNTR TYPE [LASERJET]
sets the printer type to the LaserJet series.
PRNTR TYPE [PAINTJET]
sets the printer type to the PaintJet.
PRNTR TYPE [THINKJET]
sets the printer type to the ThinkJet or QuietJet.
PWR LOSS on OFF
turns on or off power loss correction. Power loss correction
should be used when the power output is measured by a
directional coupler. Enter the power loss caused by the
coupled arm with the LOSS/SENSR LISTS softkey
submenus described below.
5-45
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
PWR RANGE AUTO man
toggles the power range mode between auto and manual.
Auto mode selects the power range based on the power
selected. Manual mode limits power entry to within the
±6 to −12 dB selected range.
PWRMTR CAL [ ]
leads to the power meter calibration menu which provides
two types of power meter calibration, continuous (each
sweep) and single-sample (one sweep).
PWRMTR CAL [OFF]
turns off power meter calibration, terminate a power
meter calibration sweep.
R
measures the absolute power amplitude at input R.
R+jX MKR
converts the active marker values into rectangular form.
The complex impedance values of the active marker are
displayed in terms of resistance, reactance, and equivalent
capacitance or inductance. This is the default Smith chart
marker.
NOTE
Each of the range softkeys will have different ranges dependent on the
analyzer model and options installed.
RANGE 0 [ ]
selects power range 0 when in manual power range.
RANGE 1 [ ]
selects power range 1 when in manual power range.
RANGE 2 [ ]
selects power range 2 when in manual power range.
RANGE 3 [ ]
selects power range 3 when in manual power range.
RANGE 4 [ ]
selects power range 4 when in manual power range.
RANGE 5 [ ]
selects power range 5 when in manual power range.
RANGE 6 [ ]
selects power range 6 when in manual power range.
RANGE 7 [ ]
selects power range 7 when in manual power range.
RANGE 8 [ ]
selects power range 8 when in manual power range.
RANGE 9 [ ]
selects power range 9 when in manual power range.
RANGE 10 [ ]
selects power range 10 when in manual power range.
RANGE 11 [ ]
selects power range 11 when in manual power range.
RAW ARRAY on OFF
specifies whether or not to store the raw data (ratioed and
averaged) on disk with the instrument state.
RAW OFFSET On Off
selects whether sampler and attenuator offsets are ON or
OFF. By selecting raw offsets OFF, a full two port error
correction can be performed without including the effects
of the offsets. It also saves substantial time at recalls and
during frequency changes. Raw offsets follow the channel
coupling. This softkey is used with "Take4" mode. Refer to
the examples in the programmer’s guide.
5-46
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
Re/Im MKR
when in the smith marker menu, Re/Im MKR displays
the values of the active marker on a Smith chart as a real
and imaginary pair. The complex data is separated into its
real part and imaginary part. The first marker value given
is the real part M cos θ, and the second value is the
imaginary part M sin θ, where M = magnitude.
When in the polar marker menu, Re/Im MKR displays
the values of the active marker as a real and imaginary
pair. The complex data is separated into its real part and
imaginary part. The first marker value given is the real
part M cos θ, and the second value is the imaginary part M
sin θ, where M = magnitude.
READ FILE TITLES
searches the directory of the disk for file names recognized
as belonging to an instrument state, and displays them in
the softkey labels. No more than five titles are displayed at
one time. If there are more than five, repeatedly pressing
this key causes the next five to be displayed. If there are
fewer than five, the remaining softkey labels are blanked.
READ SEQ FILE TITLS
is a disk file directory command. Pressing this softkey will
read the first six sequence titles and display them in the
softkey labels. These sequences can then be loaded into
internal memory.
If READ SEQ FILE TITLS is pressed again, the next six
sequence titles on the disk will be displayed. To read the
contents of the disk starting again with the first sequence:
remove the disk, reinsert it into the drive, and press
READ SEQ FILE TITLS .
REAL
displays only the real (resistive) portion of the measured
data on a Cartesian format. This is similar to the linear
magnitude format, but can show both positive and
negative values. It is primarily used for analyzing
responses in the time domain, and also to display an
auxiliary input voltage signal for service purposes.
RECALL CAL PORT 1
Press this key after selecting the file associated with port 1
error correction for adapter removal calibration.
RECALL CAL PORT 2
Press this key after selecting the file associated with port 2
error correction for adapter removal calibration.
RECALL COLORS
recalls the previously saved modified version of the color
set. This key appears only when a color set has been
saved.
RECALL KEYS
accesses two recall keys which allows you to set the recall
keys menu as the initial menu displayed when
Save/Recall is pressed or select specific registers to recall.
5-47
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
RECALL KEYS MENU
provides access to the recall keys menu where specific
registers can be recalled.
RECALL KEYS on OFF
presents the recall keys menu as the initial menu when
Save/Recall has been pressed.
RECALL REG1
recalls the instrument state saved in register 1.
RECALL REG2
recalls the instrument state saved in register 2.
RECALL REG3
recalls the instrument state saved in register 3.
RECALL REG4
recalls the instrument state saved in register 4.
RECALL REG5
recalls the instrument state saved in register 5.
RECALL REG6
recalls the instrument state saved in register 6.
RECALL REG7
recalls the instrument state saved in register 7.
RECALL STATE
is used in conjunction with sequencing, to return the
instrument to the known preset state without turning off
the sequencing function. This is not the same as pressing
the Preset key: no preset tests are run, and the GPIB
and sequencing activities are not changed.
RECEIVER CAL
provides access to the Receiver Cal Menu.
REF LINE
selects the display reference line for color modification.
REF LINE [ ]
selects the reference line for printer color modification.
REFERENCE POSITION
sets the position of the reference line on the graticule of a
Cartesian display, with 0 the bottom line of the graticule
and 10 the top line. It has no effect on a polar or Smith
display. The reference position is indicated with a small
triangle just outside the graticule, on the left side for
channel 1 and the right side for channel 2.
REFERENCE VALUE
changes the value of the reference line, moving the
measurement trace correspondingly. In polar and Smith
chart formats, the reference value is the same as the scale,
and is the value of the outer circle.
REFL: FWD S11 (A/R)
defines the measurement as S11, the complex reflection
coefficient (magnitude and phase) of the test device input.
REFL: REV S22 (B/R)
defines the measurement as S22, the complex reflection
coefficient (magnitude and phase) of the test device
output.
REFLECT AND LINE
measures the reflection and thru paths of the current
calibration standard.
REFLECTION
leads to the reflection calibration menu.
5-48
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
REFL STD [0]
is located in the ECal service menu. This allows you to
select different reflection standards in the ECal module.
The number of reflection standards varies with ECal
module type.
REFLECTION 1-PORT
leads to the reflection calibration menu (ET only). In the
ECal menu, this softkey performs the reflection 1-port
calibration.
REMOVE ADAPTER
completes the adapter removal procedure, removing the
effects of the adapter being used.
RENAME FILE
allows you to change the name of a file that has already
been saved.
RESET COLOR
resets the color being modified to the default color.
RESPONSE
• When in the specify class more menu, RESPONSE is
used to enter the standard numbers for a response
calibration. This calibration corrects for frequency
response in either reflection or transmission
measurements, depending on the parameter being
measured when a calibration is performed. (For default
kits, the standard is either the open or short for
reflection measurements, or the thru for transmission
measurements.)
• When in the response cal menu, RESPONSE leads to
the frequency response calibration. This is the simplest
and fastest accuracy enhancement procedure, but
should be used when extreme accuracy is not required.
It effectively removes the frequency response errors of
the test setup for reflection or transmission
measurements.
RESPONSE ISOL'N
• When in the specify class more menu,
RESPONSE ISOL'N is used to enter the standard
numbers for a response and isolation calibration. This
calibration corrects for frequency response and
directivity in reflection measurements, or frequency
response and isolation in transmission measurements.
• When in the response and isolation menu,
RESPONSE ISOL'N leads to the menus used to
perform a response and isolation measurement
calibration, for measurement of devices with wide
dynamic range. This procedure effectively removes the
same frequency response errors as the response
calibration. In addition, it effectively removes the
isolation (crosstalk) error in transmission
measurements or the directivity error in reflection
measurements. As well as the devices required for a
5-49
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
simple response calibration, an isolation standard is
required. The standard normally used to correct for
isolation is an impedance-matched load (usually 50 or
75 Ωs). Response and directivity calibration procedures
for reflection and transmission measurements are
provided in the following pages.
RESTORE DISPLAY
turns off the tabular listing and returns the measurement
display to the screen.
RESUME CAL SEQUENCE
eliminates the need to restart a calibration sequence that
was interrupted to access some other menu. This softkey
goes back to the point where the calibration sequence was
interrupted.
REV ISOL'N
measures the reverse isolation of the calibration standard
during an enhanced response cal.
REV ISOL'N ISOL'N STD
measures the reverse isolation of the calibration standard
during a full 2-port cal.
REV MATCH (Label Class)
lets you enter a label for the reverse match class. The label
appears during a calibration that uses this class.
REV MATCH (Specify Class) specifies which standards are in the reverse match class in
the calibration kit.
REV MATCH THRU
is used to enter the standard numbers for the reverse
match (thru) calibration. (For default kits, this is the
thru.)
REV TRANS (Label Class)
lets you enter a label for the reverse transmission class.
The label appears during a calibration that uses this class.
REV TRANS (Specify Class)
specifies which standards are in the reverse transmission
class in the calibration kit.
REV TRANS THRU
is used to enter the standard numbers for the reverse
transmission (thru) calibration. (For default kits, this is
the thru.)
RF > LO
adjusts the source frequency higher than the LO by the
amount of the LO (within the limits of the analyzer).
RF < LO
adjusts the source frequency lower than the LO by the
amount of the LO (within the limits of the analyzer).
RIGHT LOWER
draws a quarter-page plot in the lower right quadrant of
the page.
RIGHT UPPER
draws a quarter-page plot in the upper right quadrant of
the page.
RIPL LIMIT on OFF
displays lines that represent the ripple limits when the
ripple test is set to ON.
5-50
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
RIPL TEST on OFF
turns ripple testing on or off. When ripple testing is on, the
analyzer sets the lower ripple limit line at the lowest
amplitude point within the frequency band and sets the
upper limit line at the user-specified amplitude above. If
the trace data remains at or below the upper limit line,
that portion of the ripple test passes. If the trace data rises
above the upper limit line within the frequency band, the
test fails. Data within each frequency band is compared
with the defined ripple limit of the band. The ripple test
checks each frequency band using this method. A
maximum of 12 frequency bands can be tested on each
channel. These bands may overlap in frequency. If all of
the channel’s frequency bands pass the ripple test, the
analyzer displays a pass message.
If the test passed, a message is displayed in orange text in
the upper right portion of the LCD. An example of this
message is: RIPL1 PASS, where the “1” indicates the
channel where the ripple test is performed. If the ripple
test does not pass, a fail message is displayed in red text.
An example of this message is RIPL1 FAIL.
RIPL VALUE [ ]
displays the ripple value of the selected frequency band.
The ripple value can be displayed in two ways or turned
off. Selecting OFF removes the displayed ripple value from
the display. Selecting ABSOLUTE or MARGIN displays
the ripple value. The ripple value is preceded on the
display by an indicator of the selected band. For example,
when the ripple value is preceded by “B2”, this indicates
that the ripple value shown is for Band 2. The frequency
band indicator and ripple value are displayed in the same
color as the pass/fail message for the overall ripple test.
When ABSOLUTE is selected, the display shows the
absolute ripple of the data trace within the frequency
band.
When MARGIN is selected, the display shows the
difference between the maximum allowable ripple and the
absolute ripple value within the frequency band. When the
margin value is preceded by a plus sign (+), this indicates
that the ripple within the selected frequency band is
passing by the value shown. When the margin value is
preceded by a negative sign (−), this indicates that the
ripple within the selected band is failing by the value
shown.
RIPL VALUE BAND
selects a frequency band to display the ripple value. When
RIPL VALUE [ ] is set to the absolute or margin choices,
this softkey selects the ripple measurement for the
selected frequency band.
5-51
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
RIPPLE LIM LINES
selects ripple limit line trace on the display color
modification.
RIPPLE LIMIT
selects the ripple limit line choice. This selection leads to
menus used to define ripple limits or specifications with
which to compare a test device. Refer to the “Using Ripple
Limits to Test a Device” section in the “Making
Measurements” chapter of the user’s guide.
ROUND SECONDS
resets the seconds counter to zero in real-time clock.
SET CONF STANDARD
is located in the ECal confidence check menu. This softkey
activates and displays the ECal confidence state.
S PARAMETERS
presents the S-parameter menu, which is used to define
the input ports and test set direction for S-parameter
measurements.
S11 1-PORT
provides a measurement calibration for reflection-only.
Measurements of one-port devices or properly terminated
two-port devices, at port 1 of an S-parameter test set. (ES
only)
S11A
is used to enter the standard numbers for the first class
required for an S11 1-port calibration. (For default cal kits,
this is the open.)
S11B
is used to enter the standard numbers for the second class
required for an S11 1-port calibration. (For default cal kits,
this is the short.)
S11C
is used to enter the standard numbers for the third class
required for an S11 1-port calibration. (For default kits,
this is the load.)
S11 REFL SHORT
measures the short circuit TRL/LRM calibration data for
PORT 1.
S11/S21 ENH. RESP.
provides an S11 and S21 enhanced response calibration
(forward direction). Enhanced response generates a 1-port
cal for S11 and an improved calibration over the response
cal for S21 (ES only).
S22 1-PORT
provides a measurement calibration for reflection-only.
Measurements of one-port devices or properly terminated
two-port devices, at port 2 of an S-parameter test set. (ES
only)
S22/S12 ENH. RESP.
provides an S22 and S12 enhanced response calibration
(reverse direction). Enhanced response generates a 1-port
cal for S22 and an improved calibration over the response
cal for S12 (ES only).
5-52
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
S22A
is used to enter the standard numbers for the first class
required for an S22 1-port calibration. (For default cal kits,
this is the open.)
S22B
is used to enter the standard numbers for the second class
required for an S22 1-port calibration. (For default cal kits,
this is the short.)
S22C
is used to enter the standard numbers for the third class
required for an S22 1-port calibration. (For default kits,
this is the load.)
S22 REFL SHORT
measures the short circuit TRL/LRM calibration data for
PORT 2.
SAMPLR COR on OFF
selects whether sampler correction is on or off.
SAVE COLORS
saves the modified version of the color set.
SAVE FILE
saves the display information to the disk drive. The type of
information saved is dependent on the FILETYPE
selection. The FILETYPE selection can either be graphic
or text.
SAVE FILE FORMATS
accesses the save file menu which allows you to save the
display information to the disk drive as either graphic or
textual information.
SAVE USER KIT
stores the user-modified or user-defined kit into memory,
after it has been modified.
SAVE USING ASCII
selects ASCII format for data storage to disk.
SAVE USING BINARY
selects binary format for data storage.
Save/Recall
provides access to all the menus used for saving and
recalling instrument states in internal memory and for
storing to, or loading from the internal or external disk.
This includes the menus used to define titles for internal
registers and external disk files, to define the content of
disk files, to initialize disks for storage, and to clear data
from the registers or purge files from disk.
SCALE/DIV
changes the response value scale per division of the
displayed trace. In polar and Smith chart formats, this
refers to the full scale value at the outer circumference,
and is identical to reference value.
SCALE PLOT [ ]
toggles between two selections for plot scale, FULL and
GRAT.
5-53
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
SCALE PLOT [FULL]
is the normal scale selection for plotting on blank paper. It
includes space for all display annotations such as marker
values, stimulus values, etc. The entire display fits within
the user-defined boundaries of P1 and P2 on the plotter,
while maintaining the exact same aspect ratio as the
display.
SCALE PLOT [GRAT]
expands or reduces the horizontal and vertical scale so
that the lower left and upper right graticule corners
exactly correspond to the user-defined P1 and P2 scaling
points on the plotter. This is convenient for plotting on
preprinted rectangular or polar forms (for example, on a
Smith Chart).
Scale Ref
makes scale per division the active function. A menu is
displayed that is used to modify the vertical axis scale and
the reference line value and position. In addition this
menu provides electrical delay offset capabilities for
adding or subtracting linear phase to maintain phase
linearity.
SEARCH LEFT
searches the trace for the next occurrence of the target
value to the left.
SEARCH RIGHT
searches the trace for the next occurrence of the target
value to the right.
SEARCH: MAX
moves the active marker to the maximum point on the
trace.
SEARCH: MIN
moves the active marker to the minimum point on the
trace.
SEARCH: OFF
turns off the marker search function.
SEARCH: TARGET
searches for the user-specified target point on the trace.
SEGMENT
specifies which limit segment in the table is to be modified.
A maximum of three sets of segment values are displayed
at one time, and the list can be scrolled up or down to show
other segment entries. Use the entry block controls to
move the pointer > to the required segment number. The
indicated segment can then be edited or deleted. If the
table of limits is designated “EMPTY,” new segments can
be added using the ADD or EDIT softkey.
SEGMENT: CENTER
sets the center frequency of a subsweep in a list frequency
sweep.
SEGMENT IF BW
enters the IF bandwidth for the active segment in a swept
list table. This key is disabled if LIST IF BW on OFF is
set to OFF.
5-54
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
SEGMENT POWER
enters absolute power values in the swept list table. The
power values are restricted to the current power range
setting.
If port power is uncoupled, power applies to the currently
selected port, otherwise it applies to both ports. (The list
table only displays one port's power values at time due to
limited display area.) To set the alternate port's power
level, you must exit the edit list menus, select a
measurement that activates the alternate port, and then
re-enter the edit list menus.
This key is disabled if LIST POWER is set to OFF .
SEGMENT: SPAN
sets the frequency or power span of a subsweep about a
specified center frequency.
SEGMENT: START
sets the start frequency of a subsweep.
SEGMENT: STOP
sets the stop frequency of a subsweep.
SEL QUAD
leads to the select quadrant menu, which provides the
capability of drawing quarter-page plots.
SELECT DISK
provides access to the select disk menu.
SELECT LETTER
The active entry area displays the letters of the alphabet,
digits 0 through 9, and mathematical symbols. To define a
title, rotate the knob until the arrow ↑ points at the first
letter, then press SELECT LETTER . Repeat this until
the complete title is defined, for a maximum of 50
characters. As each character is selected, it is appended to
the title at the top of the graticule.
SELF DIAGNOSE
prompts the analyzer to run a series of tests to determine
a problem.
Seq
accesses a series of sequencing menus. These allow you to
create, modify, and store up to 6 sequences which can be
run automatically.
SEQUENCE 1 SEQ1
activates editing mode for the segment titled "SEQ1"
(default title).
SEQUENCE 2 SEQ2
activates editing mode for the segment titled "SEQ2"
(default title).
SEQUENCE 3 SEQ3
activates editing mode for the segment titled "SEQ3"
(default title).
SEQUENCE 4 SEQ4
activates editing mode for the segment titled "SEQ4"
(default title).
SEQUENCE 5 SEQ5
activates editing mode for the segment titled "SEQ5"
(default title).
5-55
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
SEQUENCE 6 SEQ6
activates editing mode for the segment titled "SEQ6"
(default title).
SEQUENCE FILENAMING
accesses a file naming menu which is used to
automatically increment or decrement the name of a file
that is generated by the network analyzer during a
SEQUENCE.
SERVICE MENU
leads to a series of service and test menus described in
detail in the service guide.
SERVICE MODES
a collection of common modes used for troubleshooting.
SET ADDRESSES
goes to the address menu, which is used to set the GPIB
address of the analyzer, and to display and modify the
addresses of peripheral devices in the system, such as the
printer, plotter, disk drive, and power meter.
SET CONF STANDARD
sets the ECal module back the confidence state. Used after
exiting the ECal service menu to reset the Ecal module
back to the confidence state.
SET CLOCK
allows you to set the analyzer's internal clock.
SET DAY
allows you to set the day in the analyzer's internal clock.
SET FREQ LOW PASS
(Option 010 only) changes the frequency sweep to
harmonic intervals to accommodate time domain low-pass
operation. If this mode is used, the frequencies must be set
before calibration.
SET HOUR
allows you to set the hour in the analyzer's internal clock.
SET MINUTES
allows you to set the minutes in the analyzer's internal
clock.
SET MONTH
allows you to set the month in the analyzer's internal
clock.
SET REF: REFLECT
sets the measurement reference plane to the TRL/LRM
REFLECT standard.
SET REF: THRU
sets the measurement reference plane to the TRL/LRM
THRU standard.
SET YEAR
allows you to set the year in the analyzer's internal clock.
SET Z0
sets the characteristic impedance used by the analyzer in
calculating measured impedance with Smith chart
markers and conversion parameters. Characteristic
impedance must be set correctly before calibration
procedures are performed.
SETUP A
sets up four-graticule, four-channel display as described in
the 4 PARAM HELP KEYS menu. All four graticules are
in log format.
5-56
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
SETUP B
sets up two-graticule, four-channel display as described in
the 4 PARAM HELP KEYS menu.
SETUP C
sets up single-graticule, four-channel display as described
in the 4 PARAM HELP KEYS menu.
SETUP D
sets up four-graticule, four-channel display as described in
the 4 PARAM HELP KEYS menu. Two of the graticules
are in Smith chart format with the other two in log format.
SETUP E
sets up two-graticule, four-channel display as described in
the 4 PARAM HELP KEYS menu.
SETUP F
sets up three-graticule, three-channel display as described
in the 4 PARAM HELP KEYS menu.
SHORT
defines the standard type as a short, for calibrating
reflection measurements. Shorts are assigned a terminal
impedance of 0 Ω, but delay and loss offsets may still be
added.
SHORT (F)
for cal kits with different models for male and female test
port standards, this selects the short model for a female
test port. Note that the sex of a calibration standard
always refers to the test port.
SHORT (M)
for cal kits with different models for male and female test
port standards, this selects the short model for a male test
port. Note that the sex of a calibration standard always
refers to the test port.
SHOW MENUS
used to display a specific menu prior to a pause statement
in a sequence.
SINGLE
takes one sweep of data and returns to the hold mode.
SINGLE POINT
sets the limits at a single stimulus point. If limit lines are
on, the upper limit value of a single point limit is
displayed as ∨ and the lower limit is displayed as ∧. A
limit test at a single point not terminating a flat or sloped
line tests the nearest actual measured data point. A single
point limit can be used as a termination for a flat line or
sloping line limit segment. When a single point terminates
a sloping line or when it terminates a flat line and has the
same limit values as the flat line, the single point is not
displayed as ∨ and ∧. The indication for a single point
segment in the displayed table of limits is SP.
SINGLE SEG SWEEP
enables a measurement of a single segment of the
frequency list, without loss of calibration. The segment to
be measured is selected using the entry block.
5-57
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
In single segment mode, selecting a measurement
calibration will force the full list sweep before prompting
for calibration standards. The calibration will then be
valid for any single segment.
If an instrument state is saved in memory with a
single-segment trace, a recall will re-display that segment
while also recalling the entire list.
SLIDING
defines the load as a sliding load. When such a load is
measured during calibration, the analyzer will prompt for
several load positions, and calculate the ideal load value
from it.
SLOPE
compensates for power loss versus the frequency sweep, by
sloping the output power upwards proportionally to
frequency. Use this softkey to enter the power slope in dB
per GHz of sweep.
SLOPE on OFF
toggles the power slope function on or off. With slope on,
the output power increases with frequency, starting at the
selected power level.
SLOPING LINE
defines a sloping limit line segment that is linear with
frequency or other stimulus value, and is continuous to the
next stimulus value and limit. If a sloping line is the final
segment, it becomes a flat line terminated at the stop
stimulus. A sloping line segment is indicated as SL on the
displayed table of limits.
SMITH CHART
displays a Smith chart format. This is used in reflection
measurements to provide a readout of the data in terms of
impedance. It provides information such as the reflection
coefficient and input/output impedance of the DUT.
SMITH MKR MENU
leads to a menu of special markers for use with a Smith
chart format.
SMOOTHING APERTURE
lets you change the value of the smoothing aperture as a
percent of the span. When smoothing aperture is the
active function, its value in stimulus units is displayed
below its percent value in the active entry area.
Smoothing aperture is also used to set the aperture for
group delay measurements. Note that the displayed
smoothing aperture is not the group delay aperture unless
smoothing is on.
SMOOTHING on OFF
5-58
turns the smoothing function on or off for the active
channel. When smoothing is on, the annotation “Smo” is
displayed in the status notations area.
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
SOURCE PWR on OFF
use this key to restore power after a power interruption.
ON returns the source power to its original setting, while
OFF sets the source to the minimum power level of the
analyzer.
SPACE
inserts a space in the title.
Span
is used, along with the Center key, to define the
frequency range of the stimulus. When the Span key is
pressed, it becomes the active function. The value is
displayed in the active entry area, and can be changed
with the knob, step keys, or numeric keypad.
SPAN
sets the frequency or power span of a subsweep about a
specified center frequency.
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
presents the special function menu.
SPECIFY CLASS
leads to the specify class menu. After the standards are
modified, use this key to specify a class to consist of certain
standards.
SPECIFY CLASS DONE
finishes the specify class function and returns to the
modify cal kit menu.
SPECIFY GATE
(Option 010 only) is used to specify the parameters of the
gate.
SPECIFY OFFSET
allows additional specifications for a user-defined
standard. Features specified in this menu are common to
all five types of standards.
SPLIT DISP 1X 2X 4X
toggles between a full-screen single graticule display or
two-, three-, or four-graticule, multiple-channel display.
Works with DUAL CHAN on OFF to determine the
number of channels displayed.
SPUR AVOID On Off
selects whether spur avoidance is ON or OFF. Selecting
spur avoidance OFF, along with selecting raw offsets OFF,
saves substantial time at recalls and during frequency
changes. Spur avoidance is always coupled between
channels.
STANDARD DONE
returns to the define standard menu.
Start
is used to define the start frequency of a frequency range.
When the Start key is pressed it becomes the active
function. The value is displayed in the active entry area,
and can be changed with the knob, step keys, or numeric
keypad.
STD OFFSET DONE
is used to end the specify offset sequence.
STD TYPE:
is used to specify the type of calibration device being
measured.
5-59
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
STD TYPE: ARBITRARY
IMPEDANCE
defines the standard type to be a load, but with an
arbitrary impedance (different from system Z0).
STD TYPE: DELAY/THRU
defines the standard type as a transmission line of
specified length, for calibrating transmission
measurements.
STD TYPE: LOAD
defines the standard type as a load (termination). Loads
are assigned a terminal impedance equal to the system
characteristic impedance ZO, but delay and loss offsets
may still be added. If the load impedance is not ZO, use
the arbitrary impedance standard definition.
STD TYPE: OPEN
defines the standard type as an open used for calibrating
reflection measurements. Opens are assigned a terminal
impedance of infinite Ωs, but delay and loss offsets may
still be added. Pressing this key also brings up a menu for
defining the open, including its capacitance.
STD TYPE: SHORT
defines the standard type as a short used for calibrating
reflection measurements. Shorts are assigned a terminal
impedance of 0 Ωs, but delay and loss offsets may still be
added.
STEP SIZE
is used to specify the subsweep in frequency steps instead
of number of points. Changing the start frequency, stop
frequency, span, or number of points may change the step
size. Changing the step size may change the number of
points and stop frequency in start/stop/step mode or the
frequency span in center/span/step mode. In each case, the
frequency span becomes a multiple of the step size.
STIMULUS VALUE
sets the starting stimulus value of a segment, using entry
block controls. The ending stimulus value of the segment
is defined by the start of the next line segment. No more
than one segment can be defined over the same stimulus
range.
STIMULUS OFFSET
adds or subtracts an offset in stimulus value. This allows
limits already defined to be used for testing in a different
stimulus range. Use the entry block controls to specify the
offset required.
Stop
is used to define the stop frequency of a frequency range.
When the Stop key is pressed, it becomes the active
function. The value is displayed in the active entry area,
and can be changed with the knob, step keys, or numeric
keypad.
STOP
sets the stop frequency of a subsweep.
5-60
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
STORE SEQ TO DISK
presents the store sequence to disk menu with a list of
sequences that can be stored.
SWEEP
is used to set the frequency of the LO source to sweep.
SWEEP SETUP
provides access to a series of menus which are used to
define and control all stimulus functions other than start,
stop, center, and span. Operating parameters such as
power, sweeptime, trigger condition, and number of points
are accessible through this hardkey.
SWEEP TIME [ ]
toggles between automatic and manual sweep time.
SWEEP TYPE MENU
presents the sweep type menu, where one of the available
types of stimulus sweep can be selected.
SWR
reformats a reflection measurement into its equivalent
SWR (standing wave ratio) value. SWR is equivalent to
(1+ρ)/(1−ρ), where ρ is the magnitude of the reflection
coefficient. Note that the results are valid only for
reflection measurements. If the SWR format is used for
measurements of S21 or S12, the results are not valid.
System
presents the system menu. It allows to set the instrument
mode and to access the configure, limit and service menus.
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
is the mode used when peripheral devices are to be used
and there is no external controller. In this mode, the
analyzer can directly control peripherals (plotter, printer,
disk drive, or power meter). System controller mode must
be set in order for the analyzer to access peripherals from
the front panel to plot, print, store on disk, or perform
power meter functions, if there is no other controller on
the bus.
The system controller mode can be used without
knowledge of GPIB programming. However, the GPIB
address must be entered for each peripheral device.
This mode can only be selected manually from the
analyzer's front panel, and can be used only if no active
computer controller is connected to the system through
GPIB. If you try to set system controller mode when
another controller is present, the message ANOTHER
SYSTEM CONTROLLER ON GPIB is displayed. Do not
attempt to use this mode for programming.
TAKE CAL SWEEP
Each data point is measured during the initial sweep and
the correction data is placed in the power meter correction
table. This provides data usable in the ONE SWEEP
mode.
TAKE RCVR CAL SWEEP
executes a receiver calibration.
5-61
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
TALKER/LISTENER
is the mode normally used for remote programming of the
analyzer. In this mode, the analyzer and all peripheral
devices are controlled from the external controller. The
controller can command the analyzer to talk, and the
plotter or other device to listen. The analyzer and
peripheral devices cannot talk directly to each other
unless the computer sets up a data path between them.
This mode allows the analyzer to be either a talker or a
listener, as required by the controlling computer for the
particular operation in progress.
A talker is a device capable of sending out data when it is
addressed to talk. There can be only one talker at any
given time. The analyzer is a talker when it sends
information over the bus.
A listener is a device capable of receiving data when it is
addressed to listen. There can be any number of listeners
at any given time. The analyzer is a listener when it is
controlled over the bus by a computer.
TARGET
makes target value the active function, and places the
active marker at a specified target point on the trace. The
default target value is −3 dB. The target menu is
presented, providing search right and search left options
to resolve multiple solutions.
For relative measurements, a search reference must be
defined with a delta marker or a fixed marker before the
search is activated.
TARGET VALUE
sets the value for target searches, without activating a
search.
TERMINAL IMPEDANCE
is used to specify the (arbitrary) impedance of the
standard, in Ωs.
TEST OPTIONS
is used to set configurations before running the service
tests.
TESTPORT 1 2
is used to direct the RF power to port 1 or port 2. (For
non-S parameter inputs only.)
TESTSET I/O FWD
is used to support specialized test sets, such as a test set
that measures duplexers. It allows you to set three bits
(D1, D2, and D3) to a value of 0 to 7, and outputs it as
binary from the rear panel test set connector. It tracks the
coupling flag, so if coupling is on, and FWD channel 1 is
the active channel, FWD channel 2 will be set to the same
value.
5-62
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
TESTSET I/O REV
is used to support specialized test sets, such as a test set
that measures duplexers. It allows you to set three bits
(D1, D2, and D3) to a value of 0 to 7, and outputs it as
binary from the rear panel test set connector. It tracks the
coupling flag, so if coupling is on, and REV channel 1 is the
active channel, REV channel 2 will be set to the same
value.
TESTS
presents the service test menu.
TEXT
selects all the non-data display text for color modification.
For example: operating parameters.
TEXT [ ]
brings up the print color definition menu. The default color
for text is black.
TEXT FMT [ ]
sets the format of the text file when FILETYPE: TEXT is
selected. The only text selection currently available is the
comma separated values (CSV) format.
THRU
a calibration standard type.
THRU THRU
measures all four S-parameters in a TRL/LRM calibration.
TIME STAMP on OFF
turns the time stamp function on or off.
TINT
adjusts the continuum of hues on the color wheel of the
chosen attribute. Refer to the section on adjusting the
display color in the “Making Measurements” chapter of
the user’s guide for an explanation of using this softkey for
color modification of display attributes.
TITLE
presents the title menu in the softkey labels area and the
character set in the active entry area. These are used to
label the active channel display. A title more menu allows
up to four values to be included in the printed title active
entry, active marker amplitude, limit test results, and loop
counter value.
TITLE SEQUENCE
allows the operator to rename any sequence with an eight
character title. All titles entered from the front panel must
begin with a letter, and may only contain letters and
numbers. A procedure for changing the title of a sequence
is provided at the beginning of this chapter.
TITLE TO MEMORY
moves the title string data obtained with the
P MTR/GPIB TO TITLE command into a data array.
TITLE TO MEMORY strips off leading characters that
are not numeric, reads the numeric value, and then
discards everything else. The number is converted into
analyzer internal format, and is placed into the real
portion of the memory trace at:
Display point = total points − 1 − loop counter
5-63
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
If the value of the loop counter is zero, then the title
number goes in the last point of memory. If the loop
counter is greater than or equal to the current number of
measurement points, the number is placed in the first
point of memory. A data to memory command must be
executed before using the title to memory command.
TITLE TO P MTR/GPIB
outputs a title string to any device with an GPIB address
that matches the address set with the analyzer Local
SET ADDRESSES ADDRESS: P MTR/GPIB commands.
This softkey is generally used for two purposes:
• Sending a title to a printer when a CR-LF is not
desired.
• Sending commands to an GPIB device.
TITLE TO PERIPHERAL
outputs a title string to any device with an GPIB address
that matches the address set with the analyzer Seq
SPECIAL FUNCTIONS
PERIPHERAL GPIB ADDR
commands. This softkey is generally used for two
purposes:
• Sending a title to a printer when a CR-LF is not
desired.
• Sending commands to an GPIB device.
TITLE TO PRNTR/GPIB
outputs a title string to any device with an GPIB address
that matches the address set with the analyzer Local
SET ADDRESSES ADDRESS: PRINTER commands.
This softkey is generally used for two purposes:
• Sending a title to a printer for data logging or
documentation purposes.
• Sending commands to a printer or other GPIB device.
TRACE TYPE [DATA]
is located in the ECal confidence menu and ECal service
menu. This softkey allows you to display the ECal module
factory response and measurement data in different forms.
The choices include: DATA, DATA&MEM, DATA/MEM,
DATA-MEM, and MEM.
TRACKING on OFF
is used in conjunction with other search features to track
the search with each new sweep. Turning tracking on
makes the analyzer search every new trace for the
specified target value and put the active marker on that
point. If bandwidth search is on, tracking searches every
new trace for the specified bandwidth, and repositions the
dedicated bandwidth markers.
5-64
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
When tracking is off, the target is found on the current
sweep and remains at the same stimulus value regardless
of changes in trace response value with subsequent
sweeps.
A maximum and a minimum point can be tracked
simultaneously using two channels and uncoupled
markers.
TRANS: FWD S21 (B/R)
defines the measurement as S21, the complex forward
transmission coefficient (magnitude and phase) of the test
device.
TRANS: REV S12 (A/R)
defines the measurement as S12, the complex reverse
transmission coefficient (magnitude and phase) of the test
device.
TRANSFORM MENU
(Option 010 only) leads to a series of menus that transform
the measured data from the frequency domain to the time
domain.
TRANSFORM on OFF
(Option 010 only) switches between time domain
transform on and off.
TRANSMISSION
leads to the transmission menu.
TRIGGER MENU
presents the trigger menu, which is used to select the type
and number of the sweep trigger.
TRIGGER: TRIG OFF
turns off external trigger mode.
TRL 3.5 mm 85052C
selects the 85052C cal kit.
TRL*/LRM* 2-PORT
leads to the TRL*/LRM* 2-port calibration menu.
TRL/LRM OPTION
selects the TRL/LRM Option Menu, under the modify cal
kit menu.
TRL LINE OR MATCH
is used to enter the standard numbers for the TRL LINE
or MATCH class.
TRL THRU
is used to enter the standard numbers for the TRL THRU
class.
TRL REFLECT
is used to enter the standard numbers for the TRL
REFLECT class.
TTL OUT HIGH
sets the TTL output (TEST SEQ BNC) on the back of the
analyzer high.
TTL OUT LOW
sets the TTL output (TEST SEQ BNC) on the back of the
analyzer low.
TUNED RECEIVER
sets the analyzer to function as a tuned receiver only,
disabling the source.
5-65
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
UNCOUPLED
allows the marker stimulus values to be controlled
independently on each channel.
UP CONVERTER
sends the sum frequency of the RF and LO to the R
channel.
UPPER LIMIT
sets the upper limit value for the start of the segment. If a
lower limit is specified, an upper limit must also be
defined. If no upper limit is required for a particular
measurement, force the upper limit value out of range (for
example +500 dB).
When UPPER LIMIT or LOWER LIMIT is pressed, all
the segments in the table are displayed in terms of upper
and lower limits, even if they were defined as delta limits
and middle value.
If you attempt to set an upper limit that is lower than the
lower limit, or vice versa, both limits will be automatically
set to the same value.
USE MEMORY ON off
(Option 010 only) remembers a specified window pulse
width (or step rise time) different from the standard
window values. A window is activated only for viewing a
time domain response, and does not affect a displayed
frequency domain response.
USE PASS CONTROL
lets you control the analyzer with the computer over GPIB
as with the talker/listener mode, and also allows the
analyzer to become a controller in order to plot, print, or
directly access an external disk. During this peripheral
operation, the host computer is free to perform other
internal tasks that do not require use of the bus (the bus is
tied up by the network analyzer during this time).
The pass control mode requires that the external
controller is programmed to respond to a request for
control and to issue a take control command. When the
peripheral operation is complete, the analyzer passes
control back to the computer. Refer to the GPIB
programming chapters in the programmer's guide for
more information.
In general, use the talker/listener mode for programming
the analyzer unless direct peripheral access is required.
USE SENSOR A/B
selects the A or B power sensor calibration factor list for
use in power meter calibration measurements.
USER
is used to select the preset condition defined by the user.
USER KIT
is used to define kits other than those offered by Agilent
Technologies.
5-66
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
VELOCITY FACTOR
enters the velocity factor used by the analyzer to calculate
equivalent electrical length in distance-to-fault
measurements using the time domain option. Values
entered should be less than 1.
Velocity factor is the ratio of the velocity of wave
propagation in a coaxial cable to the velocity of wave
propagation in free space. Most cables have a relative
velocity of about 0.66 the speed in free space. This velocity
depends on the relative permittivity of the cable dielectric
1
εr
(εr) as: Velocity Factor = -------USER SETTINGS
selects a menu of user settings, including preset settings
that can be changed by the user.
VIEW MEASURE
toggles to become view setup when the analyzer is in
frequency offset mode.
VOLUME NUMBER
specifies the number of the disk volume to be accessed. In
general, all 3.5 inch floppy disks are considered one
volume (volume 0). For hard disk drives, such as the
HP 9153A (Winchester), a switch in the disk drive must be
set to define the number of volumes on the disk.
WAIT x
pauses the execution of subsequent sequence commands
for x number of seconds. Terminate this command with
x1 .
Entering a 0 in wait x causes the instrument to wait for
prior sequence command activities to finish before
allowing the next command to begin. The wait 0 command
only affects the command immediately following it, and
does not affect commands later in the sequence.
WARNING
selects the display warning annotation for color
modification.
WARNING [ ]
brings up the color definition menu. The warning
annotation default color is black.
WAVEGUIDE
defines the standard (and the offset) as rectangular
waveguide. This causes the analyzer to assume a
dispersive delay. See OFFSET DELAY .
WAVEGUIDE DELAY
applies a non-linear phase shift for use with electrical
delay which follows the standard dispersive phase
equation for rectangular waveguide. When
WAVEGUIDE DELAY is pressed, the active function
becomes the WAVEGUIDE CUTOFF frequency, which is
used in the phase equation. Choosing a Start frequency
less than the Cutoff frequency results in phase errors.
5-67
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
WIDTH VALUE
is used to set the amplitude parameter (for example 3 dB)
that defines the start and stop points for a bandwidth
search. The bandwidth search feature analyzes a
bandpass or band reject trace and calculates the center
point, bandwidth, and Q (quality factor) for the specified
bandwidth. Bandwidth units are the units of the current
format.
WIDTHS on OFF
turns on the bandwidth search feature and calculates the
center stimulus value, bandwidth, and Q of a bandpass or
band reject shape on the trace. The amplitude value that
defines the pass band or reject band is set using the
WIDTH VALUE softkey.
Four markers are turned on, and each has a dedicated use.
Marker 1 is a starting point from which the search is
begun. Marker 2 goes to the bandwidth center point.
Marker 3 goes to the bandwidth cutoff point on the left,
and Marker 4 to the cutoff point on the right.
If a delta marker or fixed marker is on, it is used as the
reference point from which the bandwidth amplitude is
measured. For example, if marker 1 is the delta marker
and is set at the passband maximum, and the width value
is set to −3 dB, the bandwidth search finds the bandwidth
cutoff points 3 dB below the maximum and calculates the
3 dB bandwidth and Q.
If marker 2 (the dedicated bandwidth center point marker)
is the delta reference marker, the search finds the points 3
dB down from the center.
If no delta reference marker is set, the bandwidth values
are absolute values.
WINDOW
(Option 010 only) is used to specify the parameters of the
window in the transform menu.
WINDOW: MAXIMUM
(Option 010 only) sets the pulse width to the widest value
allowed. This minimizes the sidelobes and provides the
greatest dynamic range.
WINDOW: MINIMUM
(Option 010 only) is used to set the window of a time
domain measurement to the minimum value. Provides
essentially no window.
WINDOW: NORMAL
(Option 010 only) is used to set the window of a time
domain measurement to the normal value. Usually the
most useful because it reduces the sidelobes of the
measurement somewhat.
x1
is used to terminate basic units: dB, dBm, Hz, dB/GHz,
degrees, or seconds. It may also be used to terminate
unitless entries such as averaging factor.
5-68
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
XMIT CNTRL [ ]
toggles the PLOTTER/PRINTER serial port data transmit
control mode between the Xon-Xoff protocol handshake
and the DTR-DSR (data terminal ready-data set ready)
hardwire handshake.
Y: REFL
converts reflection data to its equivalent admittance
values.
Y: TRANS
converts transmission data to its equivalent admittance
values.
Z: REFL
converts reflection data to its equivalent impedance
values.
Z: TRANS
converts transmission data to its equivalent impedance
values.
5-69
Hardkey/Softkey Reference
Analyzer Functions
5-70
6 Error Messages
6-1
Error Messages
Error Messages
Error Messages
This chapter contains the following information to help you interpret any error messages
that may be displayed on the analyzer LCD or transmitted by the instrument over GPIB:
• An alphabetical listing of all error messages, including:
❏ An explanation of the message
❏ Suggestions to help solve the problem
• A numerical listing of all error messages
NOTE
6-2
Some messages described in this chapter are for information only and do not
indicate an error condition. These messages are not numbered and so they
will not appear in the numerical listing.
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
ABORTING COPY OUTPUT
Information
Message
This message is displayed briefly if you have pressed Local to abort a copy
operation. If the message is not subsequently replaced by error message number
25, PRINT ABORTED (or PLOT ABORTED) the copy device may be hung. Press
Local once more to exit the abort process and verify the status of the copy
device. At this point, the copy device will probably have an error condition which
must be fixed. (For example: out of paper or paper jam.)
ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED
Error Number
68
Error correction for the selected calibration class cannot be computed until you
have measured all the necessary standards.
ADDRESSED TO TALK WITH NOTHING TO SAY
Error Number
31
You have sent a read command to the analyzer (such as ENTER 716) without
first requesting data with an appropriate output command (such as
OUTPDATA). The analyzer has no data in the output queue to satisfy the
request.
ALL REGISTERS HAVE BEEN USED
Error Number
200
You have used all of the available registers; you can store no more instrument
states even though you may still have sufficient memory. There are 31 registers
available, plus the preset instrument state.
ANALOG BUS DISABLED IN 6 KHZ IF BW
Error Number
212
When you press Avg IF BW [6000] , the analog bus is disabled and not
available for use in troubleshooting. For a description of the analog bus, refer to
the service guide.
ANALOG INPUT OVERLOAD
Error Number
60
The power level of the analog input is too high. Reduce the power level of the
analog input source.
ANOTHER SYSTEM CONTROLLER ON GPIB
Error Number
37
You must remove the active controller from the bus or the controller must
relinquish the bus before the analyzer can assume the system controller mode.
6-3
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
ARGUMENT OUT OF RANGE
Error Number
206
The argument for a programming command is out of the specified range. Refer
to the programmer’s guide for a list of programming commands and argument
ranges.
ASCII: MISSING 'BEGIN' STATEMENT
Error Number
193
The CITIfile you just downloaded over the GPIB or via disk was not properly
organized. The analyzer is unable to read the “BEGIN” statement.
ASCII: MISSING 'CITIFILE' STATEMENT
Error Number
194
The CITIfile you just downloaded over the GPIB or via disk was not properly
organized. The analyzer is unable to read the “CITIFILE” statement.
ASCII: MISSING 'DATA' STATEMENT
Error Number
195
The CITIfile you just downloaded over the GPIB or via disk was not properly
organized. The analyzer is unable to read the “DATA” statement.
ASCII: MISSING 'VAR' STATEMENT
Error Number
196
The CITIfile you just downloaded over the GPIB or via disk was not properly
organized. The analyzer is unable to read the “VAR” statement.
AVERAGING INVALID ON NON-RATIO MEASURE
Error Number
13
You cannot use sweep-to-sweep averaging in single-input measurements.
Sweep-to-sweep averaging is valid only for ratioed measurements (A/R, B/R,
A/B, and S-parameters). You can use other noise reduction techniques, such as
narrower IF bandwidth, for single input measurements.
BAD FREQ FOR HARMONIC OR FREQ OFFSET
Error Number
181
You turned on time domain or recalled a calibration that resulted in start and
stop frequencies that are beyond the allowable limits.
BANDWIDTH LIMIT INVALID: MIN BW > MAX BW
Information
Message
6-4
The bandwidth test has a minimum bandwidth greater than the maximum
bandwidth. Change the minimum bandwidth to a frequency less than the
frequency of the maximum bandwidth or change the maximum bandwidth to a
frequency greater than the frequency of the minimum bandwidth
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
BATTERY FAILED. STATE MEMORY CLEARED
Error Number
183
The battery protection of the non-volatile CMOS memory has failed. The CMOS
memory has been cleared. Refer to the service guide for battery replacement
instructions. See Chapter 8 , “Preset State and Memory Allocation” for more
information about the CMOS memory.
BATTERY LOW! STORE SAVE REGS TO DISK
Error Number
184
The battery protection of the non-volatile CMOS memory is in danger of failing.
If this occurs, all of the instrument state registers stored in CMOS memory will
be lost. Save these states to a disk and refer to the service guide for battery
replacement instructions. See Chapter 8 , “Preset State and Memory Allocation”
for more information about the CMOS memory.
BLOCK INPUT ERROR
Error Number
34
The analyzer did not receive a complete data transmission. This is usually
caused by an interruption of the bus transaction. Clear by pressing the Local
key or aborting the I/O process at the controller.
BLOCK INPUT LENGTH ERROR
Error Number
35
The length of the header received by the analyzer did not agree with the size of
the internal array block. Refer to the programmer’s guide for instructions on
using analyzer input commands.
CALIBRATION ABORTED
Error Number
74
You have changed the active channel during a calibration, so the calibration in
progress was terminated. Make sure the appropriate channel is active and
restart the calibration.
CALIBRATION REQUIRED
Error Number
63
A calibration set could not be found that matched the current stimulus state or
measurement parameter. You will have to perform a new calibration.
CANNOT DETERMINE ORIENTATION
Information
Message
There is a problem with the ECal module in the RF path. Check RF connections,
power connections, and interface connections to module.
6-5
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
CANNOT FORMAT DOS DISKS ON THIS DRIVE
Error Number
185
You have attempted to initialize a floppy disk to DOS format on an external disk
drive that does not support writing to all 80 tracks of the double density and
high density disks. The older single-sided disks had only 66 tracks and some
disk drives were limited to accessing that number of tracks. To format the disk,
either choose another external disk drive or use the analyzer's internal disk
drive.
CANNOT MODIFY FACTORY PRESET
Error Number
199
You have attempted to rename, delete, or otherwise alter the factory preset
state. The factory preset state is permanently stored in ROM and cannot be
altered. If your intent was to create a user preset state, you must create a new
instrument state, save it, and then rename it to “UPRESET”. Refer to Chapter
8 , “Preset State and Memory Allocation” for more detailed instructions.
CANNOT READ/WRITE HFS FILE SYSTEM
Error Number
203
The disk is being accessed by the analyzer and is found to contain an HFS
(hierarchical file system) or files nested within subdirectories. The analyzer does
not support HFS. Replace the disk medium with a LIF or DOS formatted disk
that does not contain files nested within subdirectories.
CAN'T STORE/LOAD SEQUENCE, INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
Error Number
127
Your sequence transfer to or from a disk could not be completed due to
insufficient memory.
CAUTION: CORRECTION OFF: AUX CHANNEL(S) DISABLED
Error Number
215
This message is displayed when correction is forced off due to a stimulus change
that is not compatible with the current calibration while an auxiliary channel is
enabled. The auxiliary channels are restored when correction is turned on by
pressing Cal CORRECTION on OFF .
CAUTION: FLOPPY DISK IS FULL
Error Number
218
This message is displayed if you try to save files to the floppy disk that does not
have enough memory to perform the save task. Correct by inserting a new floppy
disk in the front panel disk drive or by erasing files from the current floppy disk.
CAUTION: TOO MANY SEGMENTS OR POINTS
Information
Message
6-6
This message is displayed if you try to insert too many segments or points using
your current function.
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
CH1 (CH2, CH3, CH4) TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND
Error Number
159
Your target value for the marker search function does not exist on the current
data trace.
CONTINUOUS SWITCHING NOT ALLOWED
Error Number
10
Your current measurement requires different power ranges on channel 1 and
channel 2. To protect the attenuator from undue mechanical wear, test set hold
will be activated. The “tsH” (test set hold) indicator in the left margin of the
display indicates that the inactive channel has been put in the sweep hold mode.
This message is also displayed if a mechanical switch test set is in use and
channels are measuring parameters that require the test set to switch
continuously, for example S11 on Channel 1 and S22 on Channel 2
COPY: device not responding; copy aborted
Error Number
170
The printer or plotter is not accepting data. Verify the cable connections, GPIB
addresses, and otherwise ensure that the copy device is ready.
COPY OUTPUT COMPLETED
Information
Message
The analyzer has completed outputting data to the printer or plotter. The
analyzer can now accept another copy command.
CORRECTION AND DOMAIN RESET
Error Number
65
When you change the frequency range, sweep type, or number of points,
error-correction is switched off and the time domain transform is recalculated,
without error-correction. You can either correct the frequency range, sweep type,
or number of points to match the calibration, or perform a new calibration. Then
perform a new time domain transform.
CORRECTION CONSTANTS NOT STORED
Error Number
3
A store operation to the EEPROM was not successful. You must change the
position of the write-protect jumper on the A9 CPU assembly. Refer to the
“Adjustments and Correction Constants” chapter of the service guide for
information on the A9 CC jumper position.
CORRECTION ON: AUX CHANNEL(S) RESTORED
Error Number
214
This message is displayed when a calibration is restored and that calibration
previously had one or both auxiliary channels enabled.
6-7
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
CORRECTION TURNED OFF
Error Number
66
Critical parameters in your current instrument state do not match the
parameters for the calibration set, therefore correction has been turned off. The
critical instrument state parameters are sweep type, start frequency, frequency
span, and number of points.
CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET
Error Number
64
Correction is not valid for your selected measurement parameter. Either change
the measurement parameters or perform a new calibration.
D2/D1 INVALID WITH SINGLE CHANNEL
Error Number
130
You can only make a D2/D1 measurement if both channels are on.
D2/D1 INVALID: CH1 CH2 NUM PTS DIFFERENT
Error Number
152
You can only make a D2/D1 measurement if both channels have the same
number of points.
DEADLOCK
Error Number
111
A fatal firmware error occurred before instrument preset completed. Call your
local Agilent Technologies sales and service office.
DEMODULATION NOT VALID
Error Number
17
Demodulation was selected when the analyzer was not in CW time mode. Select
demodulation only after putting the analyzer into CW time mode.
DEVICE: not on, not connect, wrong addrs
Error Number
119
The device at the selected address cannot be accessed by the analyzer. Verify
that the device is switched on, and check the GPIB connection between the
analyzer and the device. Ensure that the device address recognized by the
analyzer matches the GPIB address set on the device itself.
DIRECTORY FULL
Error Number
188
There is no room left in the directory to add files. Either delete files or get a new
disk.
DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM
Error Number
39
6-8
The disk drive is not responding correctly. Refer to the service guide for
troubleshooting information. If using an external disk drive, refer to the disk
drive operating manual.
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED
Error Number
48
The store operation cannot write to a write-protected disk. Slide the
write-protect tab over the write-protect opening in order to write data on the
disk.
DISK MEDIUM NOT INITIALIZED
Error Number
40
You must initialize the disk before it can be used.
DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR
Error Number
190
The analyzer and the external disk drive aren't communicating properly. Check
the GPIB connection and then try substituting another disk drive to isolate the
problem instrument.
DISK: not on, not connected, wrong addrs
Error Number
38
The disk cannot be accessed by the analyzer. Verify power to the disk drive, and
check the GPIB connection between the analyzer and the disk drive. Ensure
that the disk drive address recognized by the analyzer matches the GPIB
address set on the disk drive itself.
DISK READ/WRITE ERROR
Error Number
189
There may be a problem with your disk. Try a new floppy disk. If a new floppy
disk does not eliminate the error, suspect hardware problems.
DISK WEAR - REPLACE DISK SOON
Error Number
49
Cumulative use of the disk is approaching the maximum. Copy files as
necessary using an external controller. If no controller is available, load
instrument states from the old disk and store them to a newly initialized disk
using the save/recall features of the analyzer. Discard the old disk.
DOMAIN RESET
Error Number
67
Time domain calculations were reset due to a change in the frequency range,
sweep type, or number of points. Perform a new time domain transform on the
new state.
DUPLICATING TO THIS SEQUENCE NOT ALLOWED
Error Number
125
A sequence cannot be duplicated to itself.
6-9
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
ECal: CHECKING ORIENTATION
Information
Message
This message is displayed while the network analyzer verifies that the ECal
module is properly connected in the RF path.
ECal: CONFIDENCE STATE
Information
Message
This message is displayed when the confidence state is initiated. The confidence
state response will be displayed.
ECal FAILED
Error Number
224
This is a serious ECal failure. It may occur due to corrupt data in the ECal
module or a problem with the network analyzer. If the error message continues,
contact the service center. For a list of sales and service centers near you, refer
to Chapter 8, Safety and Regulatory Information in the user’s guide.
ECal: ISOLATION STATE
Information
Message
This message is displayed when ECal module is set to the isolation state.
ECal: MODULE NOT IN RF PATH
Error Number
219
The ECal module is not in the RF path. Check all connections to the ECal
module.
ECal: MODULE NOT RESPONDING
Error Number
222
The ECal module is not responding to the network analyzer. Check all the ECal
module connections and the power supply connection.
ECal: MODULE NOT SUPPORTED
Information
Message
The ECal module that is being used for calibration is not compatible with the
network analyzer. Refer to the Electronic Calibration Module Reference Guide
for information regarding compatibility.
ECal: REFLECTION STATE
Information
Message
This message is displayed when the ECal module is set to the reflection state.
ECal: SELECTING BEST REFECTION REFLECTION STATE
Information
Message
6-10
The network analyzer is in the process of selecting the most accurate reflection
response.
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
ECal: SELECT OTHER MODULE
Error Number
221
This error occurs when two ECal modules are connected. The selected ECal
module may not be able to measure the selected frequency range. Check the
frequency range of the other module and connect in the RF path.
ECal: THRU STATE
Information
Message
This message is displayed when the ECal module is set to the thru state.
EXCEEDED 7 STANDARDS PER CLASS
Error Number
72
When modifying calibration kits, you can define a maximum of seven standards
for any class.
EXTERNAL SOURCE MODE REQUIRES CW TIME
Error Number
148
An external source can only be phase locked and measured in the CW time
sweep mode.
EXT SOURCE NOT READY FOR TRIGGER
Error Number
191
There is a hardware problem with the 8625A external source. Verify the
connections between the analyzer and the external source. If the connections are
correct, refer to the source operating manual.
EXT SRC: NOT ON/CONNECTED OR WRONG ADDR
Error Number
162
The analyzer is unable to communicate with the external source. Check the
connections and the GPIB address on the source.
FILE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH INSTRUMENT
Information
Message
You cannot recall user graphics that had been saved on an earlier model of
analyzer with a monochrome display. These files cannot be used with the
analyzer.
FILE NOT FOUND
Error Number
192
The requested file was not found on the current disk medium.
FILE NOT FOUND OR WRONG TYPE
Error Number
197
During a recall operation, either the file was not found or the type of file was not
an instrument state file.
6-11
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
FIRST CHARACTER MUST BE A LETTER
Error Number
42
The first character of a disk file title or an internal save register title must be an
alpha character.
FORMAT NOT VALID FOR MEASUREMENT
Error Number
75
Conversion measurements (Z or Y reflection and transmission) are not valid
with Smith chart and SWR formats.
FORMATTING DATA
Information
Message
The list information is being processed for a list data output to a copy device and
stored in the copy spool buffer. During this time, the analyzer's resources are
dedicated to this task (which takes less than a few seconds).
FREQS CANNOT BE CHANGED, TOO MANY POINTS
Error Number
204
The number of points selected for setting the low pass transform frequencies is
too high. Reduce the number of points so that the low pass criteria is met.
FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE
Error Number
202
The function you requested over GPIB is not available on the current
instrument.
FUNCTION NOT VALID
Error Number
14
The function you requested is incompatible with the current instrument state.
FUNCTION NOT VALID DURING MOD SEQUENCE
Error Number
131
You cannot perform sequencing operations while a sequence is being modified.
FUNCTION NOT VALID FOR INTERNAL MEMORY
Error Number
201
The function you selected only works with disk files.
FUNCTION ONLY VALID DURING MOD SEQUENCE
Error Number
163
6-12
You can only use the GOSUB SEQUENCE capability when you are building a
sequence. Attempting to use this softkey at any other time returns an error
message and no action is taken.
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
8753 SOURCE PARAMETERS CHANGED
Error Number
61
Some of the stimulus parameters of the instrument state have been changed,
because you have turned correction on. A calibration set for the current
measurement parameter was found and activated. The instrument state was
updated to match the stimulus parameters of the calibration state. This
message also appears when you have turned on harmonic mode or frequency
offset, and the present frequency range cannot be used with one of these modes.
GPIB COPY IN PROGRESS, ABORT WITH LOCAL
Error Number
169
An GPIB copy was already in progress when you requested the GPIB for
another function. To abort the first copy, press Local , otherwise the GPIB is
unavailable until the first copy is completed.
IF BW KEY DISABLED, EDIT LIST MODE TBL
Information
Message
When list IF bandwidth has been enabled and swept list mode is on, you will not
be able to change the IF bandwidth using the IF BW key. To change the IF
bandwidth, edit the swept list table.
ILLEGAL UNIT OR VOLUME NUMBER
Error Number
46
The disk unit or volume number set in the analyzer is not valid. Refer to the
disk drive operating manual.
INIT DISK removes all data from disk
Information
Message
Continuing with the initialize operation will destroy any data currently on the
disk.
INITIALIZATION FAILED
Error Number
47
The disk initialization failed, probably because the disk is damaged.
INSTRUMENT STATE MEMORY CLEARED
Error Number
56
All instrument state registers have been cleared from memory along with any
saved calibration data, memory traces, and calibration kit definitions.
Additionally, all user-settable selections (such as GPIB addresses) are set to
their defaults.
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
Error Number
51
Your last front panel or GPIB request could not be implemented due to
insufficient memory space. In some cases, this is a fatal error from which you
can escape only by presetting the instrument.
6-13
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY FOR PRINT/PLOT
Error Number
168
There is not enough memory available for the print or plot function. Increase the
available memory by changing or eliminating a memory-intensive operation
such as reducing the number of points in the sweep.
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY, PWR MTR CAL OFF
Error Number
154
There is not enough memory space for the power meter calibration array.
Increase the available memory by clearing one or more save/recall registers, or
by reducing the number of points.
INVALID KEY
Error Number
2
You pressed an undefined softkey.
ISOL AVERAGES < SWP AVERAGES
Error Number
223
The isolation averages are less than the instrument sweep averages. Increase
the isolation averages to be equal to or greater than instrument sweep averages.
This error can only occur when instrument averaging is turned on.
LIMIT TABLE EMPTY
Error Number
205
Limit lines cannot be turned on unless a limit table has been created. Refer to
the “Making Measurements” chapter of the user’s guide for information on how
to create a limit table.
LIST MODE OFF: INVALID WITH LO FREQ
Error Number
182
List mode has been turned off in the frequency offset mode because it is
incompatible with your selected LO frequency.
LIST TABLE EMPTY
Error Number
9
The frequency list is empty. To implement list frequency mode, add segments to
the list table.
LOG SWEEP REQUIRES 2 OCTAVE MINIMUM SPAN
Error Number
150
6-14
A logarithmic sweep is only valid if the stop frequency is greater than four times
the start frequency. For frequency spans of less than two octaves, the sweep type
automatically reverts to linear sweep.
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
LOW PASS: FREQ LIMITS CHANGED
Information
Message
The frequency domain data points must be harmonically related from dc to the
stop frequency. That is, stop = n × start, where n = number of points. If this
condition is not true when a low pass mode (step or impulse) is selected and
transform is turned on, the analyzer resets the start and stop frequencies. The
stop frequency is set close to the entered stop frequency, and the start frequency
is set equal to stop/n.
MEMORY FOR CURRENT SEQUENCE IS FULL
Error Number
132
All the memory in the sequence you are modifying is filled with instrument
commands.
MORE SLIDES NEEDED
Error Number
71
When you use a sliding load (in a user-defined calibration kit), you must set at
least three slide positions to complete the calibration.
NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
Error Number
69
The RESUME CAL SEQUENCE softkey is not valid unless a calibration is
already in progress. Start a new calibration.
NO DISK MEDIUM IN DRIVE
Error Number
41
You have no disk in the current disk unit. Insert a disk, or check the disk unit
number stored in the analyzer.
NO FAIL FOUND
Service Error
Number 114
The self-diagnose function of the instrument operates on an internal test failure.
At this time, no failure has been detected.
NO FILE(S) FOUND ON DISK
Error Number
45
No files of the type created by an analyzer store operation were found on the
disk or the disk drive is empty. If you requested a specific file title, that file was
not found on the disk.
NO IF FOUND: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL
Error Number
5
The first IF signal was not detected during pretune. Check the front panel R
channel jumper. If there is no visible problem with the jumper, refer to the
service guide for troubleshooting.
6-15
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
NO LIMIT LINES DISPLAYED
Error Number
144
You can turn limit lines on but they cannot be displayed on polar or Smith chart
display formats.
NO MARKER DELTA - SPAN NOT SET
Error Number
15
You must turn the delta marker mode on, with at least two markers displayed,
in order to use the MARKER → SPAN softkey function.
NO MEMORY AVAILABLE FOR INTERPOLATION
Error Number
123
You cannot perform interpolated error correction due to insufficient memory.
NO MEMORY AVAILABLE FOR SEQUENCING
Error Number
126
You cannot modify the sequence due to insufficient memory.
NO MODULE DATA FOR THIS PARAMETER
Information
Message
This message is displayed in Ecal service when there is no parameter data in
the ECal module.
NO PHASE LOCK: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL
Error Number
7
The first IF signal was detected at pretune, but phase lock could not be acquired.
Check the signal level to the R channel input to make sure it is −35 dBm or
higher. Refer to the service guide for troubleshooting.
NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL. CLEAR REGISTERS
Error Number
70
You cannot store a calibration set due to insufficient memory. You can free more
memory by clearing a saved instrument state from an internal register (which
may also delete an associated calibration set, if all the instrument states using
the calibration set have been deleted). You can store the saved instrument state
and calibration set to a disk before clearing them. After deleting the instrument
states, press Preset to run the memory packer.
NO MODULE DATA FOR ISOLATION STD
Information
Message
This message is displayed in ECal service when there is no isolation data in the
ECal module.
NOT ALLOWED DURING POWER METER CAL
Error Number
198
6-16
When the analyzer is performing a power meter calibration, the GPIB bus is
unavailable for other functions such as printing or plotting.
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK FOR STORE
Error Number
44
The store operation will overflow the available disk space. Insert a new disk or
purge files to create free disk space.
NO VALID MEMORY TRACE
Error Number
54
If you are going to display or otherwise use a memory trace, you must first store
a data trace to memory.
NO VALID STATE IN REGISTER
Error Number
55
You have requested the analyzer, over GPIB (or by sequencing), to load an
instrument state from an empty internal register.
OK TO ALTER CORRECTION CONSTANTS?
Error Number
186
This message is displayed as a prompt during operations when the correction
constants will be changed. Correction constants may be change in the
adjustment tests in the service menu.
ONLY LETTERS AND NUMBERS ARE ALLOWED
Error Number
43
You can only use alpha-numeric characters (and underscores) in disk file titles
or internal save register titles. Other symbols are not allowed, except for the
“underscore” symbol.
OPTIONAL FUNCTION; NOT INSTALLED
Error Number
1
The function you requested requires a capability provided by an option to the
standard analyzer. That option is not currently installed. (Refer to “Analyzer
Options Available” on page 7-3 for a description of the available options.)
OVERLAP! LIST TYPE CHANGED TO STEPPED
Error Number
211
The list type changed to stepped because one or more frequency segments in the
swept list table overlapped. Change the frequency ranges of the overlapping
segments and switch back to swept list mode.
OVERLOAD ON INPUT A, POWER REDUCED (ES only)
Error Number
58
See OVERLOAD ON INPUT R, POWER REDUCED (error number 57).
OVERLOAD ON INPUT B, POWER REDUCED (ES only)
Error Number
59
See OVERLOAD ON INPUT R, POWER REDUCED (error number 57).
6-17
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
OVERLOAD ON REFL PORT, POWER REDUCED (ET only)
Error Number
58
See OVERLOAD ON INPUT R, POWER REDUCED (error number 57).
OVERLOAD ON TRANS PORT, POWER REDUCED (ET only)
Error Number
59
See OVERLOAD ON INPUT R, POWER REDUCED (error number 57).
OVERLOAD ON INPUT R, POWER REDUCED
Error Number
57
You have exceeded approximately +14 dBm at one of the test ports. The RF
output power is automatically reduced to −85 dBm. The annotation P⇓ appears
in the left margin of the display to indicate that the power trip function has been
activated. When this occurs, reset the power to a lower level, then toggle the
softkey to switch on the power again.
PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR GPIO
Error Number
165
You have defined the parallel port as COPY for printing in the GPIB menu. To
access the parallel port for general purpose I/O (GPIO), set the selection to
PARALLEL [GPIO] .
PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR COPY
Error Number
167
You have defined the parallel port as general purpose I/O (GPIO) for sequencing.
The definition was made under the Local key menus. To access the parallel
port for copy, set the selection to PARALLEL [COPY] .
PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED
Error Number
4
An internal phase lock calibration routine is automatically executed at
power-on, preset, and any time a loss of phase lock is detected. This message
indicates that phase lock calibration was initiated and the first IF detected, but
a problem prevented the calibration from completing successfully. Refer to the
service guide and execute pretune correction test 48. This message may appear
if you connect a mixer between the RF output and R input before turning on
frequency offset mode. Ignore it: it will go away when you turn on frequency
offset. This message may also appear if you turn on frequency offset mode before
you define the offset.
PHASE LOCK LOST
Error Number
8
6-18
Phase lock was acquired but then lost. Refer to the service guide for
troubleshooting information.
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
PLOT ABORTED
Error Number
27
When you press the Local key, the analyzer aborts the plot in progress.
PLOTTER: not on, not connect, wrong addrs
Error Number
26
The plotter does not respond to control. Verify power to the plotter, and check
the GPIB connection between the analyzer and the plotter. Ensure that the
plotter address recognized by the analyzer matches the GPIB address set on the
plotter itself.
PLOTTER NOT READY-PINCH WHEELS UP
Error Number
28
The plotter pinch wheels clamp the paper in place. If you raise the pinch wheels,
the plotter indicates a “not ready” status on the bus.
POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK
Error Number
6
Phase lock has been achieved, but the source may be phase locked to the wrong
harmonic of the synthesizer. Perform the source pretune correction routine
documented in the “Adjustments and Correction Constants” chapter in the
service guide.
POWER SUPPLY HOT!
Error Number
21
The temperature sensors on the A8 post-regulator assembly have detected an
over-temperature condition. The power supplies regulated on the post-regulator
have been shut down.
POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN!
Error Number
22
One or more supplies on the A8 post-regulator assembly have been shut down
due to an over-current, over-voltage, or under-voltage condition.
POWER UNLEVELED
Error Number
179
There is either a hardware failure in the source or you have attempted to set the
power level too high. The analyzer allows the output power to be set higher or
lower than the specified available power range. However, these output powers
may be unleveled or unavailable. Check to see if the power level you set is
within specifications. If it is, refer to the service guide for troubleshooting.
PRESS [MENU], SELECT CW (IF) FREQ, THEN SWEPT LO
Error Number
161
When you are sweeping the RF and LO, the IF must be fixed.
6-19
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
PRINT ABORTED
Error Number
25
When you press the Local key, the analyzer aborts output to the printer.
print color not supported with EPSON
Error Number
178
You have defined the printer type as EPSON-P2. Color print is not supported
with this printer. The print will abort.
PRINTER: busy
Error Number
176
The parallel port printer is not accepting data.
PRINTER: error
Error Number
175
The parallel port printer is malfunctioning. The analyzer cannot complete the
copy function.
PRINTER: not connected
Error Number
173
There is no printer connected to the parallel port.
PRINTER: not handshaking
Error Number
177
The printer at the parallel port is not responding.
PRINTER: not on line
Error Number
172
The printer at the parallel port is not set on line.
PRINTER: not on, not connected, wrong addrs
Error Number
24
The printer does not respond to control. Verify power to the printer, and check
the GPIB connection between the analyzer and the printer. Ensure that the
printer address recognized by the analyzer matches the GPIB address set on the
printer itself.
PRINTER: paper error
Error Number
171
6-20
There is a paper-related problem with the parallel port printer such as a paper
jam or out-of-paper condition.
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
PRINTER: power off
Error Number
174
The power to the printer at the parallel port is off.
PRINTER: reset in progress
Information
Message
If the printer takes longer than a half-second to reset, this message will be
displayed until printer is finished with reset.
PRINT/PLOT IN PROGRESS, ABORT WITH LOCAL
Error Number
166
If a print or plot is in progress and you attempt a second print or plot, this
message is displayed and the second attempt is ignored. To abort a print or plot
in progress, press Local .
PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN!
Error Number
23
One or both of the probe power supplies have been shut down due to an
over-current, over-voltage, or under-voltage condition.
PROCESSING DISPLAY LIST
Information
Message
The display information is being processed for a screen print to a copy device
and stored in the copy spool buffer. During this time, the analyzer's resources
are dedicated to this task (which takes less than a few seconds).
PWR MTR NOT ON/CONNECTED OR WRONG ADDRS
Error Number
117
The power meter cannot be accessed by the analyzer. Verify that the power
meter address and model number set in the analyzer match the address and
model number of the actual power meter.
RANGE CAUSED POWER LVL CHANGE IN LIST
Error Number
213
The selected power range changed the power level of one or more segments in
the swept list table. Change the segment power or change the power range.
REQUESTED DATA NOT CURRENTLY AVAILABLE
Error Number
30
The analyzer does not currently contain the data you have requested. For
example, this condition occurs when you request error term arrays and no
calibration is active.
RIPPLE LIMIT TABLE EMPTY.
Information
Message
The ripple limit table does not have any frequency bands defined. Add at least
one frequency band to the ripple limit table for ripple testing.
6-21
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
SAVE FAILED. INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
Error Number
151
You cannot store an instrument state in an internal register due to insufficient
memory. Increase the available memory by clearing one or more save/recall
registers and pressing Preset , or by storing files to a disk.
SEGMENT #n POWER OUTSIDE RANGE LIMIT
Information
Message
The selected power range does not support the power level of one or more
segments in the swept list table. This message appears when swept list mode is
not on and reports the first segment that is out of range. Change the segment
power or change the power range.
SEGMENT #n START FREQ OVERLAPS PREVIOUS SEGMENT
Information
Message
A segment entered in the swept list table caused one or more frequency
segments to overlap. This message appears when swept list mode is not on and
reports the first segment that is overlapping another. Change the frequency
ranges of the overlapping segments.
SELECTED MODULE OUTSIDE START-STOP FREQ RANGE
Error Number
220
The start and stop frequency range is outside the limits of the ECal module.
Manually set the frequency limits to within the module range.
SELECTED SEQUENCE IS EMPTY
Error Number
124
The sequence you attempted to run does not contain instrument commands.
SELF TEST #n FAILED
Service Error
Number 112
Internal test #n has failed. Several internal test routines are executed at
instrument preset. The analyzer reports the first failure detected. Refer to the
service guide for troubleshooting information on internal tests and the
self-diagnose feature.
SEQUENCE ABORTED
Error Number
157
The sequence running was stopped prematurely when you pressed the Local
key.
SEQUENCE MAY HAVE CHANGED, CAN'T CONTINUE
Error Number
153
6-22
When you pause a sequence, you cannot continue it if you have modified it. You
must start the sequence again.
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
SLIDES ABORTED (MEMORY REALLOCATION)
Error Number
73
You cannot perform sliding load measurements due to insufficient memory.
Increase the available memory by clearing one or more save/recall registers and
pressing Preset , or by storing files to a disk and then deleting them from
internal memory.
SOURCE POWER DISABLED, EDIT LIST MODE TBL
Information
Message
When list power has been enabled and swept list mode is on, you will not be able
to change the power level using the Power key. To change the power level, edit
the swept list table.
SOURCE POWER TURNED OFF, RESET UNDER POWER MENU
Information
Message
You have exceeded the maximum power level at one of the inputs and power has
been automatically reduced. The annotation P⇓ indicates that power trip has
been activated. When this occurs, reset the power and then press Power
SOURCE PWR on OFF , to switch on the power.
STARTING COPY SPOOLER
Information
Message
The analyzer is beginning to output data from the spool buffer to the copy
device. The analyzer resumes normal operation; the data is being output to the
copy device in the background.
STOP/CW FREQ + OFFSET MUST BE < 3 GHz
Error Number
141
The output frequency of the mixer cannot violate the minimum/maximum
frequency of the analyzer.
SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW TIME SWEEP
Error Number
187
If you select external source auto or manual instrument mode and you do not
also select CW mode, the analyzer is automatically switched to CW.
SWEEP TIME INCREASED
Error Number
11
You have made instrument changes that cause the analyzer sweep time to be
automatically increased. Some parameter changes that cause an increase in
sweep time are narrower IF bandwidth, an increase in the number of points,
and a change in sweep type.
SWEEP TIME TOO FAST
Error Number
12
The fractional-N and digital IF circuits have lost synchronization. Refer to the
service guide for troubleshooting information.
6-23
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
SWEEP TRIGGER SET TO HOLD
Information
Message
The instrument is in a hold state and is no longer sweeping. To take a new
sweep, press Sweep Setup TRIGGER MENU SINGLE or
CONTINUOUS .
SYNTAX ERROR
Error Number
33
You have improperly formatted a GPIB command. Refer to the programmer’s
guide for proper command syntax.
SYST CTRL OR PASS CTRL IN LOCAL MENU
Error Number
36
The analyzer is in talker/listener mode. In this mode, the analyzer cannot
control a peripheral device on the bus. Use the local menu to change to system
controller or pass control mode.
TEST ABORTED
Error Number
113
You have prematurely stopped a service test.
THIS LIST FREQ INVALID IN HARM/3 GHZ RNG
Error Number
133
You have set frequencies in the list that are outside of the allowable frequency
range for harmonic measurements, or are greater than 3 GHz on instruments
without Option 006. Reduce the frequency range of the list.
TOO MANY NESTED SEQUENCES. SEQ ABORTED
Error Number
164
You can only nest sequences to a maximum level of six. The sequence will abort
if you nest more than six.
TOO MANY SEGMENTS OR POINTS
Error Number
50
You can have a maximum of 30 segments or 1601 points in frequency list mode.
In power meter calibrations, you can have a maximum of 12 segments for power
sensor cal factors and power loss functions.
TRANSFORM, GATE NOT ALLOWED
Error Number
16
You can perform a time domain transformation only in linear and CW sweep
types.
TROUBLE! CHECK SETUP AND START OVER
Service Error
Number 115
6-24
Your equipment setup for the adjustment procedure in progress is not correct.
Check the setup diagram and instructions in the service guide. Start the
procedure again.
Error Messages
Error Messages in Alphabetical Order
VALID ONLY FOR BILATERAL DEVICES
Information
Message
This message is displayed when an enhanced reflection calibration is initiated.
If the device tested is not a bilateral device, the enhanced reflection calibration
will cause errors in the measurement results.
A bilateral device has similar forward and reverse transmission characteristics.
Examples of bilateral devices are passive devices (filters, attenuators, and
switches). Most active devices (amplifiers) and some passive devices (isolators
and circulators) are not bilateral.
WAIT: ECal MODULE BEING READ
Information
Message
The data from ECal is being read by the network analyzer.
WAITING FOR CLEAN SWEEP
Information
Message
In single sweep mode, the instrument ensures that all changes to the
instrument state, if any, have been implemented before taking the sweep. The
command that you have initiated is being processed and will not be complete
until the new sweep is completed. An asterisk * is displayed in the left margin
until a complete fresh sweep has been taken.
WAITING FOR DISK
Information
Message
This message is displayed between the start and finish of a read or write
operation to a disk.
WAITING FOR GPIB CONTROL
Information
Message
You have instructed the analyzer to use pass control (USEPASC). When you
send the analyzer an instruction that requires active controller mode, the
analyzer requests control of the bus and simultaneously displays this message.
If the message remains, the system controller is not relinquishing the bus.
WRITE ATTEMPTED WITHOUT SELECTING INPUT TYPE
Error Number
32
You have sent the data header “#A” to the analyzer with no preceding input
command (such as INPUDATA). The instrument recognized the header but did
not know what type of data to receive. Refer to the programmer’s guide for
command syntax information.
WRONG DISK FORMAT, INITIALIZE DISK
Error Number
77
You have attempted to store, load, or read file titles, but your disk format does
not conform to the Logical Interchange Format (LIF) or DOS format. You must
initialize the disk before reading or writing to it.
6-25
Error Messages
Error Messages in Numerical Order
Error Messages in Numerical Order
Error
Number
Error
1
OPTIONAL FUNCTION; NOT INSTALLED
2
INVALID KEY
3
CORRECTION CONSTANTS NOT STORED
4
PHASE LOCK CAL FAILED
5
NO IF FOUND: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL
6
POSSIBLE FALSE LOCK
7
NO PHASE LOCK: CHECK R INPUT LEVEL
8
PHASE LOCK LOST
9
LIST TABLE EMPTY
10
CONTINUOUS SWITCHING NOT ALLOWED
11
SWEEP TIME INCREASED
12
SWEEP TIME TOO FAST
13
AVERAGING INVALID ON NON-RATIO MEASURE
14
FUNCTION NOT VALID
15
NO MARKER DELTA - SPAN NOT SET
16
TRANSFORM, GATE NOT ALLOWED
17
DEMODULATION NOT VALID
21
POWER SUPPLY HOT!
22
POWER SUPPLY SHUT DOWN!
23
PROBE POWER SHUT DOWN!
24
PRINTER: not on, not connect, wrong addrs
25
PRINT ABORTED
26
PLOTTER: not on, not connect, wrong addrs
27
PLOT ABORTED
28
PLOTTER NOT READY-PINCH WHEELS UP
30
REQUESTED DATA NOT CURRENTLY AVAILABLE
31
ADDRESSED TO TALK WITH NOTHING TO SAY
6-26
Error Messages
Error Messages in Numerical Order
Error
Number
Error
32
WRITE ATTEMPTED WITHOUT SELECTING INPUT TYPE
33
SYNTAX ERROR
34
BLOCK INPUT ERROR
35
BLOCK INPUT LENGTH ERROR
36
SYST CTRL OR PASS CTRL IN LOCAL MENU
37
ANOTHER SYSTEM CONTROLLER ON GPIB
38
DISK: not on, not connected, wrong addrs
39
DISK HARDWARE PROBLEM
40
DISK MEDIUM NOT INITIALIZED
41
NO DISK MEDIUM IN DRIVE
42
FIRST CHARACTER MUST BE A LETTER
43
ONLY LETTERS AND NUMBERS ARE ALLOWED
44
NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON DISK FOR STORE
45
NO FILE(S) FOUND ON DISK
46
ILLEGAL UNIT OR VOLUME NUMBER
47
INITIALIZATION FAILED
48
DISK IS WRITE PROTECTED
49
DISK WEAR-REPLACE DISK SOON
50
TOO MANY SEGMENTS OR POINTS
51
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
54
NO VALID MEMORY TRACE
55
NO VALID STATE IN REGISTER
56
INSTRUMENT STATE MEMORY CLEARED
57
OVERLOAD ON INPUT R, POWER REDUCED
58
OVERLOAD ON INPUT A, POWER REDUCED (ES only)
58
OVERLOAD ON REFL PORT, POWER REDUCED (ET only)
59
OVERLOAD ON INPUT B, POWER REDUCED (ES only)
59
OVERLOAD ON TRANS PORT, POWER REDUCED (ET only)
60
ANALOG INPUT OVERLOAD
61
8753 SOURCE PARAMETERS CHANGED
6-27
Error Messages
Error Messages in Numerical Order
Error
Number
Error
62
NOT VALID FOR PRESENT TEST SET
63
CALIBRATION REQUIRED
64
CURRENT PARAMETER NOT IN CAL SET
65
CORRECTION AND DOMAIN RESET
66
CORRECTION TURNED OFF
67
DOMAIN RESET
68
ADDITIONAL STANDARDS NEEDED
69
NO CALIBRATION CURRENTLY IN PROGRESS
70
NO SPACE FOR NEW CAL. CLEAR REGISTERS
71
MORE SLIDES NEEDED
72
EXCEEDED 7 STANDARDS PER CLASS
73
SLIDES ABORTED (MEMORY REALLOCATION)
74
CALIBRATION ABORTED
75
FORMAT NOT VALID FOR MEASUREMENT
77
WRONG DISK FORMAT, INITIALIZE DISK
111
DEADLOCK
112
SELF TEST #n FAILED
113
TEST ABORTED
114
NO FAIL FOUND
115
TROUBLE! CHECK SETUP AND START OVER
117
PWR MTR: NOT ON/CONNECTED OR WRONG ADDRS
119
DEVICE: not on, not connect, wrong addrs
123
NO MEMORY AVAILABLE FOR INTERPOLATION
124
SELECTED SEQUENCE IS EMPTY
125
DUPLICATING TO THIS SEQUENCE NOT ALLOWED
126
NO MEMORY AVAILABLE FOR SEQUENCING
127
CAN'T STORE/LOAD SEQUENCE, INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
130
D2/D1 INVALID WITH SINGLE CHANNEL
131
FUNCTION NOT VALID DURING MOD SEQUENCE
132
MEMORY FOR CURRENT SEQUENCE IS FULL
6-28
Error Messages
Error Messages in Numerical Order
Error
Number
Error
133
THIS LIST FREQ INVALID IN HARM/3 GHZ RNG
141
STOP/CW FREQ + OFFSET MUST BE < 3 GHz
144
NO LIMIT LINES DISPLAYED
145
SWEEP TYPE CHANGED TO LINEAR SWEEP
148
EXTERNAL SOURCE MODE REQUIRES CW TIME
150
LOG SWEEP REQUIRES 2 OCTAVE MINIMUM SPAN
151
SAVE FAILED / INSUFFICIENT MEMORY
152
D2/D1 INVALID: CH1 CH2 NUM PTS DIFFERENT
153
SEQUENCE MAY HAVE CHANGED, CAN'T CONTINUE
154
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY, PWR MTR CAL OFF
157
SEQUENCE ABORTED
159
CH1 (CH2) TARGET VALUE NOT FOUND
161
PRESS [MENU], SELECT CW (IF) FREQ, THEN SWEPT LO
162
EXT SRC: NOT ON/CONNECTED OR WRONG ADDR
163
FUNCTION ONLY VALID DURING MOD SEQUENCE
164
TOO MANY NESTED SEQUENCES. SEQ ABORTED
165
PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR GPIO
166
PRINT/PLOT IN PROGRESS, ABORT WITH LOCAL
167
PARALLEL PORT NOT AVAILABLE FOR COPY
168
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY FOR PRINT/PLOT
169
GPIB COPY IN PROGRESS, ABORT WITH LOCAL
170
COPY: device not responding; copy aborted
171
PRINTER: paper error
172
PRINTER: not on line
173
PRINTER: not connected
174
PRINTER: power off
175
PRINTER: error
176
PRINTER: busy
177
PRINTER: not handshaking
178
print color not supported with EPSON
6-29
Error Messages
Error Messages in Numerical Order
Error
Number
Error
179
POWER UNLEVELED
180
DOS NAME LIMITED TO 8 CHARS + 3 CHAR EXTENSION
181
BAD FREQ FOR HARMONIC OR FREQ OFFSET
182
LIST MODE OFF: INVALID WITH LO FREQ
183
BATTERY FAILED. STATE MEMORY CLEARED
184
BATTERY LOW! STORE SAVE REGS TO DISK
185
CANNOT FORMAT DOS DISKS ON THIS DRIVE
186
OK TO ALTER CORRECTION CONSTANTS?
187
SWEEP MODE CHANGED TO CW TIME SWEEP
188
DIRECTORY FULL
189
DISK READ/WRITE ERROR
190
DISK MESSAGE LENGTH ERROR
191
EXT SOURCE NOT READY FOR TRIGGER
192
FILE NOT FOUND
193
ASCII: MISSING 'BEGIN' statement
194
ASCII: MISSING 'CITIFILE' statement
195
ASCII: MISSING 'DATA' statement
196
ASCII: MISSING 'VAR' statement
197
FILE NOT FOUND OR WRONG TYPE
198
NOT ALLOWED DURING POWER METER CAL
199
CANNOT MODIFY FACTORY PRESET
200
ALL REGISTERS HAVE BEEN USED
201
FUNCTION NOT VALID FOR INTERNAL MEMORY
202
FUNCTION NOT AVAILABLE
203
CANNOT READ/WRITE HFS FILE SYSTEM
204
FREQS CANNOT BE CHANGED, TOO MANY POINTS
205
LIMIT TABLE EMPTY
206
ARGUMENT OUT OF RANGE
209
SWEEP MUST BE STEPPED FOR FREQUENCY OFFSET MODE?
211
OVERLAP!LIST TYPE CHANGED TO STEPPED
6-30
Error Messages
Error Messages in Numerical Order
Error
Number
Error
212
ANALOG BUS DISABLED IN 6 KHZ IF BW
213
RANGE CAUSED POWER LVL CHANGE IN LIST
214
CORRECTION ON: AUX CHANNEL(S) RESTORED
215
CAUTION: CORRECTION OFF: AUX CHANNEL(S) DISABLED
218
CAUTION: FLOPPY DISK IS FULL
219
ECal MODULE NOT IN RF PATH
220
SELECTED MODULE OUTSIDE START-STOP FREQ RANGE
221
ECal SELECT OTHER MODULE
222
ECal MODULE NOT RESPONDING
223
ISOL AVGS < SWP AVGS
224
ECal FAILED
6-31
Error Messages
Error Messages in Numerical Order
6-32
7 Options and Accessories
7-1
Options and Accessories
Using This Chapter
Using This Chapter
This chapter contains information on the following subjects:
• “Analyzer Options Available” on page 7-3
• “Accessories Available” on page 7-5
7-2
Options and Accessories
Analyzer Options Available
Analyzer Options Available
Option 1D5, High Stability Frequency Reference
Option 1D5 offers ±0.05 ppm temperature stability from 0 to 55 °C (referenced to 25 °C),
and aging rate of ±0.5 ppm per year (typical).
Option 002, Harmonic Mode
Provides measurement of second or third harmonics of the test device's fundamental
output signal. Frequency and power sweep are supported in this mode. Harmonic
frequencies can be measured up to the maximum frequency of the receiver. However, the
fundamental frequency may not be lower than 16 MHz.
Option 004, Source Attenuator (ET Only)
This option adds a 55 dB step attenuator that extends the output power range by allowing
lower power levels.
Option 006, 6 GHz Operation
Option 006 extends the maximum source and receiver frequency of the analyzer to 6 GHz.
Option 010, Time Domain
This option displays the time domain response of a network by computing the inverse
Fourier transform of the frequency domain response. It shows the response of a test device
as a function of time or distance. Displaying the reflection coefficient of a network versus
time determines the magnitude and location of each discontinuity. Displaying the
transmission coefficient of a network versus time determines the characteristics of
individual transmission paths. Time domain operation retains all accuracy inherent with
the correction that is active in the frequency domain. The time domain capability is useful
for the design and characterization of such devices as SAW filters, SAW delay lines, RF
cables, and RF antennas.
Option 011, Delete Built-In Test Set (ES Only)
Option 011 allows front panel access to the source output and the R, A, and B sampler
inputs. The transfer switch, couplers, and bias tees have been removed. Therefore,
external accessories are required to make most measurements.
Option 014, Configurable Test Set (ES Only)
This option adds SMA connectors on the front panel for access to various source output
and receiver input signal paths, including direct access to receivers. When jumpers are in
place, the analyzer performs like a standard 8753ES network analyzer except that the
maximum source output power is reduced by 2 dB. Not compatible with Option 011 or 075.
7-3
Options and Accessories
Analyzer Options Available
Option 075, 75 Ω Impedance (ES Only)
Option 075 offers 75 ohm impedance bridges with type-N (f) test port connectors.
Option 1CM, Rack Mount Flange Kit Without Handles
Option 1CM is a rack mount kit containing a pair of flanges and the necessary hardware to
mount the instrument, with handles detached, in an equipment rack with 482.6-mm (19
inches) horizontal spacing.
Option 1CP, Rack Mount Flange Kit With Handles
Option 1CP is a rack mount kit containing a pair of flanges and the necessary hardware to
mount the instrument with handles attached in an equipment rack with 482.6 mm (19
inches) spacing.
Service and Support Options
Agilent Technologies offers many repair and calibration options for your analyzer. Contact
the nearest Agilent Technologies sales or service office for information on options available
for your analyzer.
7-4
Options and Accessories
Accessories Available
Accessories Available
For accessories not listed in this section, refer to the configuration guide for your analyzer
or refer to the following Internet site:
www.agilent.com/find/8753
Measurement Accessories
Accessories are available in these connector types: 3.5-mm, 7-mm, 50 Ω type-N, 7-16, 75 Ω
type-N, and type-F. A standard 8753ES or one equipped with Option 014 or Option 075
includes a built-in test set. A calibration kit and test port cables should be added for a
complete measurement system. For an 8753ES Option 011 network analyzer, you also
need to add a test set or power splitter and bridge.
Test port cables are used to connect to the device under test. Calibration kits include
standards, such as open/short circuits and loads, which are measured by the network
analyzer for increased measurement accuracy. Electronic calibration (ECal) modules are
used with the ECal PC interface kit to provide automated calibration (in place of a
calibration kit). A verification kit is used to verify system performance.
Test-Port Cables: 7-mm
• 11857D 50 Ω 7-mm test-port return cables
A pair of 610-mm (24-in) cables, for use with the standard 8753ES network analyzer or
the 85406A and 85047A test sets.
Test-Port Cables: Type-N
• 11857B 75 Ω type-N test-port cables
A pair of 610-mm (24-in) cables, for use with the standard 8753ES Option 075 or the
85046B S-parameter test set.
• 11857F 75 Ω type-N test-port cables
Includes one 75 Ω type-N (m) to type-F (m) cable, and one type-N (m) to type-F (f).
Calibration Kits
Choose a kit for each connector type to be used.
• 85031B 7-mm calibration kit
Contains fixed loads, open and short circuits.
• 85032B type-N calibration kit
Contains fixed loads, open and short circuits and 7-mm to type-N adapters.
— Option 001
Deletes 7-mm to type-N adapters.
These adapters are not needed when this kit is used exclusively with an 8753ET
system.
7-5
Options and Accessories
Accessories Available
• 85032F 50 Ω type-N calibration kit (30 kHz to 9 GHz)
Contains a female and male open and short, female and male load standard, and a
torque wrench.
— Option 500
Adds four type-N to 7- mm adapter.
• 85033D 3.5-mm calibration kit
Contains fixed loads, one-piece open and short circuits, and 7-mm to 3.5-mm adapters
for both connector sexes for use with 7-mm test-port cables.
— Option 001
Deletes 7-mm to 3.5-mm adapters.
These adapters are not needed when this kit is used exclusively with an 8753ET
system.
— Option 002
Adds 50 Ω type-N to 3.5-mm adapters for the 8753ET only.
• 85033E 50 Ω 3.5-mm calibration kit (30kHz to 9 GHz)
Contains a female and male open and short, female and male load standard, and a
torque wrench.
— Option 400
Adds four 3.5 mm to Type-N adapters.
— Option 500
Adds four 3.5 mm to 7- mm adapters.
• 85038A 50 Ω 7-16 calibration kit (30 kHz to 7.5 GHz)
Contains male and female open and short circuits, fixed loads and wrenches.
• 85038F 50 Ω 7-16 calibration kit (30 kHz to 7.5 GHz)
Contains a female fixed load, open and short circuits, and 7-16 (f) to 7-16 (f) adapter.
• 85038M 50 Ω 7-16 calibration kit (30 kHz to 7.5 GHz)
Contains a male fixed load, open and short circuits, and a 7-16 (m) to 7-16 (m) adapter.
• 85036B 75 Ω type-N calibration kit
Contains fixed loads, open and short circuits, and 50 Ω type-N to 70 Ω type-N adapters
(m) and (f).
• 85039B 75 Ω type-F calibration kit
Contains 75 Ω male/female open, short and load standards and precision adapters
type-N (f) to F (m), type-N (m) to F (f), type-F (m) to F (m) and type-F (f) to F (m)
adapters.
— Option 00M male standards kit
Includes male open, short and load standards and precision F (m) to F (m) adapter.
— Option 00F female standards kit
Includes female open, short and load standards and precision F (f) to F (f) adapter
7-6
Options and Accessories
Accessories Available
RF electronic calibration (ECal) modules and PC software
This product family provides electronic calibration (ECal) capability. With ECal, the usual
calibration kit standards are replaced by one solid-state calibration module. A full two-port
calibration can be done with a single connection, with reduced errors and wear on
connectors. ECal requires the 85097A/B PC interface kit, an 85090-series calibration
module with the appropriate connector type, and a network analyzer with firmware
version 7.68 and above.
NOTE
For network analyzers with firmware versions between 7.60 and 7.68, a PC
with Windows1 95, 98, 2000 or NT 4.0 loaded with software from the
85097A/B PC interface kit is used to perform the ECal calibration.
• 85097A/B ECal PC interface kit and software
— Contains PC interface module for connecting an ECal module to a PC or a network
analyzer (with firmware version 7.68 and above) and PC ECal control software.
• 85091B RF ECal module (30 kHz to 9 GHz), 7-mm connectors
• 85092B RF ECal module (30 kHz to 9 GHz), 50 Ω type-N (m) to 50 Ω type-N (f)
connectors
— Option 00F substitutes type-N (f) to type-N (f) RF ECal module.
— Option 00M substitutes type-N (m) to type-N (m) RF ECal module.
— Option 00A adds:
— type-N (f) to type-N (f) adapter
— type-N (m) to type-N (m) adapter
• 85093B RF ECal module (30 kHz to 9 GHz), 3.5-mm (m) to 3.5-mm (f) connectors
— Option 00F substitutes 3.5-mm (f) to 3.5-mm (f) RF ECal module.
— Option 00M substitutes 3.5-mm (m) to 3.5-mm (m) RF ECal module.
— Option 00A adds:
— 3.5-mm (f) to 3.5-mm (f) adapter
— 3.5-mm (m) to 3.5-mm (m) adapter
• 85098B RF ECal module (30 kHz to 7.5 GHz), 7-16 (m) to 7-16 (f) connectors
— Option 00F substitutes 7-16 (f) to 7-16 (f) RF ECal module.
— Option 00M substitutes 7-16 (m) to 7-16 (m) RF ECal module.
— Option 00A adds:
— 7-16 (f) to 7-16 (f) adapter
— 7-16 (m) to 7-16 (m) adapter
1. Windows is a U.S. registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
7-7
Options and Accessories
Accessories Available
• 85096B RF ECal module (30 kHz to 3 GHz), 75 Ω type-N (m) to 75 Ω type-N (f)
connectors
— Option 00F substitutes module with two type-N female connectors.
— Option 00M substitutes module with two type-N male connectors.
— Option 00A adds:
— type-N (m) to type-N (m) adapter
— type-N (f) to type-N (f) adapter
• 85099B RF ECal module (30 kHz to 3 GHz), 75 Ω type-F (m) to type-F (f) connectors
— Option 00F substitutes module with two type-F female connectors.
— Option 00M substitutes module with two type-F male connectors.
— Option 00A adds:
— type-F (m) to type-F (m) adapter
— type-F (f) to type-F (f) adapter
• N4431A 4-Port RF ECal module (300 kHz to 9 GHz)
— Option 010 provices for all four ports with 3.5-mm (f) connectors.
— Option 020 provides for all four ports with Type-N 50Ω (f) connectors.
— Option UK6 adds commercial calibration certificate with measured data.
— Mixed Connector Options.
Table 7-1
N4431A Mixed Connector Options
Connector Type
Port A Option
Port B Option
Port C Option
Port D Option
3.5 mm (f)
101
201
301
401
3.5 mm (m)
102
202
302
402
Type-N 50Ω (f)
103
203
303
403
Type-N 50Ω (m)
104
204
304
404
7-16 (f)a
105
205
305
405
7-16 (m)a
106
206
306
406
a. Limits ECal module high frequency to 7.5 GHz
7-8
Options and Accessories
Accessories Available
Verification Kit
85029B 7-mm verification kit
Includes attenuators and mismatch attenuator with data on a 3.5 inch disk for use in
confirming accuracy enhanced system measurement performance, traceable to national
standards. Test procedure is provided in the service guide. For use with a standard
8753ES, or with systems including an 8753ES Option 011 and an 85046A, or 85047A test
set. This verification kit may also be used with an 8753ET with the addition of two type-N
(m) to 7-mm adapters. The 85031B 7-mm calibration kit and 11857D test-port cables are
also required.
Minimum Loss Pads and Adapters
• 11525A 7-mm to 50 Ω type-N (m) adapter
Adapts from 7-mm to 50 Ω type-N male.
• 11852B 50 to 75 Ω minimum loss pad (300 kHz to 3 GHz)
Adapts from 50 Ω type-N female to 75 Ω type-N male. Nominal insertion loss is 5.7 dB.
— Option 004 provides 50 Ω type-N male and 75 Ω type-N female connectors.
• 11853A 50 Ω type-N accessory kit
Contains type-N (m) to type-N (m) adapters, type-N (f) to type-N (f) adapters, and
type-N male and female shorts.
• 11854A 50 Ω BNC accessory kit
Contains type-N to BNC adapters for both connector sexes and a BNC male short.
• 11855A 75 Ω type-N accessory kit
Contains 75 Ω type-N male to type-N male adapters, type-N female to type-N female
adapters, type-N male and female shorts, and type-N male termination.
7-9
Options and Accessories
Accessories Available
• 11856A 75 Ω BNC accessory kit
Contains 75 Ω type-N to 75 Ω BNC adapters for both connector sexes, a BNC male short
and BNC male termination.
• 11906A 7-16 to 7-16 adapter kit
Contains one 7-16(m) to 7-16(m) adapter, one 7-16(f) to 7-16(f) adapter, and two 7-16(m)
to 7-16(f) adapters.
• 11906B 7-16 to 50 Ω type-N adapter kit
Contains adapters for type-N (m) to 7-16(m), type-N (m) to 7-16(f), type-N (f) to 7-16(m),
and type-N (f) to 7-16(f).
• 11906C 7-16 to 7-mm adapter kit
Contains two 7-mm to 7-16(m) adapters and two 7-mm to 7-16(f) adapters.
• 11906D 7-16 to 3.5-mm adapter kit
Contains adapters for 3.5-mm(m) to 7-16(m), 3.5-mm(m) to 7-16(f), 3.5-mm(f) to
7-16(m), and 3.5-mm(f) to 7-16(f) adapters.
Test Configuration Accessories
RF Limiter
Externally attaches to one or both test ports of the analyzer. Provides protection against
potential high-power transients from external devices.
• 11930A 7-mm RF limiter, DC to 6 GHz, max power +28 dBm typical
• 11930B 50 Ω type-N RF limiter, 5 MHz to 6 GHz, max power +28 dBm typical
Probe
85024A high-frequency probe
Provides high-impedance in-circuit test capability, from 300 kHz to 3 GHz.
Amplifier
8347A RF power amplifier
Used to set leveled output power or increase system dynamic range, from 100 kHz to
3 GHz.
8347A RF power amplifier
Used to set leveled output power or increase system dynamic range, from 100 kHz to
3 GHz.
Power Meters
For more accurate control of leveled test-port power. Requires a 8480-series power sensor
and an GPIB cable for connection to the 8753ET or 8753ES.
• E4418B single-channel power meter
• E4419B dual-channel power meter
7-10
Options and Accessories
Accessories Available
Power Sensors
For more accurate control of leveled test-port power. Requires a 436A, 437B, 438B, or
E4419B power meter and an GPIB cable for connection to the network analyzer.
• 8481A 10 MHz to 18 GHz, type-N (m), 100 mwatt
• 8481B 10 MHz to 18 GHz, type-N (m), 25 watt
• 8482A 100 kHz to 4.2 GHz, type-N (m), 100 mwatt
• 8482B 100 kHz to 4.2 GHZ, type-N (m), 25 watt
• 8483A 100 kHz to 2 GHZ, 75 Ω type-N (m), 100 mwatt
• 8485A 50 MHz to 26.5 GHz, 3.5-mm (m), 100 mwatt
7-11
Options and Accessories
Accessories Available
Keyboard Template
The analyzer is designed to accept most PC-AT-compatible keyboards with a mini-DIN
connector. The keyboard can be used for control or data input, such as titling files. The
information found on the analyzer keyboard template (part number 08753-80220) is also
listed in Table 7-2.
Table 7-2 Keyboard Template Definition
Keyboard
Key Name
Analyzer Function
Keyboard
Key Name
Analyzer Function
F1
Softkey 1
Shift F8
CAL
F2
Softkey 2
Shift F9
MARKER
F3
Softkey 3
Shift F10
MARKER SEARCH
F4
Softkey 4
Shift F11
MARKER FUNCTION
F5
Softkey 5
Shift F12
SEQ
F6
Softkey 6
Ctrl F1
CHAN 3
F7
Softkey 7
Ctrl F2
CHAN 4
F8
Softkey 8
Ctrl F3
POWER
F9
x1
Ctrl F4
SWEEP SETUP
F10
k/m
Ctrl F5
START
F11
M/µ
Ctrl F6
STOP
F12
G/n
Ctrl F7
CENTER
Shift F1
CHAN 1
Ctrl F8
SPAN
Shift F2
CHAN 2
Ctrl F9
SYSTEM
Shift F3
MEAS
Ctrl F10
LOCAL
Shift F4
FORMAT
Ctrl F11
COPY
Shift F5
SCALE
Ctrl F12
SAVE/RECALL
Shift F6
DISPLAY
Alt F1
TITLE
Shift F7
AVG
7-12
8 Preset State and Memory Allocation
8-1
Preset State and Memory Allocation
Preset State
Preset State
When the Preset key is pressed, the analyzer reverts to a known state called the factory
preset state. This state is defined in Table 8-1. There are subtle differences between the
preset state and the power-up state. These differences are documented in Table 8-3. If
power to non-volatile memory is lost, the analyzer will have certain parameters set to
default settings. The affected parameters are shown in Table 8-4.
When line power is cycled, the analyzer performs a self-test routine. Upon successful
completion of that routine, the instrument state is set to the conditions shown in Table 8-1.
The same conditions are true following a “PRES;” or “RST;” command over GPIB, although
the self-test routines are not executed.
You also can create an instrument state and define it as your user preset state:
1. Set the instrument state to your desired preset conditions.
2. Save the state (save/recall menu).
3. Rename that register to “UPRESET”.
4. Press Preset PRESET:USER.
The Preset key is now toggled to the USER selection and your defined instrument state
will be recalled each time you press Preset and when you turn power on. You can toggle
back to the factory preset instrument state by pressing Preset and selecting FACTORY .
NOTE
8-2
When you send a preset over GPIB, you will always get the factory preset.
You can, however, activate the user-defined preset over GPIB by recalling the
register in which it is stored.
Preset State and Memory Allocation
Preset State
Table 8-1 Preset Conditions
Preset Conditions
Preset Value
Analyzer Mode
Analyzer Mode
Network Analyzer Mode
Frequency Offset Operation
Off
Offset Value
0
Harmonic Operation
Off
Stimulus Conditions
Sweep Type
Linear Frequency
Display Mode
Start/Stop
Trigger Type
Continuous
External Trigger
Off
Sweep Time
87.5 ms, Auto Mode
Start Frequency
ES: 30 kHz. ET: 300 kHz
Frequency Span
ES: 2999.97 MHz
ET: 2999.7 MHz
Frequency Span (Opt. 006)
ES: 5999.97 MHz
ET: 5999.7 MHz
Start Time
0
Time Span
75.375 ms
CW Frequency
1000 MHz
Source Power
ES: 0 dBm
ET: −10 dBm
Power Slope (ES Only)
0 dB/GHz; Off
Start Power
−15.0 dBm
Power Span
25 dB
Coupled Channel Power
On
Source Power
On
Coupled Channels
On
Coupled Port Power (ES Only)
On
Power Range (ES Only)
Auto; Range 0
Number of Points
201
List Freq Sweep Mode
Swept
8-3
Preset State and Memory Allocation
Preset State
Table 8-1 Preset Conditions (Continued)
Preset Conditions
Preset Value
Frequency List
Frequency List
Empty
Edit Mode
Start/Stop, Number of Points
Response Conditions
Parameter (ES)
Channel 1: S11
Channel 2: S21
Channel 3: S12
Channel 4: S22
Parameter (ET)
Channel 1: Refl
Channel 2: Trans
Channel 3: Refl
Channel 4: Trans
Conversion
Off
Format
Log Magnitude (all inputs)
Display
Data
Color Selections
Same as before Preset
Dual Channel
Off
Active Channel
Channel 1
Auxiliary Channel
Disabled
Frequency Blank
Disabled
Test Set Switch (ES)
Continuous
Split Display
2X
Intensity
100%
Beeper: Done
On
Beeper: Warning
Off
D2/D1 to D2
Off
Title
Channel 1 = Empty
Channel 2 = Empty
8-4
IF Bandwidth
3700 Hz
IF Averaging Factor
16; Off
Preset State and Memory Allocation
Preset State
Table 8-1 Preset Conditions (Continued)
Preset Conditions
Preset Value
Smoothing Aperture
1% SPAN; Off
Phase Offset
0 Degrees
Electrical Delay
0 ns
Scale/Division
10 dB/Division
Calibration
Correction
Off
Calibration Type
None
Calibration Kit (ES)
7-mm, type-N 75-ohm (Option 075)
Calibration Kit (ET)
Type-N 50 Ohms
Enhanced Reflection Calibration
Off
System Z0
50 Ohms
Velocity Factor
1
Extensions
Off
Port 1
0s
Port 2
0s
Input A
0s
Input B
0s
Chop A and B (ES)
On
Chop RFL & TRN (ET)
On
Power Meter Calibration
Off
Number of Readings
1
Power Loss Correction
Off
Sensor A/B
A
Interpolated Error Correction
On
Electronic Calibration (ECal)
Module
A (information may not be loaded)
Omit Isolation
On
Isolation Averages
10
Manual Thru
Off
8-5
Preset State and Memory Allocation
Preset State
Table 8-1 Preset Conditions (Continued)
Preset Conditions
Preset Value
Markers (coupled)
Markers 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
1 GHz; All Markers Off
Last Active Marker
1
Reference Marker
None
Marker Mode
Continuous
Display Markers
On
Delta Marker Mode
Off
Coupling
On
Marker Search
Off
Marker Target Value
−3 dB
Marker Width Value
−3 dB; Off
Marker Tracking
Off
Marker Stimulus Offset
0 Hz
Marker Value Offset
0 dB
Marker Aux Offset (Phase)
0 Degrees
Marker Statistics
Off
Polar Marker
Lin Mkr
Smith Marker
R+jX Mkr
Limit Menu
Limit Lines
Limit Lines
Off
Limit Testing
Off
Limit List
Empty
Edit Mode
Upper/Lower Limits
Stimulus Offset
0 Hz
Amplitude Offset
0 dB
Limit Type
Sloping Line
Beep Fail
Off
Ripple Limit
Ripple Limit
8-6
Off
Preset State and Memory Allocation
Preset State
Table 8-1 Preset Conditions (Continued)
Preset Conditions
Ripple Test
Preset Value
Off
Bandwidth Limit
Bandwidth Test
Off
Bandwidth Display
Off
Bandwidth Marker
Off
Time Domain
Transform
Off
Transform Type
Bandpass
Start Transform
−20 nanoseconds
Transform Span
40 nanoseconds
Gating
Off
Gate Shape
Normal
Gate Start
−10 nanoseconds
Gate Span
20 nanoseconds
Demodulation
Off
Window
Normal
Use Memory
Off
System Parameters
GPIB Addresses
Last Active State
GPIB Mode
Last Active State
Clock Time Stamp
On
Preset: Factory/User
Last Selected State
Copy Configuration
Parallel Port
Last Active State
Plotter Type
Last Active State
Plotter Port
Last Active State
Plotter Baud Rate
Last Active State
Plotter Handshake
Last Active State
8-7
Preset State and Memory Allocation
Preset State
Table 8-1 Preset Conditions (Continued)
Preset Conditions
Preset Value
GPIB Address
Last Active State
Printer Type
Last Active State
Printer Port
Last Active State
Printer Baud Rate
Last Active State
Printer Handshake
Last Active State
Printer GPIB Address
Last Active State
Disk Save Configuration (Define Store)
Data Array
Off
Raw Data Array
Off
Formatted Data Array
Off
Graphics
Off
Data Only
Off
Directory Size
Defaulta
Save Using
Binary
Select Disk
Internal Memory
Disk Format
LIF
Sequencingb
Loop Counter
0
TTL OUT
High
Service Modes
8-8
GPIB Diagnostic
Off
Source Phase Lock
Loop On
Sampler Correction
On
Spur Avoidance
On
Aux Input Resolution
Low
Analog Bus Node
11 (Aux Input)
Preset State and Memory Allocation
Preset State
Table 8-1 Preset Conditions (Continued)
Preset Conditions
Preset Value
Plot
Plot Data
On
Plot Memory
On
Plot Graticule
On
Plot Text
On
Plot Marker
On
Autofeed
On
Plot Quadrant
Full Page
Scale Plot
Full
Plot Speed
Fast
Pen Number:
Ch1/Ch3 Data
2
Ch2/Ch4 Data
3
Ch1/Ch3 Memory
5
Ch2/Ch4 Memory
6
Ch1/Ch3 Graticule
1
Ch2/Ch4 Graticule
1
Ch1/Ch3 Text
7
Ch2/Ch4 Text
7
Ch1/Ch3 Marker
7
Ch2/Ch4 Marker
7
Line Type:
Ch1/Ch3 Data
7
Ch2/Ch4 Data
7
Ch1/Ch3 Memory
7
Ch2/Ch4 Memory
7
Print
Printer Mode
Last Active State
Auto-Feed
On
8-9
Preset State and Memory Allocation
Preset State
Table 8-1 Preset Conditions (Continued)
Preset Conditions
Preset Value
Printer Colors
Ch1/Ch3 Data
Magenta
Ch1/Ch3 Mem
Green
Ch2/Ch4 Data
Blue
Ch2/Ch4 Mem
Red
Graticule
Cyan
Warning
Black
Text
Black
Reference Line
Black
a. The directory size is calculated as 0.013% of the floppy disk size
(which is ≈256) or 0.005% of the hard disk size.
b. Pressing preset turns off sequencing modify (edit) mode and stops any running
sequence.
Table 8-2 Preset Conditions
Format Table
Scale
Reference
Position
8-10
Value
Log Magnitude (dB)
10.0
5.0
0.0
Phase (degree)
90.0
5.0
0.0
Group Delay (ns)
10.0
5.0
0.0
Smith Chart
1.00
–
1.0
Polar
1.00
–
1.0
Linear Magnitude
0.1
0.0
0.0
Real
0.2
5.0
0.0
Imaginary
0.2
5.0
0.0
SWR
1.00
0.0
1.0
Preset State and Memory Allocation
Preset State
Table 8-3 Power-On Conditions (versus Preset)
GPIB MODE
Talker/listener.
SAVE REGISTERS
Power meter calibration data and calibration data not
associated with an instrument state are cleared.
COLOR DISPLAY
Default color values.
SEQUENCES
Sequence 1 through 5 are erased.
DISK DIRECTORY
Cleared.
Table 8-4 Results of Power Loss to Non-Volatile Memory
GPIB ADDRESSES are set to the following defaults:
ANALYZER
16
USER DISPLAY
17
PLOTTER
5
PRINTER
1
POWER METER
13
DISK
0
DISK UNIT NUMBER
0
DISK VOLUME NUMBER
0
POWER METER TYPE is set to 438A/437
INTERNAL REGISTER TITLESa are set to defaults: REG1 through REG32
EXTERNAL REGISTER TITLESa (store files) are set to defaults: FILE1 through FILE 5
PRINT TYPE is set to default: MONOCHROME
PRINTING/PLOTTING SETUPS are set to the following defaults:
PARALLEL PORT
COPY
PLOTTER TYPE
PLOTTER
PLOTTER PORT
GPIB
PLOTTER BAUD RATE
9600
PLOTTER HANDSHAKE
Xon-Xoff
PRINTER TYPE
DESKJET
PRINTER PORT
PARALLEL
PRINTER BAUD RATE
19200
PRINTER HANDSHAKE
Xon-Xoff
a. Only applies to GPIB operation.
8-11
Preset State and Memory Allocation
Memory Allocation
Memory Allocation
The analyzer is capable of saving complete instrument states for later retrieval. It can
store these instrument states into the internal memory, to the internal disk, or to an
external disk. This section contains information on the following subjects:
• “Types of Memory and Data Storage” on page 8-12
• “Determining Memory Requirements” on page 8-14
• “Storing Data to Disk” on page 8-16
• “Conserving Memory” on page 8-18
• “Using Saved Calibration Sets” on page 8-18
Types of Memory and Data Storage
The analyzer utilizes two types of internal memory and can also utilize the internal disk
drive or be connected to an external disk drive:
Volatile Memory
This is dynamic read/write memory, of approximately 4 Mbytes, that contains all of the
parameters that make up the current instrument state. An instrument state consists of all
the stimulus and response parameters that set up the analyzer to make a specific
measurement.
Some data that you may think is part of the instrument state (such as calibration data and
memory traces) are actually stored in non-volatile memory. See “Non-Volatile Memory” to
read more about the differences.
Volatile memory is cleared upon a power cycle of the instrument and, except as noted, upon
instrument preset.
Non-Volatile Memory
This is CMOS read/write memory that is protected by a battery to provide storage of data
when line power to the instrument is turned off. With this battery protection, data can be
retained in memory for ≈ 250 days at 70 °C and for ≈ 10 years at 25 °C (characteristically).
Non-volatile memory consists of a block of user-allocated memory and a block of fixed
memory.
The user-allocated memory is available for you to save the following data:
•
•
•
•
•
•
instrument states
measurement calibration data
power meter calibration data
user calibration kit definitions
memory traces
user preset
8-12
Preset State and Memory Allocation
Memory Allocation
NOTE
Even though calibration data is stored in non-volatile memory, if the
associated instrument state is not saved, you will not be able to retrieve the
calibration data after a power cycle.
The fixed memory is used to store the following data (you cannot change where this data is
stored and it does not affect your memory availability for storing user-allocated data):
• GPIB addresses
• copy configuration (printer and plotter type, port, baud rate, handshake)
• power meter type (436/437/438)
• display colors
• sequence titles
• sixth sequence
• power sensor calibration factors and loss tables
• user-defined calibration kits
• system Z0
• factory preset
• GPIB configuration
• display intensity default
The maximum number of instrument states, calibrations, and memory traces that can
reside in non-volatile memory at any one time is limited to 31 instrument states, 128
calibrations (4 per instrument state, including the present instrument state), and 64
memory traces (4 per instrument state, including the present instrument state).
In addition, the number of instrument states and associated calibrations and memory
traces are limited by the available memory. To display the amount of unused memory on
the analyzer, press Save/Recall . (Be sure you have selected INTERNAL MEMORY as
your disk type.) In the upper right-hand portion of the display, the value displayed as
Bytes free: is the unused non-volatile memory. When you save to the internal memory,
you will see the number of bytes free decrease. When you delete files, the number of bytes
free increases. There is a maximum of 2 MBytes available.
If you have deleted registers since the last time the instrument was preset, the bytes
available for you to use may be less than the actual “bytes free” that is displayed. Deleting
registers to increase the available memory will work in cases where the registers being
deleted and the registers needing to be added are of the same standard size (such as
instrument states not having calibrations associated with them). In certain other cases,
however, you may have to press Preset after deleting registers so that the “bytes free”
value equals the available memory value. During a preset, the analyzer runs a memory
packer that de-fragments the free memory into one contiguous block.
8-13
Preset State and Memory Allocation
Memory Allocation
Determining Memory Requirements
Table 8-5 shows the memory requirements of calibration arrays and memory trace arrays
to help you approximate memory requirements. For example, add the following memory
requirements:
• a full 2-port calibration with 801 points (58 k)
• the memory trace array (4.9 k)
• the instrument state (6 k)
The total memory requirement is 68.9 kbytes. There is sufficient memory to store
29 calibrations of this type. However, the same calibration performed with 1601 points and
2 channels uncoupled would require 255 k bytes:
• a full 2-port calibration with 1601 points, two channels, uncoupled (230 k)
• the memory trace array (19 k)
• the instrument state (6 k)
Only 2 of these calibrations could reside in memory before the available memory would be
depleted.
8-14
Preset State and Memory Allocation
Memory Allocation
Table 8-5 Memory Requirements of Calibration and Memory Trace Arrays
Variable
Approximate Totals (Bytes)
Data Length (Bytes)a
401 pts
801 pts
1 chan
1601 pts
1 chan
2 chans
Calibration Arrays
Response
N × 6 + 52
2.5 k
5k
10 k
19 k
Response and
isolation
N × 6 × 2 + 52
5k
10 k
19 k
38 k
N × 6 × 3 + 52
7k
14 k
29 k
58 k
N × 6 × 12 + 52
29 k
58 k
115 k
230 k
(Nc × 2 × number channelsd) +208
1k
1.8 k
3.4 k
6.6 k
N × 6 + 52
2.5 k
4.9 k
9.7 k
19 k
6k
6k
6k
6k
1-Port
2-Port
Interpolated cal
Power Meter Calb
Same as above in addition to
regular cal
Measurement Data
Memory trace arrayb
Instrument Statee
a.
b.
c.
d.
N = number of points
This variable is allocated once per active channel.
The number of points that was set at the time the cal was turned on.
If the channels are coupled, this number is always 1. If the channels are uncoupled, this
number refers to the number of channels that have power meter cal on.
e. This value may change with different firmware revisions.
The analyzer attempts to allocate memory at the start of a calibration. If insufficient
memory is available, an error message is displayed. It is possible that the CMOS memory
might be fragmented due to the sequence of saving and deleting states of various sizes. So
another alternative would be to store the current state to disk and then press Preset . The
analyzer runs a memory packer which might regain some previously inaccessible memory.
If memory is still inadequate, delete an instrument state and restart the calibration.
8-15
Preset State and Memory Allocation
Memory Allocation
Storing Data to Disk
You can use the internal disk drive or connect an external disk drive for storage of
instrument states, calibration data, measurement data, and plot files. (Refer to the
“Printing, Plotting, and Saving Measurement Results” chapter in the user’s guide for more
information on saving measurement data and plot files.)
The analyzer displays one file name per stored instrument state when you list the disk
directory. In reality, several files are actually stored to the disk when you store the
instrument state. Thus, when the disk directory is accessed from a remote system
controller, the directory will show several files associated with a particular saved state.
The maximum number of files that you can store on a disk depends on the directory size.
You can define the directory size when you format a disk. For the default directory size for
floppy disks and hard disks, refer to Table 8-1.
The maximum number of instrument states and calibrations that can reside on a disk is
limited by the available disk space. To see the available disk space displayed on the
analyzer, press Save/Recall . (Be sure you have selected either INTERNAL DISK or
EXTERNAL DISK depending on your disk type.) In the upper right-hand portion of the
display, the value displayed as Bytes free: is the available disk space. If your disk is
formatted in LIF, this value is the largest contiguous block of disk space. Since the
analyzer is reporting the largest contiguous block of disk space, you may or may not see
the bytes free number change when you delete files. If your disk is formatted in DOS, the
number reported as bytes free is the total available disk space. That number is updated
whenever you save to or delete files from the disk.
A disk file created by the analyzer appends a suffix to the file name. (This is on the
analyzer's directory and is not visible.) The suffix consists of one or two characters: the
first character is the file type and the second is a data index. (Each suffix character is
defined in Table 8-6.)
8-16
Preset State and Memory Allocation
Memory Allocation
Table 8-6 Suffix Character Definitions
Char 1
Definition
I, P
Instrument statea
W
Four-channel instrument state
G
Graphics
D
R
F
Error corrected data
Raw data
Formatted data
Char 2
Definition
1
Display graphics
0
Graphics index
1
Channel 1
2
Channel 2
3
Channel 3
4
Channel 4
1 to 4
Channel 1/3, raw arrays 1 to 4b
5 to 8
Channel 2/4, raw arrays 5 to 8
1
Channel 1
2
Channel 2
3
Channel 3
4
Channel 4
C
Cal
K
Cal kit
1
Cal data, channel 1
0
Stimulus state
1 to 9
Coefficients 1 to 9
A
Coefficient 10
B
Coefficient 11
C
Coefficient 12
2
Cal data, channel 2
0 to C
same as channel 1
M
Memory trace data
1
Channel 1
2
Channel 2
3
Channel 3
4
Channel 4
1
Channel 1
2
Channel 2
S
Error corrected data (S2P)c
a. These are two-channel instrument states readable by previous firmware versions.
b. Files R1 through R8 will be saved if a full two-port calibration is active. Otherwise, only R1
is saved for Channel 1, R5 for Channel 3, R2 for Channel 2, and R6 for Channel 4.
c. These files are written only when a 2-port error correction (full 2-port or TRL) has been
applied.
8-17
Preset State and Memory Allocation
Memory Allocation
If correction is on at the time of an external store, the calibration set is stored to disk.
(Note that inactive calibrations are not stored to disk.) When an instrument state is loaded
into the analyzer from disk, the stimulus and response parameters are restored first. If
correction is on for the loaded state, the analyzer will load a calibration set from disk that
carries the same title as the one stored for the instrument state.
Conserving Memory
If you are concerned about conserving memory, either internal memory or external disk
space, some of the most memory-intensive operations include:
• two-port error correction
• interpolated error correction
• 1601 measurement points
• using time domain
• saving data arrays and graphics with the instrument state
Using Saved Calibration Sets
When you are saving to internal memory (CMOS, non-volatile memory), calibration sets
are linked to the instrument state and measurement parameter for which the calibration
was done. Therefore a saved calibration can be used for multiple instrument states as long
as the measurement parameter, frequency range, and number of points are the same. A
full 2-port calibration is valid for any S-parameter measurement with the same frequency
range and number of points. When an instrument state is deleted from memory, the
associated calibration set is also deleted if it is unused by any other state.
The following hints will help you avoid potential problems:
• If a measurement is saved with calibration and interpolated calibration on, it will be
restored with interpolated calibration on.
• A calibration stored from one instrument and recalled by a different one will be invalid.
To ensure maximum accuracy, always recalibrate in these circumstances.
• No record is kept in memory of the temperature when a calibration set was stored.
Instrument characteristics change as a function of temperature, and a calibration
stored at one temperature may be inaccurate if recalled and used at a different
temperature. Refer to Chapter 2 , “8753ET Specifications and Characteristics,” for
allowable temperature ranges for individual specifications.
• The analyzer can read disk files created by the 8753B/C/D and the 8753B/C/D can read
files created by the 8753E. Note, however, that only those cal sets supported by the
8753B/C/D can be read by an 8753B/C/D from a disk created by an 8753E. A disk file
translator is available to make 8753A disk files compatible with 8753B files. These files
can then be read by the 8753E. Contact your local Agilent Technologies sales and
service office for a copy of this disk file translator.
8-18
Preset State and Memory Allocation
Memory Allocation
Clearing Memory
For security reasons, you may have the need to clear the network analyzer’s internal
memory. As explained in “Types of Memory and Data Storage” on page 8-12, the internal
memory consists of the 2 Mbyte non-volatile CMOS memory and the 4 Mbyte volatile
memory (RAM). Clearing the internal memory clears all instrument states and measured
data from the network analyzer.
To clear the internal memory:
1. Press SERVICE MENU , PEEK/POKE , RESET MEMORY , and then press Preset .
This step clears the 2 Mbyte non-volatile CMOS memory.
2. Turn the network analyzer power off and then back on.
This step clears the 4 Mbyte volatile memory (RAM).
8-19
Preset State and Memory Allocation
Memory Allocation
8-20
9 Understanding the CITIfile Data
Format
9-1
Understanding the CITIfile Data Format
Using This Chapter
Using This Chapter
The descriptions and examples shown in this chapter demonstrate how CITIfile may be
used to store and transfer both measurement information and data. The use of a single,
common format will allow data to be more easily moved between instruments and
computers.
This chapter contains the following sections:
• “The CITIfile Data Format” on page 9-3
— Description and Overview
— Definition Of CITIfile Terms
— CITIfile Examples
• “CITIfile Keywords” on page 9-8
• “Useful Calculations” on page 9-11
NOTE
9-2
For many data processing applications, the S2P file (filename.S1 and
filename.S2) may provide a more convenient format.
Understanding the CITIfile Data Format
The CITIfile Data Format
The CITIfile Data Format
Description and Overview
CITIfile is a standardized data format, used for exchanging data between different
computers and instruments. CITIfile is an abbreviation for “Common Instrumentation
Transfer and Interchange file”. This standard has been a group effort between instrument
designers and designers of computer-aided design programs. As much as possible, CITIfile
meets current needs for data transfer, and it was designed to be expandable so it can meet
future needs.
CITIfile defines how the data inside an ASCII package is formatted. Since it is not tied to
any particular disk or transfer format, it can be used with any operating system (BASIC,
DOS, UNIX, etc.), with any disk format (LIF, DOS, HFS, etc.), or with any transfer
mechanism (disk, LAN, GPIB, etc.). By careful implementation of the standard,
instruments and software packages using CITIfile are able to load and work with data
created on another instrument or computer. It is possible, for example, for a network
analyzer to directly load and display data measured on a scalar analyzer, or for a software
package running on a computer to read data measured on the network analyzer.
Data Formats
There are two main types of data formats: binary and ASCII. CITIfile uses the ASCII text
format. While this format does take up more bytes of space than a binary format, ASCII
data is a transportable, standard type of format which is supported by all operating
systems. In addition, the ASCII format is accepted by most text editors. This allows files to
be created, examined, and edited easily, making CITIfile easier to test and debug.
File and Operating System Formats
CITIfile was designed to be independent of the data storage mechanism, and therefore may
be implemented for any file system. However transfer between file systems may sometimes
be necessary. Any commercially available software that has the ability to transfer ASCII
files between systems may be used to transfer CITIfile data.
Definition of CITIfile Terms
This section will define the following terms:
• package
• header
• data array
• keyword
9-3
Understanding the CITIfile Data Format
The CITIfile Data Format
A CITIfile Package
A typical package is divided into two parts: The first part, the header, is made up of
keywords and setup information. The second part, the data, usually consists of one or more
arrays of data. Example 1 shows the basic structure of a CITIfile package:
Example 1, A CITIfile Package
The “header” part CITIFILE A.01.00
NAME MEMORY
VAR FREQ MAG 3
DATA S RI
The “data” part
BEGIN
-3.54545E-2, -1.38601E-3
0.23491E-3, -1.39883QE-3
2.00382E-3, -1.40022E-3
END
When stored in a disk file there may be more than one CITIfile package. With the 8510
network analyzer, for example, storing a “memory all” will save all eight of the memories
held in the instrument. This results in a single file which contains eight CITIfile packages.
The CITIfile Header
The header section contains information about the data that will follow. It may also
include information about the setup of the instrument that measured the data. For
example, the header may include information such as:
• CITIfile version number
• Network analyzer model number
• Firmware revision currently installed in the analyzer
• Type of Data
• Data Format
• Measurement parameters
• Start and stop frequencies
• Number of sample points
The CITIfile header shown in Example 1 has just the bare minimum of information
necessary; no instrument setup information was included.
An Array of Data
An array is numeric data that is arranged with one data element per line. In the Smith
chart and polar formats, the data is in real and imaginary pairs. In all other formats, the
data is still in pairs, but the second term of the pair is 0E0. All information is true
formatted data in the same format as on the analyzer display (dB, SWR, etc.).
9-4
Understanding the CITIfile Data Format
The CITIfile Data Format
A CITIfile package may contain more than one array of data. Arrays of data start after the
BEGIN keyword, and the END keyword will follow the last data element in an array. A
CITIfile package does not necessarily need to include data arrays; for instance, CITIfile
could be used to store the current state of an instrument. In that case the keywords VAR,
DATA, BEGIN, and END would not be required.
CITIfile Keyword
Keywords are always the first word on a new line. They are always one continuous word
without embedded spaces. A listing of all the keywords used in the latest A.01.01 version
of CITIfile is shown in “CITIfile Keywords.” When reading a CITIfile, unrecognized
keywords should be ignored. This allows new keywords to be added, without affecting an
older program or instrument that might not use the new keywords. The older instrument
or program can still use the rest of the data in the CITIfile as it did before. Ignoring
unknown keywords allows backwards compatibility to be maintained.
CITIfile Examples
Example 2, An 8510 Display Memory File
Example 2 shows a simple file that contains no frequency information. Some instruments
do not keep frequency information for display memory data, so this information is not
included in the CITIfile package. Note that instrument-specific information (#NA=
Network Analyzer information) is also stored in this file. This convention allows the
designer to define keywords that are particular to his or her particular implementation.
Example:
CITIFILE A.01.00
#NA VERSION HP8510B.05.00
NAME MEMORY
#NA REGISTER 1
VAR FREQ MAG 5
DATA S RI
BEGIN
-1.31189E-3,-1.47980E-3
-3.67867E-3,-0.67782E-3
-3.43990E-3,0.58746E-3
-2.70664E-4,-9.76175E-4
0.65892E-4,-9.61571E-4
END
Example 3, 8510 Data file
Example 3 shows a CITIfile package created from the data register of an 8510 Network
Analyzer. In this case 10 points of real and imaginary data was stored, and frequency
information was recorded in a segment list table.
Example:
CITIFILE A.01.00
#NA VERSION HP8510B.05.00
9-5
Understanding the CITIfile Data Format
The CITIfile Data Format
NAME DATA
#NA REGISTER 1
VAR FREQ MAG 10
DATA S[1,1] RI
SEG_LIST_BEGIN
SEG 1000000000 4000000000 10
SEG_LIST_END
BEGIN
0.86303E-1,-8.98651E-1
8.97491E-1,3.06915E-1
-4.96887E-1,7.87323E-1
-5.65338E-1,-7.05291E-1
8.94287E-1,-4.25537E-1
1.77551E-1,8.96606E-1
-9.35028E-1,-1.10504E-1
3.69079E-1,-9.13787E-1
7.80120E-1,5.37841E-1
-7.78350E-1,5.72082E-1
END
Example 4, 8510 3-Term Frequency List Cal Set File
Example 4 shows how CITIfile may be used to store instrument setup information. In the
case of an 8510 Cal Set, a limited instrument state is needed in order to return the
instrument to the same state that it was in when the calibration was done. Three arrays of
error correction data are defined by using three DATA statements. Some instruments
require these arrays to be in the proper order, from E1 to E3. In general, CITIfile
implementations should strive to handle data arrays that are arranged in any order.
Example:
CITIFILE A.01.00
#NA VERSION HP8510B.05.00
NAME CAL_SET
#NA REGISTER 1
VAR FREQ MAG 4
DATA E[1] RI
DATA E[2] RI
DATA E[3] RI
#NA SWEEP_TIME 9.999987E-2
#NA POWER1 1.0E1
#NA POWER2 1.0E1
#NA PARAMS 2
#NA CAL_TYPE 3
#NA POWER_SLOPE 0.0E0
#NA SLOPE_MODE 0
#NA TRIM_SWEEP 0
#NA SWEEP_MODE 4
#NA LOWPASS_FLAG -1
#NA FREQ_INFO 1
#NA SPAN 1000000000 3000000000 4
9-6
Understanding the CITIfile Data Format
The CITIfile Data Format
#NA DUPLICATES 0
#NA ARB_SEG 1000000000 1000000000 1
#NA ARB_SEG 2000000000 3000000000 3
VAR_LIST_BEGIN
1000000000
2000000000
2500000000
3000000000
VAR_LIST_END
BEGIN
1.12134E-3,1.73103E-3
4.23145E-3,-5.36775E-3
-0.56815E-3,5.32650E-3
-1.85942E-3,-4.07981E-3
END
BEGIN
2.03895E-2,-0.82674E-2
-4.21371E-2,-0.24871E-2
0.21038E-2,-3.06778E-2
1.20315E-2,5.99861E-2
END
BEGIN
4.45404E-1,4.31518E-1
8.34777E-1,-1.33056E-1
-7.09137E-1,5.58410E-1
4.84252E-1,-8.07098E-1
END
When an instrument’s frequency list mode is used, as it was in Example 4, a list of
frequencies is stored in the file after the VAR_LIST_BEGIN statement. The unsorted
frequency list segments used by this instrument to create the VAR_LIST_BEGIN data are
defined in the #NA ARB_SEG statements.
9-7
Understanding the CITIfile Data Format
CITIfile Keywords
CITIfile Keywords
Keyword
Explanation and Examples
CITIFILE
CITIFILE A.01.01 identifies the file as a CITIfile, and
indicates the revision level of the file. The CITIfile
keyword and revision code must precede any other
keywords. The CITIfile keyword at the beginning of the
package assures the device reading the file that the data
that follows is in the CITIfile format. The revision number
allows for future extensions of the CITIfile standard. The
revision code shown here following the CITIfile keyword
indicates that the machine writing this file is using the
A.01.01 version of CITIfile as defined here. Any future
extensions of CITIfile will increment the revision code.
NAME
NAME CAL_SET allows the current CITIfile “package” to
be named. The name of the package should be a single
word with no embedded spaces. A list of standard package
names follows:
Label
Definition.
RAW_DATA
Uncorrected data.
DATA
Data that has been error corrected.When only a single
data array exists, it should be named DATA.
FORMATTED
Corrected and formatted data.
MEMORY
Data trace stored for comparison purposes.
CAL_SET
Coefficients used for error correction.
CAL_KIT
Description of the standards used.
DELAY_TABLE
Delay coefficients for calibration.
VAR
VAR FREQ MAG 201 defines the name of the independent
variable (FREQ), the format of values in a
VAR_LIST_BEGIN table (MAG, if used), and the number
of data points (201).Typical names for the independent
variable are FREQ (in Hz), TIME (in seconds), and
POWER (in dBm). For the VAR_LIST_BEGIN table, only
the “MAG” format is supported at this point. # #NA
POWER1 1.0E1 allows variables specific to a particular
type of device to be defined. The pound sign (#) tells the
device reading the file that the following variable is for a
particular device. The “NA” shown here indicates that the
information is for a Network Analyzer. This convention
allows new devices to be defined without fear of conflict
with keywords for previously defined devices. The device
identifier (i.e. NA) may be any number of characters.
9-8
Understanding the CITIfile Data Format
CITIfile Keywords
SEG_LIST_BEGIN
SEG_LIST_BEGIN indicates that a list of segments for
the independent variable follow. Format for the segments
is: [segment type] [start] [stop] [number of points]. The
current implementation only supports a single segment. If
there is more than one segment, the VAR_LIST_BEGIN
construct is used. CITIfile revision A.01.00 supports only
the SEG (linear segment) segment type.
SEG_LIST_END
SEG_LIST_END defines the end of a list of independent
variable segments.
VAR_LIST_BEGIN
VAR_LIST_BEGIN indicates that a list of the values for
the independent variable (declared in the VAR statement)
follow. Only the MAG format is supported in revision
A.01.00.
VAR_LIST_END
VAR_LIST_END defines the end of a list of values for the
independent variable.
DATA
DATA S[1,1] RI defines the name of an array of data that
will be read later in the current CITIfile package, and the
format that the data will be in. Multiple arrays of data are
supported by using standard array indexing. Versions
A.01.00 and A.01.01 of CITIfile only support the RI (real
and imaginary) format, and a maximum of two array
indexes. Commonly used array names include the
following: “S” for “S parameter” Example: S[2,1] “E” for
“Error term” Example: E[1] “USER” for “User parameter”
Example: USER[1] “VOLTAGE” Example: VOLTAGE[1]
“VOLTAGE_RATIO” for a ratio of Example:
VOLTAGE_RATIO[1,0] two voltages (A/R).
9-9
Understanding the CITIfile Data Format
CITIfile Keywords
CONSTANT
CONSTANT [name] [value] allows for the recording of
values which don’t change when the independent variable
changes.
CONSTANTs are part of the main CITIfile definition.
Users must not define their own CONSTANTs. Use the
#KEYWORD device specification to create your own
KEYWORD instead. The #NA device specification is an
example of this. No constants were defined for revision
A.01.00 of CITIfile. CITIfile revision A.01.01 defined the
following constant:
CONSTANTs are part of the main CITIfile definition.
Users must not define their own CONSTANTs. Use the
#KEYWORD device specification to create your own
KEYWORD instead. The #NA device specification is an
example of this. No constants were defined for revision
A.01.00 of CITIfile. CITIfile revision A.01.01 defined the
following constant:
CONSTANT TIME [year] [month] [day] [hour] [min] [secs]
Example:
COMMENT
YEAR
MONTH
DAY
HOUR
MINUTE
SECONDS
CONSTANT TIME
1999
02
26
17
33
53.25
• The COMMENT statement is not absolutely required, but is highly recommended to aid
readability.
• The year should always be the full four digits (“1999” is correct, but “99” is not). This is
to avoid problems with the year 2000, when the shortened version of the year will be
“00.”
• The hour value should be in 24-hour “military” time.
• When writing a CITIfile and the fractional seconds value is zero, then the “seconds”
value may be printed either with or without a decimal point: either “47.0” or “47” would
be acceptable. When reading a CITIfile, the seconds value should always be read as if it
were a floating point number.
9-10
Understanding the CITIfile Data Format
Useful Calculations
Useful Calculations
This section contains information on computing frequency points and expressing CITIfile
data in other data formats.
Computing Frequency Points
In CITIfile, the frequency data is not listed point by point, only the start and stop values
are given. If you are using a spreadsheet program, you can create a new frequency column
to the left of the data pairs. Use the following formula to obtain each frequency point:
Fn = Fstart + {(n-1) * [(Fstop - Fstart) / (# of points - 1)]}
where:
Fstart = Start Frequency
Fstop = Stop Frequency
Fn = Frequency point with n being an integer
# of points = number of sample points per sweep
Here is an example of how this formula may be entered:
F1 = 30E3 + {(1-1) * [(6E9 - 30E3) / (201 - 1)]} = 30E3 = 30 kHz
F2 = 30E3 + {(2-1) * [(6E9 - 30E3) / (201 - 1)]} = 30E6 = 30 MHz
F201 = 30E3 + {(201 - 1) * [(6E9 - 30E3) / (201 - 1)]} = 6E9 = 6 GHz
Once these cells are entered, copy the formula to the remaining data points, and the
frequency will be indicated for each row.
9-11
Understanding the CITIfile Data Format
Useful Calculations
Expressing CITIfile Data in Other Data Formats
CITIfile data is represented in real and imaginary pairs. Equations can be used to express
this information in logarithmic magnitude, phase, polar, and Smith chart formats. Refer to
the following table for these equations.
Desired Format
Mathematical Equationa
Microsoft Excel Commandb
Log Magnitude
20*Log10((Re2 + Im2)) 1/2
=20*LOG10(SQRT((SUMSQ(ReCell 1,Im Cell 1)))) (dB)
Phase
tan-1(Im/Re) or arctan (Im/Re)
ATAN2(ReCell 1, ImCell 1)*180/PI() (Degree)
Polar
Magnitude = ((Re2 + Im2)) 1/2
Magnitude = (SQRT((SUMSQ(ReCell 1,Im Cell 1)))
Phase = tan-1(Im/Re) or
Phase = ATAN2(ReCell 1, ImCell 1)*180/PI()
arctan (Im/Re)
Smith Chart
Resistance =
Resistance =
(Marker)
(1 - Re2-Im2) /
((1-POWER(ReCell 1,2)-POWER(ImCell 1,2)) /
((1 -Re) 2+Im2)) * Z0
(POWER((1- ReCell 1),2)+POWER(ImCell 1,2))) * Z Cell 1
Reactance =
Reactance =
(2*Im) /
(2*ImCell 1) /
((1 - Re) 2+Im2)) * Z0
(POWER((1- ReCell 1),2)+POWER(ImCell 1,2)))*Z Cell 1
a.
b.
9-12
Re = real. Im = imaginary.
The references to ReCell 1, ImCell 1, and Z Cell 1 refer to the real and imaginary data pair numeric values
that have been entered into specific cells in the Microsoft Excel spread sheet.
Understanding the CITIfile Data Format
Useful Calculations
Example Data
This example shows how the following CITIfile data for a three-point trace can be
expressed in other data formats.
CITIFILE A.01.00
#NA VERSION HP8753E.07.12
NAME DATA
VAR FREQ MAG 3.0000
DATA S[11] RI
SEG_LIST_BEGIN
SEG 1550000000 1570000000 3.0000
SEG_LIST_END
BEGIN
Table 9-1 Data Values
Calculated Smith
Chart Readings
Calculated Polar
Readings
Real Value Imag Value Calculated Calculated Resistance Reactance Magnitude Phase
LogMag
Phase
4.43Ε−02
−4.52Ε−01
−6.8593
−84.4025
35.5204
−40.4294
0.4539
−84.4025
−6.32Ε−02
−4.47Ε−01
−6.9150
−98.0545
29.9477
−33.5840
0.4510
−98.0545
−1.66Ε−01
−4.38Ε−01
−6.5847
−110.7272
25.1562
−28.2510
0.4685
−110.727
Table 9-2 Marker Reading Values
Log Mag
(Marker)
Phase
(Marker)
S11 Smith
Chart
Resistance
(Marker)
S11 Smith
Chart
Reactance
(Marker)
Polar
Magnitude
(Marker)
−6.859
−84.403
35.520
−40.429
454.98mU
−6.915
−98.055
29.948
−33.584
451.07mU
−6.585
−110.737
25.156
−28.251
468.56mU
9-13
Understanding the CITIfile Data Format
Useful Calculations
9-14
10 Determining System Measurement
Uncertainties
10-1
Determining System Measurement Uncertainties
Introduction
Introduction
In any measurement, certain measurement errors associated with the system add
uncertainty to the measured results. This uncertainty defines how accurately a device
under test (DUT) can be measured. This chapter describes how the various network
analyzer measurement error sources contribute to uncertainties in the magnitude and
phase measurements of both transmission and reflection.
Network analysis measurement errors can be separated into two types: raw and residual.
The raw error terms are the errors associated with the uncorrected system. Network
analyzer errors can be classified as systematic (repeatable), random (non-repeatable), and
drift. The residual error terms are the errors that remain after a measurement calibration.
The error correction procedure, also called measurement calibration, measures a set of
calibration devices with known characteristics. It uses the measurement results to
effectively remove systematic errors, using the vector math capabilities of the analyzer.
Differences between calibration standard measured and modeled responses yield residual
errors. The residual systematic errors remain after error correction, primarily due to the
limitations of how accurately the electrical characteristics of the calibration devices can be
defined and determined. Random errors cannot be corrected because their contribution is
not constant between calibration and measurement. However, the effects of random errors
can be reduced through averaging. Drift errors are caused by ambient temperature
variation and component aging. The residual systematic errors along with the random and
drift errors continue to affect measurements after error correction, adding an uncertainty
to the measurement results. Therefore, measurement uncertainty is defined as the
combination of the residual systematic (repeatable), random (non-repeatable), and drift
errors in the measurement system after error correction.
The following measurement uncertainty equations show the relationship of the systematic,
random, and drift errors. These are useful for predicting overall measurement
performance.
10-2
Determining System Measurement Uncertainties
Sources of Measurement Errors
Sources of Measurement Errors
Measurement errors are made up of systematic errors, random errors, and drift errors.
Each of these measurement error types is discussed in this section.
Sources of Systematic Errors
The residual (after measurement calibration) systematic errors result from imperfections
in the calibration standards. All measurements are affected by dynamic accuracy. For
reflection measurements, the associated residual errors are residual directivity, residual
source match, residual load match, and residual reflection tracking. For transmission
measurements, the additional residual errors are residual crosstalk, residual source
match, residual load match, and residual transmission tracking.
The listing below shows the abbreviations used for residual systematic errors that are in
the uncertainty equations.
• EDF = forward residual directivity
• ESF = forward residual source match
• ERF = forward residual reflection tracking
• EXF = forward crosstalk
• ELF = forward load match
• ETF = forward transmission tracking
• EDR = reverse residual directivity
• ESR = reverse residual source match
• ERR = reverse residual reflection tracking
• EXR = reverse crosstalk
• ELR = reverse load match
• ETR = reverse transmission tracking
• AM = magnitude dynamic accuracy
• AP = phase dynamic accuracy
Dynamic accuracy includes errors during internal self-calibration routines, gain
compression in the microwave frequency converter (sampler) at high signal levels, errors
generated in the synchronous detectors, localized non-linearities in the IF filter system,
and from LO leakage into the IF signal paths.
10-3
Determining System Measurement Uncertainties
Sources of Measurement Errors
Sources of Random Errors
The random error sources are noise, connector repeatability and interconnecting cable
stability. There are two types of noise in any measurement system: low level noise (noise
floor) and high level noise (trace noise).
Low level noise is the broadband noise floor of the receiver which can be reduced through
averaging or by changing the IF bandwidth.
High level noise or trace noise is due to the noise floor, the phase noise of the LO source
inside the test set, or by reducing the IF bandwidth.
Connector repeatability is the random variation encountered when connecting a pair of RF
connectors. Variations in both reflection and transmission can be observed.
Cable stability is dependent on the cable used and the amount of cable movement between
calibration and measurement.
The listing below shows the abbreviations used for random errors in the error models and
uncertainty equations.
• NF = noise floor
• NT = trace noise
• CR1 = port 1 cable reflection stability
• CTM1 = port 1 cable magnitude transmission stability
• CTP1 = port 1 cable phase transmission stability
• CR2 = port 2 cable reflection stability
• CTM2 = port 2 cable magnitude transmission stability
• CTP2 = port 2 cable phase transmission stability
• RR1 = port 1 connector reflection repeatability
• RT1 = port 1 connector transmission repeatability
• RR2 = port 2 connector reflection repeatability
• RT2 = port 2 connector transmission repeatability
10-4
Determining System Measurement Uncertainties
Determining Expected System Performance
Determining Expected System Performance
Improper connection techniques and contact surfaces can degrade measurement accuracy.
Proper connection techniques include using a torque wrench with proper torque limits,
ensuring that the connector pin depths meet specifications, ensuring that the center
conductor of sliding loads is properly set, and observing proper handling procedures for
beadless airlines.
Contact surface errors are caused by improper cleaning procedures, scratches, worn
plating, and rough seating.
If proper connection techniques and connector care is observed, Table 10-1 provides an
indication of connector repeatability.
Table 10-1 Connector Repeatability (RR1, RR2, RT1, and RT2)
Connector Type
Frequency Range
Connector Type
Repeatability
2.4-mm
Frequency Range
Repeatability
3.5-mm
0 to 2 GHz
0.0002
0 to 2 GHz
0.0001
2 to 20 GHz
0.0004
2 to 8 GHz
0.0003
20 to 36 GHz
0.0006
8 to 20 GHz
0.0006
36 to 40 GHz
0.0008
20 to 26.5 GHz
0.0010
7-mm
Type-N
0 to 2 GHz
0.0001
0 to 2 GHz
0.0006
2 to 8 GHz
0.0003
2 to 8 GHz
0.0006
8 to 18 GHz
0.0006
8 to 18 GHz
0.0010
Type-F
0 to 3 GHz
Waveguide
0.0006
0 to 40 GHz
0.0002
10-5
Determining System Measurement Uncertainties
Determining Cable Stability Terms (CR1, CR2, CTM1, CTM2, CTP1, CTP2)
Determining Cable Stability Terms
(CR1, CR2, CTM1, CTM2, CTP1, CTP2)
Cable stability is dependent on the cable used and the amount of cable movement between
calibration and measurement. Values for cable reflection stability are determined by
connecting a fixed load to the free end of the cable and measuring the change in reflection
coefficient after flexing the cable through the normal range of cable movement for a
particular setup. Cable transmission stability is determined by connecting a short to the
free end of the cable and measuring the change in reflection coefficient due to changes in
cable position.
Figure 10-1, Figure 10-2, and Figure 10-3 show an example that demonstrates the
concepts useful in determining cable stability. In each case, a cable (part number
8120-4779) was connected to port 1, with a fixed load connected to the free end. A reference
trace is obtained by measuring S11 with the free end held close to port 2 and storing the
results in memory. Two additional S11 measurements are made; one with the cable flexed
out to its straight position and the other with the cable positioned back to the same
location as reference trace. The flexed position demonstrates the effect of moving the cable
after calibration, the repeatability trace in Figure 10-1 demonstrates the stability of the
cable when moved to its original position.
Figure 10-1 Cable Stability with Fixed Load Connected
Figure 10-1 demonstrates the concepts useful in determining cable reflection stability. A
fixed load is connected to the free end. The DATA-MEM feature provides an indication of
the cable reflection stability. A 60-dB peak on the chart yields a reflection stability
estimated as 10(−60/20) or 0.001.
10-6
Determining System Measurement Uncertainties
Determining Cable Stability Terms (CR1, CR2, CTM1, CTM2, CTP1, CTP2)
Figure 10-2 Cable Stability with a Short Connected
Figure 10-2 and Figure 10-3 demonstrate the concepts useful in determining cable
transmission stability. A short is connected to the free end. The DATA/MEM feature
provides an indication of the two-way cable transmission stability. The one-way
transmission magnitude stability is determined by dividing the two-way magnitude
measurement by two before it is converted to linear. A 0.013-dB peak on the chart yields
transmission magnitude stability estimated as 10(0.013/40) −1 or 0.00075. The one-way
transmission phase stability is determined by dividing the two-way phase measurement
by two.
Figure 10-3 Cable Stability with a Short Connected
Cable movement often has a much larger effect on phase measurements than magnitude
measurements.
10-7
Determining System Measurement Uncertainties
Measurement Uncertainty Equations
Measurement Uncertainty Equations
Any measurement result is the vector sum of the actual test device response plus all error
terms. The precise effect of each error term depends on its magnitude and phase
relationship to the actual test device response. When the phase of an error response is not
known, phase is assumed to be worst case (–l80° to +180°).
Forward Reflection Uncertainty
Equation 10-1. Forward Reflection Magnitude Uncertainty
∆S 11 ( mag ) =
2
( Systematic + Stability ) + Noise
2
Where:
2
Systematic = E DF + E RF S 11 + E SF S 11 + E LF S 21 S 12 + A M S 11
Stability =
2
2
C +R
2
2
4
2
2
2
2
2
C = C RM1 ( 1 + S 11 ) + 4C TM1 S 11 + C RM2 S 21 S 12
2
2
2
R = ( R R1 ( 1 + S 11 ) + 2R T 1 S 11 ) + ( R R2 S 21 S 12 )
2
2
2
2
Noise = ( N T S 11 ) + N F
Equation 10-2. Forward Reflection Phase Uncertainty
∆S 11 ( phase )
–1 
( Systematic + Stability ) + Noise 
= sin  --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + 2C TP1
S 11


2
2
Where:
2
Systematic = E DF + E RF S 11 + E SF S 11 + E LF S 21 S 12 + sin ( A P ) S 11
Stability =
2
2
C +R
2
2
4
2
2
2
2
2
C = C RM1 ( 1 + S 11 ) + 4C TM1 S 11 + C RM2 S 21 S 12
2
2
2
R = ( R R1 ( 1 + S 11 ) + 2R T 1 S 11 ) + ( R R2 S 21 S 12 )
2
2
2
Noise = ( N T S 11 ) + N F
10-8
2
Determining System Measurement Uncertainties
Measurement Uncertainty Equations
Forward Transmission Uncertainty
Equation 10-3. Forward Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty
∆S 21 ( mag ) =
2
( Systematic + Stability ) + Noise
2
Where:
Systematic = E XF + S 21 ( E TF + E SF S 11 + E LF S 22 + E SF E LF S 21 S 12 + A M )
2
Stability =
2
2
2
2
2
C +R
2
2
2
2
C = S 21 ( C TM1 + C TM2 + ( C R1 S 11 ) + ( C R2 S 22 ) )
2
2
R = S 21 ( ( R T 1 + R R1 S 11 ) + ( R T 2 + R R2 S 22 ) )
2
2
2
Noise = ( N T S 21 ) + N F
Equation 10-4. Forward Transmission Phase Uncertainty
∆S 21 ( phase )
–1 
( Systematic + Stability ) + Noise 
= sin  --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + C TP1 + C TP2
S 21


2
2
Where:
Systematic = E XF + S 21 ( E TF + E SF S 11 + E LF S 22 + E SF E LF S 21 S 12 + sin ( A P ) )
2
Stability =
2
2
2
2
C +R
2
2
2
2
2
C = S 21 ( C TM1 + C TM2 + ( C R1 S 11 ) + ( C R2 S 22 ) )
2
2
R = S 21 ( ( R T 1 + R R1 S 11 ) + ( R T 2 + R R2 S 22 ) )
2
2
2
Noise = ( N T S 21 ) + N F
10-9
Determining System Measurement Uncertainties
Measurement Uncertainty Equations
Reverse Reflection Uncertainty
Equation 10-5. Reverse Reflection Magnitude Uncertainty
∆S 22 ( mag ) =
2
( Systematic + Stability ) + Noise
2
Where:
2
Systematic = E DR + E RR S 22 + E SR S 22 + E LR S 21 S 12 + A M S 22
Stability =
2
2
C +R
2
2
4
2
2
2
2
2
C = C RM2 ( 1 + S 22 ) + 4C TM2 S 22 + C RM1 S 21 S 12
2
2
2
R = ( R R2 ( 1 + S 22 ) + 2R T 2 S 22 ) + ( R R1 S 21 S 12 )
2
2
2
2
Noise = ( N T S 22 ) + N F
Equation 10-6. Reverse Reflection Phase Uncertainty
2
2
– 1  ( Systematic + Stability ) + Noise 
∆S 22 ( phase ) = sin  --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + 2C TP2
S 22


Where:
2
Systematic = E DR + E RR S 22 + E SR S 22 + E LR S 21 S 12 + sin ( A P ) S 22
Stability =
2
C +R
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
2
2
C = C RM2 ( 1 + S 22 ) + 4C TM2 S 22 + C RM1 S 21 S 12
2
2
2
R = ( R R2 ( 1 + S 22 ) + 2R T 2 S 22 ) + ( R R1 S 21 S 12 )
2
2
2
Noise = ( N T S 22 ) + N F
10-10
2
Determining System Measurement Uncertainties
Measurement Uncertainty Equations
Reverse Transmission Uncertainty
Equation 10-7. Reverse Transmission Magnitude Uncertainty
2
∆S 12 ( mag ) =
( Systematic + Stability ) + Noise
2
Where:
Systematic = E XR + S 12 ( E TR + E SR S 22 + E LR S 11 + E SR E LR S 21 S 12 + A M )
2
Stability =
2
2
2
2
C +R
2
2
2
2
2
C = S 12 ( C TM1 + C TM2 + ( C R1 S 11 ) + ( C R2 S 22 ) )
2
2
R = S 12 ( ( R T 1 + R R1 S 11 ) + ( R T 2 + R R2 S 22 ) )
2
2
2
Noise = ( N T S 12 ) + N F
Equation 10-8. Reverse Transmission Phase Uncertainty
∆S 12 ( phase )
–1 
( Systematic + Stability ) + Noise 
= sin  --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- + C TP1 + C TP2
S 12


2
2
Where:
Systematic = E XR + S 12 ( E TR + E SR S 22 + E LR S 11 + E SR E LR S 21 S 12 + sin ( A P ) )
2
Stability =
2
2
2
2
C +R
2
2
2
2
2
C = S 12 ( C TM1 + C TM2 + ( C R1 S 11 ) + ( C R2 S 22 ) )
2
2
R = S 12 ( ( R T 1 + R R1 S 11 ) + ( R T 2 + R R2 S 22 ) )
2
2
2
Noise = ( N T S 12 ) + N F
10-11
Determining System Measurement Uncertainties
Measurement Uncertainty Equations
10-12
Index
Numerics
6 GHz operation, Option 006, 7-3
75 Ohm impedance, Option 075,
7-4
A
accessories available, 7-5
keyboard template, 7-12
measurement accessories, 7-5
adapters, 7-9
allocation, memory, 8-12
amplifier, 7-10
Analyzer
panels
front, 3-2
analyzer display, 3-5
analyzer functions, 5-4
analyzer options available, 7-3
6 GHz operation, Option 006,
7-3
75 Ohm impedance, Option 075,
7-4
configurable test set, Option
014, 7-3
harmonic mode, Option 002, 7-3
high stability frequency
reference, Option 1D5, 7-3
rack mount flange kit with
handles, Option 1CP, 7-4
rack mount flange kit without
handles, Option 1CM, 7-4
receiver configuration, Option
011, 7-3
service and support options, 7-4
source attenuator, Option 004,
7-3
time domain, Option 010, 7-3
C
cable stability, 10-6
calculations, 9-11
computing frequency points,
9-11
expressing CITIfile data in other
data formats, 9-12
calibration, 10-2
calibration kits, 7-5
CITIfile data format, 9-3
examples, 9-5
CITIfile data formats
file formats, 9-3
operating system formats, 9-3
CITIfile data, expressing in other
data formats, 9-12
CITIfile keywords, 9-8
CITIfile terms
Index
array of data, 9-4
header, 9-4
keyword, 9-5
package, 9-4
computing frequency points, 9-11
configurable test set, Option 014,
7-3
connector repeatability, 10-5
connectors and features, rear
panel, 3-10
conserving memory, 8-18
D
data format, CITIfile, 9-3
data storage, 8-12
data, storing to disk, 8-16
definitions, specifications, 1-2, 2-2
determining memory
requirements, 8-14
display, analyzer, 3-5
drift errors, 10-2
E
equations
forward reflection uncertainty,
10-8
forward transmission
uncertainty, 10-9
reverse reflection uncertainty,
10-10
reverse transmission
uncertainty, 10-11
uncertainty, 10-8
error correction, 10-2
error messages, 6-2
error messages in alphabetical
order, 6-3
error messages in numerical
order, 6-26
expressing CITIfile data in other
data formats, 9-12
F
features, front panel, 3-2
file formats, 9-3
forward
reflection uncertainty, 10-8
transmission uncertainty, 10-9
forward reflection uncertainty,
10-8
frequency points, computing, 9-11
front panel features, 3-2
functions, analyzer, 5-4
G
general information,
specifications, 1-22, 2-18
H
hardkey definitions, 5-4
harmonic mode, Option 002, 7-3
high stability frequency reference,
Option 1D5, 7-3
K
key definitions, 5-4
keyboard template, 7-12
kits
verification, 7-9
kits, calibration, 7-5
M
measurement
calibration, 10-2
uncertainty, 10-1
uncertainty equations, 10-8
measurement accessories, 7-5
calibration kits, 7-5
minimum loss pads and
adapters, 7-9
RF ECal modules and PC
software, 7-7
verification kit, 7-9
memory, 8-12
non-volatile, 8-12
volatile, 8-12
memory allocation, 8-12
conserving memory, 8-18
determining memory
requirements, 8-14
storing data to disk, 8-16
types of memory and data
storage, 8-12
using saved calibration sets,
8-18
menu maps, 4-2
minimum loss pads, 7-9
N
non-volatile memory, 8-12
O
operating system formats, 9-3
options available, analyzer, 7-3
options, service and support, 7-4
P
pads, minimum loss, 7-9
PC software, 7-7
1
Index
performance, determining, 10-5
power meters, 7-10, 7-11
preset state, 8-2
probe, 7-10
R
rack mount flange kit with
handles, Option 1CP, 7-4
rack mount flange kit without
handles, Option 1CM, 7-4
random errors, 10-2, 10-4
raw error terms, 10-2
rear panel features and
connectors, 3-10
receiver configuration, Option
011, 7-3
repeatability, connector, 10-5
repeatable errors, 10-2
residual errors, 10-2, 10-3
reverse
reflection uncertainty, 10-10
transmission uncertainty, 10-11
RF ECal modules, 7-7
RF limiter, 7-10
forward reflection, 10-8
forward transmission, 10-9
reverse reflection, 10-10
reverse transmission, 10-11
uncertainty, measurement, 10-1
V
verification kit, 7-9
volatile memory, 8-12
S
saved calibration sets, 8-18
service and support options, 7-4
settings and data, 3-2
softkey definitions, 5-4
source attenuator, Option 004, 7-3
specifications, 1-22, 2-18
definitions, 1-2, 2-2
general information, 1-22, 2-18
stability, cable, 10-6
storing data to disk, 8-16
system measurement
uncertainty, 10-1
system performance, 10-5
systematic errors, 10-2, 10-3
T
test configuration accessories,
7-10
amplifier, 7-10
power meters, 7-10, 7-11
probe, 7-10
RF limiter, 7-10
time domain, Option 010, 7-3
U
uncertainties
cable stability, 10-6
connector repeatability, 10-5
uncertainty
equations, 10-8
2
Index